This is a modern-English version of Industrial Arts Design: A Textbook of Practical Methods for Students, Teachers, and Craftsmen, originally written by Varnum, William H. (William Harrison). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Courtesy of the Rookwood Potteries

Thanks to the Rookwood Potteries

Firing the Kiln

Firing the kiln


VOCATIONAL EDUCATION SERIES

Career Education Series

SUPERVISING EDITOR

Managing Editor

FRED D. CRAWSHAW, M.E.

FRED D. CRAWSHAW, M.Eng.

Professor of manual arts, the university of Wisconsin

Professor of Manual Arts, University of Wisconsin

INDUSTRIAL ARTS DESIGN

A TEXTBOOK OF PRACTICAL METHODS FOR STUDENTS,
TEACHERS, AND CRAFTSMEN

BY

WILLIAM H. VARNUM

A TEXTBOOK OF PRACTICAL METHODS FOR STUDENTS,
TEACHERS, AND CRAFTSMEN

BY

WILLIAM H. VARNUM

ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF DRAWING AND DESIGN

ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF DRAWING AND DESIGN

UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN

University of Wisconsin

SCOTT, FORESMAN AND COMPANY

Scott, Foresman and Company

CHICAGONEW YORK

CHICAGO NEW YORK

Copyright 1916 by

Copyright 1916 by

Scott, Foresman and Company

Scott, Foresman & Company


PREFACE

Place for the Book. As a textbook, Industrial Arts Design is a practical guide for designing in wood, clay, and base and precious metals. It is intended for individual student use in the High Schools, Normal Schools, and Colleges and as a reference book for elementary school teachers. Its more complex problems are intended as definite helps to the industrial arts designer or craftsman. The wood problems are treated with special reference to their adaptability to bench and cabinet work.

Place for the Book. As a textbook, Industrial Design is a practical guide for designing with wood, clay, and both base and precious metals. It's meant for individual students in high schools, normal schools, and colleges, and serves as a reference book for elementary school teachers. Its more complex problems are designed to provide specific assistance to industrial arts designers or craftsmen. The wood problems focus particularly on their suitability for bench and cabinet work.

Need of the Book. It has been written to fill a decided demand for a textbook that shall, without loss of time, directly apply well-recognized principles of general design to specific materials and problems encountered in the Industrial Arts. A brief description of the decorative processes adapted to the materials under discussion with the design principles directly applying to these processes, insures designs that may be worked out in the studio or shop. It is hoped that this provision will eliminate the large number of impractical designs that are frequently entirely unfitted to the technic of the craft. This lack of mutual technical understanding between the teacher of design and the shop work instructor is the cause of friction that it is hoped will be removed by the methods advocated in these pages.

Need of the Book. This book has been created to meet a clear need for a textbook that quickly applies well-established design principles to specific materials and challenges in the Industrial Arts. It provides a concise overview of the decorative techniques suited to the materials being discussed, along with design principles that relate directly to those techniques, ensuring that designs can be realized in the studio or workshop. We hope this approach will reduce the number of impractical designs that are often unsuitable for the technical aspects of the craft. The lack of mutual technical understanding between design teachers and shop instructors often leads to friction, which we aim to alleviate through the methods proposed in these pages.

The Author's Motive. It has been the intention to reduce unrelated and abstract theories to a minimum and reach directly rules and conclusions that shall be applicable to typical materials in common use in the schools and industries. The original conception materialized in the publication of a series of articles upon Design in the Industrial Arts Magazine, in 1915. These articles were favorably received and their results in the schools proved highly satisfactory. Through this encouragement, the articles have been reprinted in book form, enriched by the addition of illustrations, review questions, and three chapters on color with its applications.

The Author's Motive. The goal has been to minimize unrelated and abstract theories and focus directly on rules and conclusions that can be applied to common materials used in schools and industries. This initial idea took shape with the publication of a series of articles on Design in the Industrial Arts Magazine in 1915. These articles received positive feedback, and their impact in schools was very satisfying. Thanks to this support, the articles have been reprinted as a book, enhanced with illustrations, review questions, and three chapters about color and its applications.

Industrial Arts Design develops the principles of industrial design in a new and logical form which, it is believed, will simplify the teaching of craft design. Chapters I to V deal with the elementary problems confronting the designer as he begins the first steps on his working drawing; Chapters VI to VIII show the methods by which he may express his individuality through contour or outline enrichment, while Chapters IX to XVII explain the treatment of the most difficult form of decoration, that of surface enrichment.

Industrial Design outlines the principles of industrial design in a fresh and logical way that aims to make teaching craft design easier. Chapters I to V address the basic issues a designer faces when starting their working drawing; Chapters VI to VIII illustrate how they can showcase their uniqueness through contour or outline enhancement, while Chapters IX to XVII cover the approach to the most challenging type of decoration, which is surface enhancement.

The Appendix. The appendix is added to show the manner in[4] which the rules may be directly applied to a course of study in either pottery or art metal. The present work is not intended to include the chemistry of glaze mixing or other technical requirements to which reference is made in the appendix; consequently the reader is referred to "The Potter's Craft" by C.F. Binns and "Pottery" by George J. Cox for fuller explanations of the formulae and technicalities of the craft.

The Appendix. The appendix is included to demonstrate how the rules can be directly applied to a study path in either pottery or metal art. This work doesn't cover the chemistry of glaze mixing or other technical aspects mentioned in the appendix; therefore, the reader is directed to "The Potter's Craft" by C.F. Binns and "Pottery" by George J. Cox for more detailed explanations of the formulas and technicalities of the craft.

Source of Principles. The principles herein advocated are directly related to architectural design which is to be regarded as the standard authority for the industrial arts designer. It was necessary to state these principles in the form of sufficiently flexible rules which would allow the student to use his own judgment, but at the same time, restrict him to the essential principles of good design.

Source of Principles. The principles discussed here are closely tied to architectural design, which should be seen as the main authority for industrial arts designers. It was important to present these principles as flexible guidelines that enable the student to exercise their own judgment while still adhering to the fundamental principles of good design.

Rules. This presentation of the principles of design by means of flexible rules in concrete form, serves to vitalize design by virtue of their immediate application to the material. The rules likewise save time for both pupil and instructor. This is regarded as an important factor, inasmuch as the amount of time usually allotted to classroom teaching of design is limited.

Rules. This presentation of design principles through flexible, concrete rules helps to energize design because they can be applied directly to the material. The rules also save time for both the student and the teacher. This is considered an important factor, since the time usually given to classroom teaching of design is limited.

While these rules are applied to the specific materials, the designer may readily adjust them to other materials and find them equally applicable. Direct copying of designs from the illustrations is a dangerous expedient and is to be discouraged as a form of plagiarism which will eventually destroy the student's initiative, originality, and reputation for creative work.

While these rules apply to specific materials, the designer can easily adapt them to other materials and find them just as relevant. Directly copying designs from the illustrations is risky and should be discouraged as a form of plagiarism that will ultimately undermine the student's initiative, originality, and reputation for creative work.

Results. From the tests so far observed, it has been seen that under design guidance, the projects become more noticeably individual in character, lighter and better in construction, and more fully adjusted to their environment. The student's interest and initiative in his work are strengthened, and he completes the truly valuable cycle of the educative process of evolving his own idea and crystallizing it in the completed work. It is hoped that this book will tend to develop higher standards of good design in schools, industrial establishments, and the home.

Results. From the tests observed so far, it has become clear that with design guidance, the projects take on a more distinct character, feel lighter and are built better, and are more in tune with their surroundings. The student's interest and initiative in their work are enhanced, allowing them to complete the meaningful cycle of the educational process by developing their own ideas and turning them into finished work. It is hoped that this book will help raise the standards of good design in schools, businesses, and homes.

In conclusion, the author expresses his thanks to the following for their valuable suggestions and assistance in contributed illustrations: Miss D.F. Wilson, Miss Edna Howard, Miss Elizabeth Upham, Miss A.M. Anderson, Mr. J.M. Dorrans, Mr. J.B. Robinson, author of "Architectural Composition," and others to whom reference is made in the text.

In conclusion, the author thanks the following individuals for their valuable suggestions and help with the illustrations: Miss D.F. Wilson, Miss Edna Howard, Miss Elizabeth Upham, Miss A.M. Anderson, Mr. J.M. Dorrans, Mr. J.B. Robinson, author of "Architectural Composition," and others mentioned in the text.

William Harrison Varnum.

William Harrison Varnum.

Madison, Wisconsin.
April, 1916.

Madison, Wisconsin.
April 1916.


CONTENTS

CHAPTERPAGE
I.Industrial Arts Design Divisions7
II.The Main Mass and Its Proportions13
III.Main Horizontal Sections of the Primary Mass19
IV.Vertical Major Sections of the Main Body33
V.Appendages and the Rules That Apply to Them43
VI.Enhancing the Shapes or Outlines of Wooden Designs57
VII.Enhancing the Shapes or Outlines of Clay Designs77
VIII.Enhancement of the Shapes or Outlines of Designs in Base and Precious Metals87
IX.Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Wood99
X.Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Wood. (Continued)117
XI.Surface Enrichment with Smaller Sections of Large Primary Masses in Wood133
XII.Clay Surface Enhancement145
XIII.Surface Enrichment of Precious Metals. Small Flat Surfaces160
XIV.Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses in Base and Precious Metals179
XV.Color: Hue, Value, and Chroma; Stains194
XVI.Color and Its Connection to Industrial Arts Design: Large Wooden Surfaces, Walls, and Ceilings201
XVII.Color and Its Connection to Industrial Arts Design: Small Surfaces in Clay and Metal209
Complete Rules Summary218
Appendix223
(a) A Complete Course of Study for the Applied Arts in Thin Base and Precious Metals. Relation of the Rules to the Problems224
(b) A Complete Course of Study for the Applied Arts in Pottery. Relation of the Rules to the Problems237
Index245

INDUSTRIAL ARTS DESIGN

Industrial Design


Chapter 1
DIVISIONS OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS DESIGN

Non-technical Criticism

This book has been written with the view of presenting design from the standpoint of the industrial arts. An instructor generally experiences difficulty in finding the exact word to use when criticizing a student's drawing. The student has equal difficulty in understanding the criticism. There is little wonder that he is confused, when the rather ambiguous terms "good-looking," "ugly," "squatty," and "stiff" are used to express qualities that can be expressed only in terms of design.

This book is aimed at showing design from the perspective of industrial arts. Instructors often struggle to find the right words when critiquing a student's drawing. Likewise, students find it hard to grasp the critiques. It's no surprise that they get confused when vague terms like "good-looking," "ugly," "squatty," and "stiff" are used to describe qualities that should be expressed in design terms.

Intelligent Analysis

The lack of understanding between the pupil and the teacher may be compared to the attitude of the average individual "who knows what he likes." He is on an equally insecure footing regarding industrial design. His reason for liking or disliking a certain thing may depend upon some whim or fancy, the popular fashion of the times, or a desire to possess a duplicate of something he has seen. As a consumer with purchasing power, he should have the ability to analyze intelligently the contents of catalogs and store windows with the thought of securing the best in industrial art—something that may be accepted as standard one hundred years from now.

The misunderstanding between the student and the teacher can be compared to the mindset of the average person "who knows what he likes." He's equally unsure when it comes to industrial design. His reasons for liking or disliking something might be based on a whim, current trends, or a desire to own a copy of something he's seen. As a consumer with buying power, he should be able to analyze intelligently the contents of catalogs and store displays, aiming to find the best in industrial art—something that might still be considered standard a hundred years from now.

It is, therefore, the intention to present design of industrial character in its simplest form, freed from technicalities or ambiguous statements. It is intended to give the average individual not particularly interested in drawing or design a knowledge of the subject, based upon principles that have survived for hundreds of years in architectural monuments and history.

It is, therefore, the goal to present industrial design in its simplest form, stripped of technical jargon or vague statements. The aim is to provide the average person, who may not be particularly interested in drawing or design, with an understanding of the subject, grounded in principles that have stood the test of time in architectural landmarks and history.

[8] The First Major Division of Industrial Arts Design Image 1
Results of Clear Criticism

It is possible that the presentation of these principles may enable the instructor in the public schools to guide his pupil away from the heavy and expensive stereotyped designs, and by clear and simple criticism, lead him to better forms of construction. He may also be [9] helped to lead the pupil to design problems in harmony with his home surroundings and thus avoid the introduction of an inharmonious element into what may possibly be a harmonious setting. The teacher, pupil, or layman should use his knowledge of the subject as a basis for criticism or appreciation of the field of the industrial arts.

It’s possible that sharing these principles could help public school teachers guide their students away from outdated and costly designs. Through straightforward and clear feedback, teachers can encourage students to explore better construction methods. They can also assist students in creating design projects that match their home environments, preventing any mismatched elements from disrupting a potentially harmonious setting. Teachers, students, and anyone interested should use their understanding of the subject as a foundation for providing feedback or appreciating the field of industrial arts.

Requirements of an Industrial Problem

In order to start successfully upon a design, it is necessary to know what qualities a good industrial article should possess. Whether one is designing a bird-house, a chocolate set, or a gold pendant, the article must meet three needs: (1) It must be of service to the community or to the individual; (2) It must be made of some durable material; (3) It must possess beauty of proportion, outline, and color.

To successfully start a design, it's important to understand what qualities a good industrial product should have. Whether you're designing a birdhouse, a chocolate set, or a gold pendant, the product must fulfill three requirements: (1) It should serve the community or the individual; (2) It should be made of durable materials; (3) It should have beauty in proportion, shape, and color.

Ruskin said that a line of beauty must also be a line of service. The "stream line body" in automobile construction is the result of the automobile maker's attempt to combine beauty with service. This is the attitude that should govern the union of beauty and service in all of the industrial arts.

Ruskin said that a line of beauty must also be a line of service. The "streamlined body" in car design is the result of the manufacturer's effort to blend beauty with functionality. This mindset should guide the combination of beauty and service in all industrial arts.

Divisions in Design Evolution and Enrichment

There are three divisions or phases in the designing of a structure and its enrichment. These are: (1) Structural Design; (2) Contour Enrichment; (3) Surface Enrichment. Some objects are carried through only one of these divisions, while others are developed through all three of them.

There are three stages in designing a structure and enhancing it. These are: (1) Structural Design; (2) Contour Enrichment; (3) Surface Enrichment. Some objects go through just one of these stages, while others go through all three.

First Major Division

Plate 1, illustrative of the first division, deals naturally enough with the planning of the constructive or utilitarian lines of an object and its parts. It may be termed Structural or Constructive Design. Questions of how high or how long an object should be, to harmonize with its width, the proper placing of rails, shelves, and brackets, the determination of the greatest and least diameter of vase forms have to be decided in this period of Proportions and Space Relations.

Plate 1, which represents the first division, naturally focuses on planning the functional or practical aspects of an object and its components. This can be referred to as Structural or Constructive Design. During this stage of Proportions and Space Relations, considerations include how tall or long an object should be to balance with its width, the correct placement of rails, shelves, and brackets, and figuring out the maximum and minimum diameter for vase shapes.

The knowledge of tools and materials, and of the manner in which they may be used for constructive purposes, influences the solution of these questions and others which we shall shortly discuss. Strictly utilitarian objects are seldom carried past this stage of development.

The understanding of tools and materials, and how they can be used for building purposes, affects the answers to these questions and others that we will discuss soon. Purely practical objects rarely go beyond this level of development.

Second Major Division

Plate 2 indicates the next logical division—Contour Enrichment—or the period of the enrichment of the structural outline or contour. The bounding lines, or contours, of the structure may be enriched in many ways, as, for example, curving certain portions to soften the severity of the plain structure. The garden urn and small stool have contours treated in this manner. Chippendale, Sheraton, and Hepplewhite furniture, simplified to the accepted range of shop technic, vary the straight lines of mission furniture and come within the possible developments of this division.

Plate 2 marks the next logical section—Contour Enrichment—referring to the time when the structural outline or contour is enhanced. The boundaries, or contours, of the structure can be enriched in various ways, such as by curving certain areas to soften the harshness of the plain design. The garden urn and small stool have contours designed in this way. Chippendale, Sheraton, and Hepplewhite furniture, refined to fit typical workshop techniques, alter the straight lines of mission furniture and fall within the potential advancements of this category.

[10] The Second Major Division in Industrial Arts Design Plate 2
Effects of Second Division

The cement fence post at C, Plate 2, is a strict utilitarian problem without interest. The post at D, enriched by a bevel, has equal utilitarian and increased aesthetic interest and value.

The cement fence post at C, Plate 2, is a purely functional issue with no appeal. The post at D, enhanced by a bevel, has the same functionality but also greater aesthetic interest and value.

Third Major Division

Plate 3 illustrates the last division of evolution and concerns itself with the application of design to the surface of the otherwise complete structure. This division is commonly called applied surface design or decorative design. It is readily seen that this division should be considered after the structure has been carefully planned. To separate this division from the period of structural or contour enrichment we will call it Surface Enrichment.

Plate 3 demonstrates the final stage of evolution and focuses on how design is applied to the surface of an already complete structure. This stage is often referred to as applied surface design or decorative design. It's clear that this stage should be addressed after the structure has been thoroughly planned. To distinguish this stage from the time of structural or contour enhancement, we'll refer to it as Surface Enrichment.

Steps in Design Evolution

It may be seen from the foregoing discussion that a design may be carried through the following steps: (1) Blocking in the enclosing lines of the design, as at Figure B, Plate 2, adding to this whatever may be needed for structural purposes, keeping the lines as nearly vertical and horizontal as possible; (2) Enriching and varying the outline or contour. It is well for elementary wood workers to use this step with extreme caution, while less reserve is necessary in clay and metal; (3) After careful consideration in determining the need of additional decoration, the last step, surface enrichment, should be used. The following chapters will take up these steps in the order stated above.

It can be seen from the previous discussion that a design can be developed through the following steps: (1) Establishing the enclosing lines of the design, as shown in Figure B, Plate 2, adding whatever is necessary for structural support, while keeping the lines as vertical and horizontal as possible; (2) Enhancing and varying the outline or contour. It's important for beginner woodworkers to approach this step with caution, while more freedom can be used in clay and metal; (3) After carefully considering the need for additional decoration, the final step, surface enhancement, should be applied. The following chapters will discuss these steps in the order mentioned above.

Ideal Correlation

The ideal method of developing the principles set forth in this chapter includes correlated activity in the shop by working out the project in the required material. As the technic of the individual improves, the larger range of design principles will be found to accompany and parallel his increasing skill.

The best way to develop the principles in this chapter is through related activities in the workshop by working on the project with the necessary materials. As a person's skills improve, they'll discover that a broader range of design principles will align with and support their growing abilities.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What three requirements should be met in a well designed industrial article?

1. What three requirements should a good industrial article fulfill?

2. State three major divisions in industrial arts design.

2. Name three key areas in industrial arts design.

3. State briefly the problems to be considered in each division.

3. Summarize the issues to be covered in each section.

4. What is the last and ideal step for the designer?

4. What is the ultimate and ideal step for the designer?

[12] The Third Major Division in Industrial Arts Design Plate 3

Chapter 2
THE PRIMARY MASS AND ITS PROPORTIONS

The Architectural Method

Upon first observing a building, one seldom notices details of structure. He sees the large mass as it is silhouetted against the sky. Nearer approach discloses mouldings, cornices, and doorways; while careful analytical study shows the technical points of construction. The architect, in his original planning, thinks in terms of masses, widths, and heights, disregarding at first the details and color. As architecture stands for parent design principles and represents some of the world's best examples of composition and design, industrial design should be based upon the best examples of architectural design. To a certain degree, also, the methods of the industrial arts designer should be those of the architect.

When you first look at a building, you usually don’t notice the structural details. You see the large shape against the sky. As you get closer, you start to notice the moldings, cornices, and doorways; and a detailed study reveals the technical aspects of construction. In their initial planning, architects think about mass, width, and height, often ignoring details and color at first. Since architecture reflects fundamental design principles and showcases some of the best examples of composition and design in the world, industrial design should be founded on these exemplary architectural designs. In many ways, the methods of industrial designers should mirror those of architects.

The Industrial Arts Method

It is necessary to think at first of our problem as a single mass or solid, bounded by enclosing dimensions of width, height, and thickness. Details like a mirror, handles, brackets, or knobs may project outside of this mass, but for the time being, they may be disregarded. Figure B, Plate 2, shows this manner of thinking, and will enable us to regard the problem as a big, simple mass so that the entire object, unobstructed by small details, may be seen.

It’s important to initially view our problem as a single object or solid, defined by its width, height, and depth. Extras like mirrors, handles, brackets, or knobs might stick out from this object, but for now, we can overlook them. Figure B, Plate 2, illustrates this way of thinking and allows us to see the problem as a large, simple mass, making the whole object visible without the distraction of small details.

The Primary Mass

This is the method of thinking about the problem which should precede the drawing. To further describe this mass, which will be called the single or Primary Mass, it is necessary to think of the intended service of the project. A rather hazy idea of making a vase or a stool to be put to no particular use, may have been the original motive. Now the exact service should be defined as it will have a marked effect upon the shape of this primary mass.

This is the way of thinking about the problem that should come before drawing. To better explain this mass, which we’ll refer to as the single or Primary Mass, it’s important to consider the intended purpose of the project. A vague idea of creating a vase or a stool with no specific function may have been the original inspiration. Now, the exact purpose should be clarified, as it will significantly influence the shape of this primary mass.

[14] Analysis of the Primary Mass Plate 4
Service

Horizontal and Vertical Primary Masses

Rule 1a. A primary mass must be either vertical or horizontal according to the intended service, unless prohibited by technical requirements. Service is an important factor inasmuch as it limits the intended use of the mass. A mass is horizontal when its largest dimension is horizontal. When the horizontal dimension of this [15] mass is reduced until the main vertical dimension is longer than the main horizontal one, it becomes a vertical mass. As an example, a davenport is generally a horizontal mass intended to hold a number of people. When the mass is narrowed to the point where the vertical dimension exceeds the horizontal, it becomes a chair for one person. A low bowl may be intended for pansies, but as soon as the service changes and we design it for goldenrod, it becomes a vertical mass. The fable of the fox who, upon being invited to dine with the stork, found the tall vases unfitted for his use illustrates the change of mass with the change of service.

Rule 1a. A primary mass must be either vertical or horizontal based on its intended use, unless there are technical restrictions. The intended use is crucial since it defines how the mass can be utilized. A mass is considered horizontal when its largest dimension is horizontal. When the horizontal dimension of this [15] mass is shrunk to the point where its main vertical dimension is longer than its main horizontal dimension, it turns into a vertical mass. For instance, a couch is typically a horizontal mass meant to accommodate several people. When the mass is compacted so that the vertical dimension surpasses the horizontal, it transforms into a chair for one person. A shallow bowl may be designed for pansies, but if the purpose shifts to accommodate goldenrod, it becomes a vertical mass. The story of the fox who, when invited to dinner by the stork, found the tall vases unsuitable for him perfectly illustrates how the mass changes with its intended use.

Figures 1 and 4, Plate 4, are examples of horizontal masses with the dark lines indicating the dominance of the horizontal lines and planes. The shelter house contains a long bench, making necessary the long horizontal lines of the building. The calendar holder has to be a horizontal mass because of the restrictions imposed by the shape of the calendar pad.

Figures 1 and 4, Plate 4, are examples of horizontal shapes, with the dark lines showing the prominence of the horizontal lines and surfaces. The shelter house features a long bench that requires the extended horizontal lines of the building. The calendar holder needs to be a horizontal shape due to the limitations of the calendar pad's design.

Figures 2 and 3 are vertical masses. The vase is intended for tall flowers, while the chair, as has already been mentioned, must meet the needs of a single person. Utility and service then have been found to give the primary mass a given direction or dominance.

Figures 2 and 3 are vertical shapes. The vase is made for tall flowers, while the chair, as mentioned earlier, is designed for one person. Utility and functionality have been found to give the primary shape a certain direction or emphasis.

Drawing the Primary Mass

The designer now represents this mass by drawing a rectangle similar to the block outline of Figure B, Plate 2. It is now necessary to see if the foundation stones of this rectangle have been laid correctly; in other words, to test the proportions of the primary vertical or horizontal mass.

The designer now represents this mass by drawing a rectangle that looks like the block outline of Figure B, Plate 2. It’s important to check if the foundation stones of this rectangle have been laid correctly; in other words, to test the proportions of the main vertical or horizontal mass.

Proportions of the Primary Masses

Rule 1b. A primary mass should have the ratio of one to three, three to four, three to five, five to eight, seven to ten, or some similar proportion difficult for the eye to detect readily and analyze. Proportions are generally expressed in terms of ratios. A surface of five by eight inches would give a ratio of five to eight; ten by sixteen feet is reducible to the same ratio. Certain ratios are monotonous and offend the eye by their lack of variety. Ratios such as one to one or one to two are of this class and should be avoided. If these ratios could speak they would resemble people talking in a low monotonous tone of voice.

Rule 1b. A primary mass should have a ratio of one to three, three to four, three to five, five to eight, seven to ten, or some similar proportion that’s hard for the eye to quickly notice and analyze. Proportions are usually expressed as ratios. A surface measuring five by eight inches has a ratio of five to eight; ten by sixteen feet can be simplified to the same ratio. Some ratios are dull and unpleasant to the eye because they lack variety. Ratios like one to one or one to two fall into this category and should be avoided. If these ratios could talk, they would sound like people speaking in a flat, monotonous tone.

[16] Proportionate Ratios. Process of Designing Plate 5
Unsatisfactory Ratios

Certain other ratios are weak and indeterminate, showing a lack of clear thinking. They are like people with no definite or cleancut [17] ideas upon a subject they discuss. Examples in this class show ratios of two to two and one-eighth, or three to three and one-fourth, neither positively square nor frankly rectangular. They hide around the corner, as it were, waiting to be anything. Figure 5, Plate 5, is an example of unsatisfactory proportionate ratios of the primary mass. The blotting tablet is nearly square, while the candlestick and sconce, which should have been designed with strongly vertical masses, lack the type of definite thinking that results in a decided vertical dimension.

Certain other ratios are weak and unclear, reflecting a lack of clear thinking. They resemble people who have no definite or straightforward ideas about the topic they’re discussing. Examples of this include ratios like two to two and one-eighth or three to three and one-fourth, which are neither clearly square nor distinctly rectangular. They linger around the edges, so to speak, ready to be anything. Figure 5, Plate 5, is an example of unsatisfactory proportionate ratios of the main mass. The blotting tablet is almost square, while the candlestick and sconce, which should have been designed with strong vertical shapes, lack the kind of clear thinking that leads to a strong vertical dimension.

Disregarding the improvement in technic, Figure 6 shows problems designed with a definite knowledge of proportion. The metal objects are refined in their dimensions, and pleasing to the eye. Tests have been made with the idea of determining what the eye considers perfectly natural and agreeable proportion. This has been found to be the ratio of two to three. Consequently, it is clear why Figure 6 shows objects more pleasing than those in Figure 5.

Disregarding the improvement in technique, Figure 6 shows issues designed with a clear understanding of proportion. The metal objects have refined dimensions and are visually pleasing. Tests have been conducted to determine what the eye perceives as perfectly natural and agreeable proportions. This has been found to be the ratio of two to three. Therefore, it’s clear why Figure 6 presents objects that are more pleasing than those in Figure 5.

It may be felt that too much space is being given to this subject of proportion. It should be remembered, however, that the industrial arts are intimately associated with daily life and that unless proportions are pleasing to our aesthetic sense, many articles of common use shortly become intolerable.

It might seem like we're spending too much time on the topic of proportion. However, it's important to remember that the industrial arts are closely linked to our everyday lives, and if the proportions aren’t visually appealing, many commonly used items quickly become unbearable.

Preliminary Thinking in Terms of Design

This preliminary portion of the designer's task has been given to thinking out the problem and drawing one rectangle. There is a tendency to start the design by pushing the pencil over the paper with a forlorn hope that a design may be evolved with little mental effort. This should be regarded as illogical and unworthy of the desired end. A rectangle of the most prominent surface of the problem, based upon the desired service of the project, and the best proportions which our knowledge of design and understanding of the limitations of construction will permit, should be the final result of the first study. From now on through the succeeding steps, the details of the problem will become more and more clear, as the technical limitations of the tools and materials governing the designer's ideas and controlling and shaping the work are better understood, until all governing factors become crystallized in the form of a working drawing or model. This is a strictly professional practice as illustrated in Figure 7, which shows the skilled Rookwood potter[18] developing a vase form, the definite embodiment of correct thinking in terms of the material which is constantly before him.

This initial part of the designer's task involves figuring out the problem and drawing one rectangle. There's a tendency to begin the design by aimlessly moving the pencil across the paper, hoping that a design will emerge with minimal mental effort. This approach should be seen as illogical and unworthy of the intended outcome. A rectangle representing the most significant surface of the problem, based on the desired service of the project and the best proportions that our understanding of design and construction limitations allow, should be the end result of this first study. As we move through the subsequent steps, the details of the problem will become clearer, as we gain a better understanding of the technical limitations of the tools and materials that influence the designer's ideas and shape the work, until all the governing factors are clearly defined in a working drawing or model. This is a standard professional practice, as seen in Figure 7, which shows the skilled Rookwood potter[18] developing a vase form—an exact representation of correct thinking in relation to the material that is always present.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 1a. A primary mass must be either vertical or horizontal according to the intended service, unless prohibited by technical requirements.

Rule 1a. A primary mass must be either vertical or horizontal based on its intended use, unless technical requirements dictate otherwise.

Rule 1b. A primary mass should have the ratio of one to three, three to four, three to five, five to eight, seven to ten, or some similar proportion difficult for the eye to readily detect and analyze.

Rule 1b. A primary mass should have a ratio of one to three, three to four, three to five, five to eight, seven to ten, or other similar proportions that are difficult for the eye to easily recognize and analyze.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. How does the architect first plan his elevations?

1. How does the architect initially plan their designs?

2. How should the designer first think of his problem?

2. How should the designer first approach the problem?

3. Define a horizontal primary mass.

3. Define a horizontal primary mass.

4. Define a vertical primary mass.

4. Define a vertical primary mass.

5. State some desirable ratios to be used in designing the proportions of the primary mass. Explain.

5. List some ideal ratios to consider when designing the proportions of the main structure. Explain.


Chapter 3
HORIZONTAL MAJOR DIVISIONS OF THE PRIMARY MASS

In the second chapter we discussed the nature of the primary mass in its relation to the intended service or duty it has to perform. It was found that the demands of service usually cause the primary mass to be designed with either a strong vertical or horizontal tendency.

In the second chapter we talked about the characteristics of the primary mass in relation to the specific service or duty it needs to fulfill. It was found that the requirements of that service often lead to the primary mass being designed with either a strong vertical or horizontal orientation.

Divisions of the Primary Mass

It now becomes imperative to carry the designing processes still further and divide the vertical or horizontal primary mass into parts or divisions, demanded either by structural requirements or because the appearance of the object would be materially improved by their presence. This latter point is sometimes referred to as the aesthetic requirement of the problem. There are two simple types of divisions, those crossing the primary mass horizontally and those crossing the primary mass in a vertical direction. This chapter will be limited to the subject of horizontal divisions.

It’s now essential to take the design process even further by breaking down the vertical or horizontal main mass into sections or divisions, either due to structural needs or to enhance the object's appearance significantly. This latter aspect is often called the aesthetic requirement of the problem. There are two basic types of divisions: those that cut across the main mass horizontally and those that cut across it vertically. This chapter will focus solely on horizontal divisions.

Nature and Need of Horizontal Space Divisions

If a city purchases a piece of land for park purposes, presumably a landscape architect is assigned the task of laying out the paths and drives. He does this by crossing his plan at intervals with lines to represent paths connecting important points. Under favorable conditions the architect is free to curve his path to suit his ideas. He has considerable freedom in selecting his design but the paths or roads must dip and curve in sympathy with the contour of the land and in accord with the aesthetic requirements.

If a city buys a piece of land for a park, a landscape architect is usually tasked with designing the paths and drives. He creates his design by overlaying lines at intervals to show paths that connect key areas. When conditions allow, the architect can bend the paths to match his vision. He has a lot of leeway in choosing his design, but the paths or roads need to dip and curve in harmony with the land's shape and meet aesthetic standards.

While the landscape designer has a broad latitude in his treatment of land divisions, the industrial designer or architect is restricted, on the other hand, by the structural requirements of the object and by his materials. He must cross his spaces or areas by horizontal shelves, or rails, or bands of metal that hold the structure together. As architecture is of fundamental importance in industrial design, let us see what the architect has in mind in designing a structure.

While the landscape designer has a lot of freedom in how they approach land divisions, the industrial designer or architect, on the other hand, is limited by the structural needs of the object and the materials they use. They have to connect their spaces or areas with horizontal shelves, rails, or metal bands that support the structure. Since architecture plays a crucial role in industrial design, let's explore what the architect considers when designing a structure.

[20] Steps Illustrating the Development of Horizontal Space Divisions from Primary Mass to the Structure Plate 6
Architectural Horizontal Divisions

The architect has the surface of the ground with which to start. This gives him a horizontal line as the base of his building. He considers it of major importance in his design. We find him crossing the front of his building with horizontal moulding or long bands of colored brick, paralleling the base line and otherwise interestingly dividing the vertical face of the front and sides. His guide is the bottom line of his primary mass or the line of the ground which binds the different parts of the building into a single unit. It can be readily seen that if he shifted the position of his mouldings up or down with the freedom of the landscape architect in locating his roads, he would not be planning his horizontal divisions in sympathy with the structural requirements of his primary mass.

The architect starts with the surface of the ground. This gives him a horizontal line as the foundation for his building, which he considers crucial to his design. You'll see him using horizontal molding or long bands of colored brick across the front of his building, parallel to the base line and creatively dividing the vertical surfaces of the front and sides. His reference point is the bottom line of his main structure or the ground line that connects the different parts of the building into one cohesive unit. It's clear that if he moved the position of his moldings up or down like a landscape architect does with roads, he wouldn't be aligning his horizontal divisions with the structural needs of his main mass.

These horizontal divisions or lines have a tendency to give apparent added length to an object. Thus by their judicious use a designer may make a building or room look longer than it really is.

These horizontal divisions or lines tend to create the illusion of added length for an object. By using them wisely, a designer can make a building or room appear longer than it actually is.

Let us now turn to the simpler objects with which we may be more directly concerned. The piano bench has horizontal lines crossing it, giving an effect quite similar to that of horizontal mouldings crossing a building. There may also be ornamental inlaid lines crossing the bench and intended to beautify the design, but it is to be remembered that at present we are considering the structural divisions only.

Let’s now focus on the simpler objects that we might be more directly interested in. The piano bench has horizontal lines on it, creating an effect similar to the horizontal moldings on a building. There might also be decorative inlaid lines on the bench meant to enhance the design, but remember that right now we are only looking at the structural divisions.

Designing Objects with Horizontal Divisions

Plate 6 represents a concrete example of the methods to be used in designing the horizontal divisions of a piano bench. The steps may be divided as follows:

Plate 6 is a specific example of the methods to be used in designing the horizontal sections of a piano bench. The steps can be broken down as follows:

(a) The height of a piano bench may be determined either from measurement of a similar bench or from one of the books on furniture design now on the market. The scale of one inch or one and one-half inches to the foot may be adopted. Two horizontal lines should be drawn, one for the bottom and one for the top of the bench. The distance between these lines we will arbitrarily fix at twenty inches.

(a) You can determine the height of a piano bench by measuring a similar bench or consulting one of the furniture design books available today. You can use a scale of one inch or one and a half inches to the foot. Draw two horizontal lines: one for the bottom and one for the top of the bench. We’ll set the distance between these lines at twenty inches.

[22] Applied and Constructive Design. Principle 1. Principle 2 Plate 7

(b) Many objects are designed within rectangles which enclose their main or over-all proportions. With this in view, and keeping in mind the width of the bench necessary to the accommodation of two players and the requirements of a well proportioned primary mass (Rule 1b), the lines are now drawn completing the rectangular [23] boundaries of the primary mass. The limitations of service and the restrictions of good designing give the width of the primary mass so designed as three feet and two inches, with a ratio of height to length of five to eight and one-half. It is simpler to design first the most prominent face of the object to be followed by other views later in the designing process.

(b) Many objects are created within rectangles that define their main or overall proportions. With this in mind, and considering the width of the bench needed for two players and the requirements of a well-proportioned primary mass (Rule 1b), the lines are now drawn to complete the rectangular [23] boundaries of the primary mass. The limitations of service and the principles of good design dictate that the width of this primary mass be three feet and two inches, with a height-to-length ratio of five to eight and a half. It's more straightforward to start by designing the most prominent face of the object, and then follow up with other views in the design process.

(c) By observing benches similar to the one being designed it will be seen that the horizontal divisions will take the form of a rail and a shelf, making two crossings of the primary mass dividing it into three horizontal spaces. Several trial arrangements of these structural elements are now made with the thought of making them conform to the rule governing three horizontal spaces. Rule 2b. We shall later discuss this rule and its applications fully.

(c) By looking at benches like the one we're designing, you'll notice that the horizontal sections will consist of a rail and a shelf, creating two divisions in the main body and splitting it into three horizontal sections. We are currently experimenting with several configurations of these structural elements to ensure they align with the guideline for three horizontal spaces. Rule 2b. We will discuss this rule and its applications in detail later.

(d) By selecting the best sketch of many which the designer will make he has the basis for the application of Rule 2b for the structural elements. The project now begins to take on concrete form. The top board may project slightly beyond the primary mass without materially affecting the value of the designed proportions.

(d) By choosing the best sketch from the many that the designer will create, he establishes the foundation for applying Rule 2b to the structural elements. The project is now starting to take shape. The top board may extend slightly beyond the main structure without significantly impacting the designed proportions.

Value of a Full Size Drawing

(e) The last step is the designing of the side view in relation to the front view. This enables the designer to comprehend the project as a whole. It is strongly urged that the final or shop drawing be of full size. In more elaborate designs the finer proportions are lost in the process of enlargement from a small sketch, often hurriedly executed in the shop. Again much time is lost by necessary enlargement, whereas a full size curved detail may be quickly transferred to wood by carbon paper or by holes pricked in the paper. It is not expensive or difficult to execute full size drawings; it is in accord with shop practice and the custom should be encouraged and followed on all possible occasions. See Figure 102a.

(e) The final step is designing the side view in relation to the front view. This helps the designer understand the project as a whole. It's highly recommended that the final or shop drawing be at full size. In more complex designs, the finer details can get lost when enlarging from a small sketch, which is often done quickly in the shop. A lot of time is wasted on necessary enlargements, while a full-size curved detail can be easily transferred to wood using carbon paper or by pricking holes in the paper. Creating full-size drawings isn't costly or difficult; it aligns with shop practices, and this approach should be encouraged and followed whenever possible. See Figure 102a.

The process of designing round objects is identical to that just described as illustrated by the low round bowl in Plate 7. It should be designed in a rectangle of accepted proportions. Rule 1b. The primary mass may have excellent proportions and yet the vase or bowl may remain devoid of interest. It may be commonplace.

The process of designing round objects is the same as what was just described, as shown by the low round bowl in Plate 7. It should be designed in a rectangle with accepted proportions. Rule 1b. The main shape can have great proportions, but the vase or bowl might still lack interest. It could be ordinary.

[24] Horizontal Space Divisions of the Primary Mass in Wood Plate 8

As will shortly be shown, the rules governing horizontal divisions serve as a check on the commonplace. A horizontal division generally marks the point where the outward swell of the vase contour [25] reaches its maximum width. If this widest point in the primary mass (X-Plate 7) is pleasingly located between the top and bottom of a vase form the contour will be found satisfactory.

As will soon be demonstrated, the rules for horizontal divisions help to keep things interesting. A horizontal division typically indicates where the outer curve of the vase is at its widest. If this widest point in the main shape (X-Plate 7) is nicely positioned between the top and bottom of the vase, the overall contour will be considered pleasing. [25]

Architectural Precedent for Horizontal Divisions

It is possible to continue ad infinitum with these illustrations but horizontal space divisions are nearly always present in some form, due to structural necessity or aesthetic requirements. It is an easy matter to say that these lines must divide the primary mass into "interesting" spaces, well related to each other, or "pleasingly located," but the designer must have some definite yet flexible rule to govern his work. From the analysis of many famous historic buildings and well designed industrial projects it has been found that all horizontal masses may be analyzed as dividing the primary mass into either two or three divisions or spaces, regardless of the complexity of the project.

It’s possible to keep going ad infinitum with these examples, but horizontal space divisions usually appear in some way, whether for structural reasons or aesthetic preferences. It’s easy to say that these lines should divide the main mass into “interesting” spaces that relate well to each other or are “pleasingly located,” but the designer needs to have some clear yet adaptable guidelines to direct their work. Analyzing many famous historical buildings and well-designed industrial projects reveals that all horizontal masses can be seen as dividing the main mass into either two or three divisions or spaces, regardless of how complex the project is.

Analysis of Horizontal Space Divisions

Two Horizontal Space Divisions

Rule 2a. If the primary mass is divided into two horizontal divisions, the dominance should be either in the upper or the lower section. Plate 7 shows this division of the primary mass—the simplest division of the space. A space divided just half way from top to bottom would be monotonous and expressive of the ratio of one to one. This arrangement as we have already discovered in the second chapter is not conducive to good design.

Rule 2a. If the main mass is split into two horizontal parts, the focus should either be in the upper or lower section. Plate 7 illustrates this split of the main mass—the most basic division of the space. A space divided directly in half from top to bottom would be dull and reflect a one-to-one ratio. This setup, as we’ve already seen in the second chapter, does not support good design.

By the stated rule, 2a, the varied adjustment of this double horizontal division affords all possible latitude for constructive purposes. It is better to place the division in such a manner that the upper division (or lower) will not appear pinched or dwarfed by comparison with the remaining area. Thus a ratio of one to three, or three to five, or five to eight is better than a ratio of one to one or one to eighteen, but there is no exact or arbitrary ruling on this point.

By the stated rule, 2a, the different ways to adjust this double horizontal division provide plenty of flexibility for design purposes. It's best to position the division so that the upper (or lower) section doesn’t look cramped or small compared to the rest of the area. So, a ratio of one to three, or three to five, or five to eight is preferable to a ratio of one to one or one to eighteen, but there's no strict or arbitrary rule on this matter.

Two Horizontal Divisions in Wood

Figure 8 illustrates two horizontal divisions in wood construction and also the freedom of choice as to exact proportions. The eye will be found a good judge of the proper spacings subject to the limitations already mentioned.

Figure 8 shows two horizontal sections in wooden construction and also the flexibility in choosing the exact proportions. The eye is a reliable guide for determining the appropriate spacing, within the limits already noted.

[26] Horizontal Space Divisions of the Primary Mass in Clay Plate 9

It is best to keep the design within the limits of two horizontal [27] space divisions in designing cylindrical clay forms, particularly in the elementary exercises. Enough variety will be found to make pleasing arrangements, and the technical results obtained by two divisions are much better than those obtained from a greater number of divisions.

It’s best to stick to two horizontal space divisions when designing cylindrical clay forms, especially in basic exercises. There’s enough variety to create appealing arrangements, and the technical results from two divisions are significantly better than those from more divisions.

Two Horizontal Divisions in Clay

Figures 14, 15, and 16, Plate 9, are clay forms with the dominance placed in either the upper or lower portion of the primary mass. Figure 13 has been used to illustrate the fact that horizontal space division principles are applicable to any material. The horizontal divisions in Figure 13 are due to structural needs. A horizontal line carries this division across to Figure 14, a clay vase. The horizontal division line now becomes the one which marks the widest part of the vase. It gives the same relation between the top and bottom horizontal spaces as in Figure 13. It marks an aesthetic point in the design of the vase, or a variation of the contour, introduced by reason of its effect upon the beauty of the vase, not called for by the needs of actual service.

Figures 14, 15, and 16, Plate 9, are clay shapes where the emphasis is placed either at the top or bottom of the main body. Figure 13 demonstrates that principles of horizontal space division can be applied to any material. The horizontal separations in Figure 13 arise from structural requirements. A horizontal line extends this separation to Figure 14, a clay vase. This line now represents the widest part of the vase, creating a similar relationship between the top and bottom horizontal spaces as seen in Figure 13. It indicates a key design element of the vase or a contour variation that enhances its beauty, rather than addressing practical use.

A musical composition is often played in an orchestra first by the wood instruments, taken up and repeated by the brasses, then by the strings, and finally played as an harmonious whole by the entire orchestra. There is a close parallel in Figure 12, an adaptation of one of Gustav Stickley's designs. The two-division rule is used in the relations of the plaster and wainscoting; again in the plaster over, and the cement or tile around the fireplace. It is repeated in the arrangement of the copper and cement of the fireplace facing and hood and in the door panels. By repeating again and again similar space divisions the wall space becomes a unified and harmonious whole. Variety is secured by the introduction of three horizontal divisions in the details of the wainscoting. This method of repeating similar space divisions is called "echoing" and is one of the most effective means known for securing the effect of unity.

A musical composition is usually played in an orchestra starting with the woodwind instruments, then taken up and repeated by the brass, followed by the strings, and finally performed as a harmonious whole by the entire orchestra. There is a close parallel in Figure 12, an adaptation of one of Gustav Stickley's designs. The two-division rule is applied in the relationship between the plaster and wainscoting; again in the plaster overhead and the cement or tile surrounding the fireplace. It's echoed in the arrangement of the copper and cement of the fireplace facing and hood, and in the door panels. By continuously repeating similar space divisions, the wall space becomes a unified and harmonious whole. Variety is achieved by introducing three horizontal divisions in the details of the wainscoting. This method of repeating similar space divisions is called "echoing" and is one of the most effective ways to achieve the effect of unity.

[28] Horizontal Space Divisions in Metal Plate 10
Two Horizontal Divisions in Metal

The horizontal subdivisions in metal are usually made for service. Figures 17, 18, and 19, Plate 10, are examples of such divisions. The location of the clock face in Figure 18 calls for the placing of its horizontal axis in accordance with Rule 2a. The lamp in Figure 19 shows an instance where the entire design once divided by Rule 2a, may be again subdivided into a similar series of divisions. This [29] arrangement is quite similar to the system of repetitions seen in Figure 12 and termed "echoing" the original divisions.

The horizontal sections in metal are typically made for practical use. Figures 17, 18, and 19, Plate 10, are examples of these divisions. The position of the clock face in Figure 18 requires that its horizontal axis is aligned according to Rule 2a. The lamp in Figure 19 illustrates a case where the whole design, once divided by Rule 2a, can be further subdivided into a similar set of divisions. This [29] setup is quite similar to the repeating pattern found in Figure 12 and is referred to as "echoing" the original divisions.

Three Horizontal Space Divisions

Rule 2b. If the primary mass is divided into three horizontal divisions or sections, the dominance should be placed in the center section with varying widths in the upper and lower thirds.

Rule 2b. If the main mass is split into three horizontal sections, the focus should be in the center section with different widths in the upper and lower thirds.

When it becomes necessary to divide the primary mass into more than two sections the designer's problem becomes more difficult. With the addition of a greater number of horizontal divisions there is a manifest tendency for the design to become cut up into so many small sections that the simplicity of the whole mass is lost. Here, as elsewhere, that principle which we call unity or the quality of "holding together" is necessary and should be the constant test of the design. The instant any part of the design seems to fly apart from the main mass it becomes the designer's duty to simplify the design or pull the parts together and thus restore the lost unity.

When it becomes necessary to split the primary mass into more than two sections, the designer's challenge becomes greater. With the addition of more horizontal divisions, there's a clear tendency for the design to break up into so many small sections that the overall simplicity is lost. Here, as in other areas, the principle we call unity or the quality of "holding together" is essential and should be the constant measure of the design. The moment any part of the design starts to pull away from the main mass, it's the designer's responsibility to simplify the design or pull the parts together to restore the lost unity.

As a restriction against loss of unity it is necessary to group all of the minor horizontal divisions into a system of two or three large horizontal divisions. Referring to Rule 2b, it is seen that when three divisions are used, it becomes the practice to accentuate the center section by making it larger. This arrangement is designed to give weight to the center portion and by this big stable division to hold the other subdivisions together and in unity.

As a way to maintain unity, it's important to organize all the smaller horizontal sections into a system of two or three larger horizontal sections. Referring to Rule 2b, when three sections are used, the common practice is to emphasize the center section by making it larger. This setup is meant to give importance to the center part, and by using this substantial, stable division, it helps keep the other sections together and unified.

Three Horizontal Divisions in Wood

Two horizontal masses and one vertical mass shown in Figures 9, 10, and 11, Plate 8, illustrate the application of this three-division rule to wood construction. It is seen that the construction of rails, doors, and shelves is responsible for the fixing of all of these divisions. It may also be seen that three divisions are applicable to either the vertical or the horizontal primary mass. Figure 10 illustrates the violation of this type of spacing at the point A, where the shelves are no more pleasingly arranged than the rounds of a ladder. Later on we shall be able to rearrange these shelves in a pleasing manner but at present it is better to relieve the monotony by omitting the center shelf. This applies the three division rule to the satisfactory appearance of the desk at B.

Two horizontal masses and one vertical mass shown in Figures 9, 10, and 11, Plate 8, demonstrate the use of this three-division rule in wood construction. It's clear that the construction of rails, doors, and shelves determines the organization of all these divisions. We can also see that three divisions can apply to either the vertical or horizontal primary mass. Figure 10 shows the mistake of this type of spacing at point A, where the shelves are arranged as haphazardly as the rungs of a ladder. Later, we can rearrange these shelves in a more appealing way, but for now, it’s better to break the monotony by removing the center shelf. This applies the three-division rule to create a more attractive appearance for the desk at B.

Similar monotony in spacing is seen in the screen, Figure 11. The correction in B appeals at once as a far more satisfactory arrangement than that secured by placing the cross bar half way up as in A.[30] There are no infallible rules for this readjustment beyond those already stated. The eye must in part be depended upon to guide the artistic sense aright.

Similar monotony in spacing is seen on the screen, Figure 11. The adjustment in B immediately seems like a much better arrangement than putting the crossbar halfway up like in A.[30] There are no foolproof rules for this adjustment beyond what has already been mentioned. You have to rely on your eye to help guide your artistic sense correctly.

Three Horizontal Divisions in Clay

It is suggested that it is desirable to keep clay forms within the limitations of two divisions. Rectangular posts, pedestals, and other vertical forms in cement may be developed by the application of Rule 2a or 2b, if care is taken to group all minor divisions well within the limitations of these rules.

It’s recommended to keep clay shapes within the limits of two sections. You can create rectangular posts, pedestals, and other vertical shapes in cement by using Rule 2a or 2b, as long as you ensure that all smaller sections are well within the guidelines of these rules.

The statement just made in reference to simplified groupings is illustrated in the candlestick and cup in Figures 20 and 21, Plate 10. The construction based upon the three functions performed by the cup, the handle, and the base, suggests the use of these horizontal divisions. The minor curves have been subordinated to, and kept within, these three divisions. The final result gives a distinct feeling of unity impossible under a more complex grouping. The Greek column will afford an architectural illustration of a similar grouping system.

The previous statement about simplified groupings is shown in the candlestick and cup in Figures 20 and 21, Plate 10. The structure based on the three roles of the cup, the handle, and the base highlights the use of these horizontal divisions. The minor curves have been condensed into and contained within these three divisions. The end result creates a clear sense of unity that wouldn’t be possible with a more complicated grouping. The Greek column serves as an architectural example of a similar grouping system.

Three Horizontal Divisions in Metal

The lathe bed of Figure 22 shows one of innumerable examples of space violations in the industrial arts. A slight lowering of the cross brace would add materially to the appearance and strength of the casting. Figure 23 is a copper box with the following more or less common faults of design: commonplace ratio of length and width (2:1) partially counteracted, however, by a more pleasing ratio of the vertical dimension, equal spacing in the width of cover of box and box body, and equal spacing of the hinges of the box from the ends of the box and from each other. By applying the two and three horizontal division rules these errors may be avoided.

The lathe bed of Figure 22 demonstrates one of countless examples of spatial issues in industrial design. A minor lowering of the cross brace would greatly enhance both the appearance and strength of the casting. Figure 23 is a copper box that displays several common design flaws: a usual length-to-width ratio (2:1) which is somewhat offset by a more appealing vertical dimension ratio, uniform spacing in the width of the box cover compared to the box body, and equal spacing of the hinges from both the ends and each other. By using the two and three horizontal division rules, these mistakes can be avoided.

Freehand Curves

Figure 24 shows a low bowl with a compass curve used in designing the contour. This has brought the widest part of the design in the exact center of the bowl which makes it commonplace. In addition to this the top and bottom are of the same width, lacking variety in this respect. Correction is readily made by applying a freehand curve to the contour, raising or lowering the widest point (F), at the same time designing the bottom either larger or smaller than the top.

Figure 24 shows a low bowl with a curved edge used in its design. This has positioned the widest part of the design right in the center of the bowl, which makes it feel ordinary. Moreover, the top and bottom are the same width, which lacks variety. This can be easily fixed by adding a freehand curve to the contour, adjusting the widest point (F) up or down and designing the bottom to be either wider or narrower than the top.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plate 7 is a sheet suggestive of the application of Rules 1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b, with an indication of the type of problem to be required. The steps of the designing processes in either wood (class 1), clay (class 2), or metal (class 3), are summarized as follows:

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ is a sheet that suggests using Rules 1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b, along with a note on the type of problem you will need to tackle. The steps in the design process for wood (class 1), clay (class 2), or metal (class 3) are summarized as follows:

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Construction of the rectangle representing the vertical or horizontal character of the primary mass with desirable proportions. It is better to select a typical view (Plate 6, D), preferably a front elevation.

(a) Create a rectangle that represents the vertical or horizontal shape of the main mass with the correct proportions. It’s best to select a typical view (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, D), ideally a front elevation.

(b) Subdivide this rectangle into two or three structural sections; horizontal in character. Make two or three trial freehand sketches for varied proportions and select the most pleasing one in accordance with Rules 1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b.

(b) Divide this rectangle into two or three horizontal sections. Make two or three rough sketches to experiment with different proportions and choose the one that looks best based on Rules 1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b.

(c) Translate the selected sketch to a full size mechanical drawing or at least to a reasonably large scale drawing. The structural elements: i.e., legs, rails, posts, etc., should be added and other additional views made.

(c) Transform the chosen sketch into a full-size mechanical drawing or at least a reasonably large-scale drawing. It should include structural elements like legs, rails, posts, etc., and create additional views as needed.

(d) Dimension and otherwise prepare the drawing for shop purposes.

(d) Prepare the drawing for shop use, including measurements.

(e) Construct the project.

(e) Build the project.

SUGGESTED PROBLEMS

Design a nasturtium bowl, applying Rules 1a, 1b, 2a. Design a writing table 2 feet 6 inches high with three horizontal divisions.

Design a nasturtium bowl using Rules 1a, 1b, and 2a. Design a writing table that is 2 feet 6 inches high with three horizontal sections.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 2a. If the primary mass is divided into two horizontal divisions, the dominance should be either in the upper or the lower section.

Rule 2a. If the main mass is divided into two horizontal sections, the focus should be either in the upper or the lower section.

Rule 2b. If the primary mass is divided into three horizontal divisions or sections, the dominance should be placed in the center section with varying widths in the upper and lower thirds.

Rule 2b. If the main mass is split into three horizontal parts, the dominant element should be located in the center part, with varying widths in the upper and lower thirds.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. State two methods of subdividing the primary mass.

1. Name two ways to divide the main mass.

2. Define the nature and need of horizontal space divisions.

2. Explain the purpose and importance of horizontal space divisions.

3. Give five steps to be used in designing a foot stool or piano bench.

3. Outline five steps for designing a footstool or piano bench.

4. What point constitutes a horizontal division in the contour of a simple clay bowl?

4. What point creates a horizontal line in the shape of a simple clay bowl?

5. State the rule governing two horizontal space divisions and furnish illustrations in wood, clay, and metal.

5. Describe the rule for dividing two horizontal spaces and provide examples in wood, clay, and metal.

6. Give the rule governing three horizontal space divisions and supply illustrations in wood, clay, and metal.

6. Share the guidelines for three horizontal divisions of space and include examples in wood, clay, and metal.

7. State five steps in the designing of a project in the industrial arts involving the use of horizontal structural divisions.

7. List five steps in designing a project in industrial arts that incorporates horizontal structural divisions.

[32] Applied and Constructive Design. Principle 3 Plate 11

Chapter 4
VERTICAL MAJOR DIVISIONS OF THE PRIMARY MASS

Nature and Need of Vertical Space Division

The design of the primary mass has now been considered under Rules 1a and 1b, and its horizontal divisions under Rules 2a and 2b. The next logical step is the consideration of the nature of the lines that cross the primary mass in a vertical direction. In the original planning of the primary mass it was found that the horizontal bounding lines and the horizontal divisions were parallel to the base line of an object and that the base line was necessary to ensure stability. Vertical lines are necessary and equally important to give the needed vertical support to an object.

The design of the main structure has now been reviewed according to Rules 1a and 1b, and its horizontal sections under Rules 2a and 2b. The next logical step is to examine the type of lines that intersect the main structure vertically. In the initial design of the main structure, it was determined that the horizontal boundary lines and sections were parallel to the base line of the object, which was essential for stability. Vertical lines are also necessary and equally important for providing the required vertical support to the object.

So accustomed is the eye to vertical lines in tree trunks, tall buildings, and thousands of other examples that the upward eye movement in viewing an object, having a predominance of vertical elements, seemingly adds to its height.

So used to seeing vertical lines in tree trunks, tall buildings, and countless other examples, our eyes naturally move upward when we look at an object with a lot of vertical elements, which makes it seem taller.

The designer thus has a most useful device with which to increase the apparent height of an object that, for structural or other reasons, must in reality not have great height. Chapter III drew attention to the influence of horizontal lines on a project. Vertical lines on an object are found to produce an analogous effect vertically.

The designer has a really handy tool to make an object look taller than it actually is, especially when it can't be tall for structural or other reasons. Chapter III highlighted how horizontal lines can affect a project. Vertical lines on an object create a similar effect in terms of height.

Architectural Precedent for Vertical Divisions

Gothic cathedral builders used the vertical line, repeated again and again in buttresses, pinnacles, and spires to give great apparent height to a building and to make it a unified vertical mass of great beauty. The modern church spire, together with the long, vertical interior columns, similarly affects our present day church edifices.

Gothic cathedral builders used vertical lines, repeating them in buttresses, pinnacles, and spires to create a sense of great height in their buildings and to make them a cohesive vertical structure of impressive beauty. The modern church spire, along with the tall, vertical interior columns, similarly influences our contemporary church buildings.

[34] Examples of Vertical Space Divisions in Class 1 (Wood) Plate 12

This idea of repeating the vertical bounding lines of the primary mass by cutting the mass into vertical spaces is also useful in breaking up or destroying the monotony of large unbroken surfaces. Pilasters may cut the front of a building into interesting spaces; piers may break up the regularity of a long fence; legs and panels may, each [35] for the same purpose, cross a cabinet. While some of these may be structurally necessary and some not, they are all witnesses to the desire to produce beauty in design. As these examples are so numerous in the industrial arts, it is well to study in detail their proper adaptation to our needs.

This concept of repeating the vertical lines of the main structure by dividing it into vertical sections is also effective in breaking up the monotony of large, flat surfaces. Pilasters can create interesting spaces on the front of a building; piers can disrupt the uniformity of a long fence; legs and panels can each, [35] serve the same purpose across a cabinet. While some of these elements may be necessary for structural support and others may not, they all reflect the desire to create beauty in design. Since there are so many examples of this in industrial design, it's worth closely examining their appropriate application to our needs.

One Vertical Space Division

Upon analyzing one vertical space division, it will be found to be a primary mass, vertical in character and governed by Rule 1a. Figure 25, Plate 12, illustrates one vertical division. The foot is an appendage to be considered in Chapter V.

Upon looking at one vertical space division, you'll find it's a main mass, vertical in nature and following Rule 1a. Figure 25, Plate 12, shows one vertical division. The foot is an appendage to be considered in Chapter V.

Rule 3a. If the primary mass is divided into two vertical divisions, the divisions should be equal in area and similar in form. Exception may be made in case of structural requirements. By imagining two adjacent doors of equal size, the design effect of two vertical divisions may be made clear. Plate 11 illustrates a rectangle (A) divided in this manner, preliminary to the development of a problem. Figure 27, Plate 12, represents the type of object to which the exception to the rule may be applied. In the design of this desk, the structure practically prohibits two equal vertical divisions, necessitating an unequal division in the section occupied by the drawers.

Rule 3a. If the main mass is split into two vertical sections, they should be equal in area and similar in shape. An exception can be made for structural reasons. Imagine two adjacent doors of the same size; this helps clarify the design concept for two vertical sections. Plate 11 shows a rectangle (A) divided like this, as a starting point for a problem. Figure 27, Plate 12, represents the type of object where the rule may not apply. In the design of this desk, the structure practically prevents having two equal vertical sections, requiring an unequal split in the area taken up by the drawers.

Two Vertical Space Divisions

In Plate 12, Figure 26, the designer had his vertical spacings dictated by service in the form of two doors. As service demands a tall vertical primary mass, it is but natural to design the doors to conform with the primary mass. This gives a monotonously long space for the glass panels and suggests structural weakness. To relieve this the designer applied Rule 2a and crossed the vertical panels by horizontal subdivisions, relieving the monotony and still retaining the unity of the primary mass.

In Plate 12, Figure 26, the designer's vertical spacing was determined by the need for functionality with two doors. Since the service requires a tall primary structure, it makes sense to design the doors to fit that height. However, this creates a repetitively long area for the glass panels, which can imply a lack of structural strength. To break this monotony, the designer used Rule 2a and added horizontal divisions to the vertical panels, which alleviated the uniformity while still maintaining the unity of the primary structure.

Two Vertical Divisions in Wood

In Figure 27 his problem was a variation of that presented in Figure 26. Structural limitations called for unequal divisions of the vertical space arrangement. The left portion of the desk becomes dominant as demanded by service. The drawer or brace is necessary in this design as it acts as a sort of link, binding the two vertical legs together. The omission of the drawer would destroy the unity of the mass.

In Figure 27, his issue was a variation of the one outlined in Figure 26. Structural constraints required uneven splits of the vertical space layout. The left side of the desk becomes prominent as required by functionality. The drawer or support is essential in this design as it serves as a connection, linking the two vertical legs together. Removing the drawer would compromise the overall unity of the structure.

[36] Examples of Vertical Space Divisions in Class 2 (Clay and Cement) Plate 13
Two Vertical Divisions in Clay

As vertical space divisions are principally applicable to rectilinear or flat objects and moreover as it is in such forms only that they [37] have structural value, they are not commonly met in cylindrical pottery ware. Vertical divisions are, however, occasionally used in architectural tiles and other flat wall objects. As three divisions are much more commonly used in clay and cement, this material will now be left for later consideration in this chapter.

As vertical space divisions mainly apply to flat or straight objects and only in those forms do they have structural value, they aren't often seen in cylindrical pottery. However, vertical divisions are sometimes used in architectural tiles and other flat wall items. Since three divisions are much more commonly used in clay and cement, we’ll discuss that material later in this chapter.

Vertical spacings in metal are quite similar to space divisions in wood. Wrought iron fences are, by reason of structural limitations composed of vertical and horizontal lines, varied by the introduction of piers and curved members. As they are typical of a certain branch of iron construction, two designs of the Anchor Post Iron Company have been introduced. Figure 32, Plate 14, represents two equal vertical divisions made so because of structural and aesthetic demands. The piers in this instance form a part of the general design of the entire gate and must be considered accordingly.

Vertical spacings in metal are quite similar to space divisions in wood. Wrought iron fences consist of vertical and horizontal lines due to structural limitations, with variations introduced through piers and curved elements. Since these are typical of a certain style of iron construction, two designs from the Anchor Post Iron Company have been showcased. Figure 32, Plate 14, represent two equal vertical divisions created for both structural and aesthetic reasons. The piers in this case are an integral part of the overall design of the entire gate and should be considered as such.

Vertical Divisions in Metal

The vertical subdivision in Figure 32, Plate 14, has been repeated or echoed by the long vertical bars, alternating with the shorter ones and producing pleasing variety. The horizontal divisions are designed according to Rule 2b. In designing the newel lantern in Figure 34 the designer was required to form a vertical primary mass to conform with the similar mass of the post. This he determined to subdivide vertically in practically the same manner as the cabinet in Figure 26. Threatened with the same monotony he met the situation by subdividing the vertical sections into three horizontal divisions in accordance with Rule 2b. The structural supports, however, rising up in the center of this mass, destroy its unity. They would have carried out the lines of the structure of the newel post and continued the lines of the lantern better, if they had been attached to the corners rather than to the sides of the newel post.

The vertical sections in Figure 32, Plate 14 have been mirrored by the long vertical bars, alternating with shorter ones to create an appealing variety. The horizontal sections are designed according to Rule 2b. When designing the newel lantern in Figure 34, the designer had to create a vertical primary mass that matched the similar mass of the post. He decided to subdivide it vertically in almost the same way as the cabinet in Figure 26. To avoid monotony, he addressed the issue by dividing the vertical sections into three horizontal divisions according to Rule 2b. However, the structural supports rising up in the center of this mass disrupt its unity. They would have better aligned with the structure of the newel post and extended the lines of the lantern if they had been attached to the corners instead of the sides of the newel post.

[38] Examples of Two and Three Vertical Subdivisions in Class 3 (Metal) Plate 14
Three Vertical Space Divisions

Rule 3b. If the primary mass is divided into three vertical divisions, the center division should be the larger, with the remaining divisions of equal size. A large building with a wing on either side will give an idea of this form of spacing. The size of the main building holds the wings to it, thus preserving the unity of the structure, while equal divisions on either side give balance. Plate 11 (B) gives an example of a rectangle divided in this manner. This three-division motive is a very old one. In the middle ages painters and designers used [39] three divisions or a triptych, as it is called, in their altar decorations. A painting of the Virgin was usually placed in the center division with a saint in each of the remaining panels to the right and left. Designers and mural decorators have been using the triptych ever since that period.

Rule 3b. If the main mass is divided into three vertical sections, the center section should be larger, with the other two sections being the same size. A large building with a wing on each side illustrates this kind of spacing. The size of the main building connects the wings, maintaining the unity of the structure, while the equal sections on either side create balance. Plate 11 (B) provides an example of a rectangle divided in this way. This three-division concept is very old. During the Middle Ages, painters and designers used three divisions, or a triptych as it's called, in their altar decorations. A painting of the Virgin was typically placed in the center section, with a saint in each of the remaining panels on the right and left. Designers and mural decorators have continued to use the triptych since that time.

Three Vertical Divisions in Wood

The desk in Figure 28, Plate 12, is a good example of the three-vertical space rule. The drawer in the center forms the mid or dominant section and by its greater length holds the two smaller sections together. This design is better than Figure 27, which has a similar mass. The prominent vertical lines in Figure 27 counteract and destroy the effect of the long horizontal dominant lines of the table top, whereas in Figure 28, the vertical lines in the center of the design are so short that they do not interfere with the horizontal lines of the table top. Figure 28 supports the horizontal tendency of the primary mass while Figure 27 neutralizes or practically destroys its character.

The desk in Figure 28, Plate 12, is a great example of the three-vertical space rule. The center drawer forms the middle or dominant section and, due to its greater length, holds the two smaller sections together. This design is better than Figure 27, which has a similar mass. The strong vertical lines in Figure 27 counteract and diminish the effect of the long horizontal dominant lines of the tabletop, while in Figure 28, the vertical lines in the center of the design are so short that they don't interfere with the horizontal lines of the tabletop. Figure 28 supports the horizontal tendency of the primary mass, while Figure 27 neutralizes or almost completely destroys its character.

Three Vertical Divisions in Clay and Cement

Figure 30, Plate 13, represents an overmantle by the Rookwood Potteries. It is typical of a class of overmantles which may be developed in tiles or in cement, forming an agreeable contrast with the brick of a large fireplace. The three divisions or triptych should be proportionately related to the opening of the fireplace and to the enclosing mass of brick or wood work. We will consider Figure 29 to show how this may be carried out.

Figure 30, Plate 13, is an overmantle created by the Rookwood Potteries. It's a good example of a type of overmantle that can be made with tiles or cement, providing a nice contrast to the brick of a large fireplace. The three sections or triptych should be proportionate to the size of the fireplace opening and the surrounding brick or woodwork. We will look at Figure 29 to demonstrate how this can be accomplished.

Figure 29 bears a strong resemblance to Figure 12, Plate 9, and is an elaboration of a simple three-division theme of spacing. The design seems to be complex until it is analyzed into two rules. The primary mass of the entire fireplace motive (including the surrounding panelling) has first been planned with strong and prominent horizontal lines. This was then divided vertically (A) to conform with Rule 3b, the three-division theme, giving the divisions for the bookcases and mantle. The horizontal divisions (B) were then constructed within the remaining space, affecting the distance from the picture moulding to the mantle and from the mantle to the floor line, in accordance with Rule 2a. That left the space of the width of the cement work (C) to be subdivided again by Rule 3b, while the top of the wainscoting panels re-echoed the previous horizontal divisions of Rule 2a. The fireplace opening merely carries out at D the same proportionate relation that dominates all vertical divisions, Rule 3b, while the wainscoting follows the general horizontal divisions of Rule 2a. By this method we have variety in spacing and unity through repetition of similar proportions.

Figure 29 looks a lot like Figure 12, Plate 9, and expands on a simple three-part theme of spacing. The design appears complicated until you break it down into two main rules. The main structure of the fireplace (including the surrounding paneling) was initially designed with strong, bold horizontal lines. This was then divided vertically (A) to match Rule 3b, the three-part theme, which provides the divisions for the bookcases and mantel. The horizontal divisions (B) were then created within the remaining space, determining the distance from the picture molding to the mantel and from the mantel to the floor line, in line with Rule 2a. This left the width of the cement work (C) to be divided again by Rule 3b, while the tops of the wainscoting panels echoed the previous horizontal divisions of Rule 2a. The fireplace opening simply follows at D the same proportional relationship that governs all vertical divisions, Rule 3b, while the wainscoting adheres to the general horizontal divisions of Rule 2a. This approach gives us variety in spacing while maintaining unity through the repetition of similar proportions.

[40] The Evolution of a Design Involving the Use of Two Horizontal and Three Vertical Subdivisions Plate 15

[41] The cement bench, Figure 31, has a three-division arrangement to break up the monotony of the long rail, and at the same time to repeat the characteristics of a horizontal primary mass.

[41] The cement bench, Figure 31, features a three-section design that adds some variety to the long rail while also echoing the traits of a horizontal main structure.

Three Vertical Divisions in Metal

Figure 33, Plate 14, is a common example of three vertical divisions in metal suggested by the needs of service. Figures 35 and 36 are thin metal problems. The familiar pen tray is primarily a horizontal mass, so determined by its required service as a pen holder. The projecting handles form the outer divisions, and the spacing motive, Rule 3b, has been repeated in the raised projection, decorating the handles. The book rack in Figure 36 is an example of the manner in which a nearly square mass, so designed for structural reasons, may, by Rules 3b and 2a, be broken into a fairly pleasing arrangement of divisions.

Figure 33, Plate 14, is a typical example of three vertical sections in metal based on service needs. Figures 35 and 36 are issues related to thin metal. The well-known pen tray is essentially a horizontal structure, shaped by its purpose as a pen holder. The protruding handles create the outer sections, and the spacing principle, Rule 3b, is echoed in the raised design, embellishing the handles. The book rack in Figure 36 illustrates how a nearly square design, created for structural reasons, can be aesthetically divided into a visually pleasing arrangement according to Rules 3b and 2a.

More Than Three Divisions

Rule 3c. In elementary problems, if more than three vertical divisions are required, they should be so grouped as to analyze into Rules 3a and 3b, or be exactly similar. The eye becomes confused by a multitude of vertical divisions and it is much better designing to keep them within the number stated in this chapter. There are instances, however, when this is impossible. Under such conditions the following treatment should be adopted:

Rule 3c. In basic problems, if more than three vertical divisions are needed, they should be grouped to fit Rules 3a and 3b, or be exactly alike. The eye gets confused by too many vertical divisions, and it's much better design to stick to the number mentioned in this chapter. There are, however, situations when this isn't doable. In such cases, the following approach should be taken:

Unless, as stated, a large number of vertical divisions may be grouped into two or three vertical divisions it is better to make all of the divisions of the same size. This does not fatigue the eye as much as would the introduction of a number of complex spacings. This solution enables the amateur designer to deal with complex problems with an assurance of securing a degree of unity.

Unless, as mentioned, a large number of vertical sections can be grouped into two or three vertical sections, it's better to make all the sections the same size. This minimizes eye strain compared to using a lot of complicated spacings. This approach helps the beginner designer tackle complex issues with more confidence in achieving some level of unity.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plate 15 is practically self-explanatory and shows the order in which the various divisions, so far considered, are to be introduced into the design together with the grouping of details within those divisions. Figure D introduces the additional element termed the appendage to be considered in Chapter V.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ is mostly self-explanatory and shows how the different sections we've covered should fit into the design, as well as how details are arranged within those sections. Figure D introduces an additional element called the appendage, which will be explained in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Construction of the rectangle representing the vertical or horizontal character of the primary mass with desirable proportions. Select the most prominent surface for this rectangle, preferably the front elevation.

(a) Create a rectangle that represents the vertical or horizontal aspect of the main structure with the appropriate proportions. Select the most prominent surface for this rectangle, preferably the front view.

(b) Subdivide this rectangle into two or three structural sections, horizontal and vertical in character. Make two or three trial freehand sketches on cross section paper for varied proportions and select the most pleasing in accordance with rules.

(b) Divide this rectangle into two or three structural sections, either horizontally or vertically. Make two or three rough sketches on cross-section paper with varying proportions and choose the one that looks the best based on the guidelines.

(c) Translate the selected sketch into a scale or full size drawing and add additional views to complete the requirements of a working drawing. Add additional structural elements: legs, rails, etc.

(c) Turn the selected sketch into a scaled or full-sized drawing and add more views to meet the requirements of a working drawing. Include additional structural elements: legs, rails, etc.

(d) For shop purposes, enlarge a scale drawing to full size, dimension and otherwise prepare it for actual use. See Figure 102a, page 68, for character of this change.

(d) For shop use, enlarge a scale drawing to actual size, add dimensions, and prepare it for practical application. Refer to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, for details on this adjustment.

(e) Construct the project.

(e) Build the project.

SUGGESTED PROBLEMS

Design a fire screen with two horizontal and three vertical major subdivisions.

Design a fire screen with two horizontal sections and three vertical sections.

Design a bookcase 4 feet 2 inches high with three horizontal and two vertical major subdivisions.

Design a bookcase that is 4 feet 2 inches tall with three horizontal sections and two vertical sections.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 3a. If the primary mass is divided into two vertical divisions, the divisions should be equal in area and similar in form.

Rule 3a. If the main mass is divided into two vertical sections, those sections should be equal in area and similar in shape.

Rule 3b. If the primary mass is divided into three vertical divisions, the center division should be the larger, with the remaining divisions of equal size.

Rule 3b. If the main mass is divided into three vertical sections, the middle section should be larger while the other two should be of equal size.

Rule 3c. In elementary problems, if more than three vertical divisions are required, they should be so grouped as to analyze into Rules 3a and 3b, or be exactly similar.

Rule 3c. For basic problems, if more than three vertical divisions are needed, they should be grouped to conform to Rules 3a and 3b, or be identical.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What is the nature and need of vertical space divisions?

1. What are the features and importance of vertical space divisions?

2. State the rule governing the use of two vertical space divisions and give illustrations in wood, clay, and metal.

2. Describe the rule for using two vertical space divisions and provide examples using wood, clay, and metal.

3. Give the rule relating to the use of three vertical space divisions and furnish illustrations in wood, clay, and metal.

3. Describe the rule for using three vertical space divisions and provide examples using wood, clay, and metal.

4. What is the treatment of more than three vertical divisions? Why?

4. How should you approach handling more than three vertical sections? Why?


Chapter 5
APPENDAGES AND RULES GOVERNING THEM

Use of the Appendage

An appendage is a member added to the primary mass for utilitarian purposes. In the industrial arts, when an appendage is added merely for the purpose of decoration, it is as useless and functionless as the human appendix and, as a source of discord, should be removed.

An appendage is a part added to the main body for practical reasons. In industrial arts, when an appendage is added just for decoration, it serves no purpose and is as pointless as the human appendix, and should be eliminated as it can cause conflict.

An appendage in industrial arts may be, among other things, a plate rail, bracket, spout, cover, or handle, all of which are capable of service either for or with the primary mass. In architecture it may be a wing or ell added to the mass of the building. Simple as its design may seem, it is often so placed in relation to the main or primary mass that it does not seem to "fit" or to be in unity with that mass.

An appendage in industrial arts can be, among other things, a plate rail, bracket, spout, cover, or handle, all of which serve a purpose for or alongside the main piece. In architecture, it could be a wing or extension added to the main structure of the building. Although its design may seem simple, it is often positioned in such a way that it doesn’t appear to "fit" or blend harmoniously with the main structure.

Designing an Appendage

Rule 4a. The appendage should be designed in unity with, and proportionately related to, the vertical or horizontal character of the primary mass, but subordinated to it.

Rule 4a. The addition should be created in harmony with, and in proportion to, the vertical or horizontal nature of the main structure, but should be secondary to it.

Rule 4b. The appendage should have the appearance of flowing smoothly and, if possible, tangentially from the primary mass.

Rule 4b. The appendage should look like it flows smoothly and, if possible, comes out from the main body at an angle.

Rule 4c. The appendage should, if possible, echo or repeat some lines similar in character and direction to those of the primary mass.

Rule 4c. The extra part should, whenever possible, reflect or repeat some lines that are similar in style and direction to those of the main section.

Violations of Appendage Design

All of the foregoing rules are intended to promote the sense of unity between the primary mass and its appendages. If a mirror on a dresser looks top-heavy it is generally due to the fact that it has not been subordinated in size to the primary mass. Rule 4a. If the handle projects from the primary mass of an object similar to the handle on a pump, it has not been designed in accordance with Rules 4b and 4c. Again, if the appendage projects from a primary mass like a tall chimney from a long flat building, it has violated Rule 4a and has not been proportionately related to the character of the vertical or horizontal proportions of the primary mass.

All the rules mentioned above are meant to enhance the sense of unity between the main object and its smaller parts. If a mirror on a dresser seems top-heavy, it's usually because it isn't sized appropriately compared to the main object. Rule 4a. If the handle extends from the main part of an object, similar to how a pump handle does, it hasn't been designed according to Rules 4b and 4c. Additionally, if a part sticks out from the main object like a tall chimney on a long flat building, it goes against Rule 4a and isn't proportionately related to the overall vertical or horizontal dimensions of the main object.

[44] Examples of Appendages in Class 1 (Wood) Added to the Primary Mass for Utilitarian Purposes Plate 16

It should be readily seen that if the primary mass has one dominant proportion while the appendage has another, there will be a [45] serious clash and the final result will be the neutralization of both motives, resulting in either an insipid and characterless design or a downright lack of unity.

It should be clear that if the main part has one dominant proportion while the appendage has another, there will be a [45] serious conflict, and the end result will be the neutralization of both elements, leading to either a bland and unremarkable design or a complete lack of unity.

Appendages in Wood

The design of the small dressing table, Figure 37, Plate 16, with the mirror classing as an appendage, is an excellent illustration of Rule 4a. The main mass of the table is vertical in character and the mirror carries out or repeats the character of the primary mass by having a similar but subordinate vertical mass. In this instance it is so large that it has nearly the effect of a second primary mass.

The design of the small dressing table, Figure 37, Plate 16, with the mirror being an additional feature, is a great example of Rule 4a. The main structure of the table is vertical, and the mirror complements the primary structure by having a similar, though smaller, vertical shape. In this case, it’s so large that it almost feels like a second main structure.

As tangential junctions are difficult to arrange in wood construction and particularly in furniture, the break between the table top and the mirror has been softened by the introduction of a bracket or connecting link. The curves of the link cause the eye to move freely from the primary mass to the appendage and thus there is a sense of oneness or unity between the two masses.

As it's hard to create tangential junctions in wooden structures, especially in furniture, the gap between the table top and the mirror has been softened by adding a bracket or connecting link. The curves of the link allow the eye to transition smoothly from the main piece to the attachment, creating a feeling of cohesion or unity between the two elements.

The lantern in Figure 38 becomes an appendage and is subordinated to the large pedestal or support. The tangential junction has in this case been fully possible and the eye moves freely from the vertical lines of the base to the similar vertical mass of the lantern without noticeable break.

The lantern in Figure 38 becomes an extension and is secondary to the large pedestal or support. The tangential connection has been fully achieved in this case, allowing the eye to move smoothly from the vertical lines of the base to the matching vertical structure of the lantern without any noticeable interruption.

Unifying Appendage and Primary Mass

The service of the dressing table, Figure 39, with its three-division mirror makes the problem of adaptation of the appendage to the mass of the table, in accordance with the rules, much more difficult. Under the circumstances, about the best that can be done, at the same time keeping within the limitations of desired service, is to plan the mirrors in accordance with Rule 3b, with the dominant section in the center. To secure an approach to unity, each section of the mirror should echo the vertical proportion of the primary mass of the table.

The dressing table service, Figure 39, with its three-part mirror, complicates the challenge of adapting the addition to the overall design of the table according to the guidelines. Given the situation, the best approach while still meeting the necessary functionality is to arrange the mirrors according to Rule 3b, with the central section being the focal point. To achieve a sense of unity, each part of the mirror should reflect the vertical proportions of the main body of the table.

[46]

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 41a

Figure 41a

The top of the writing stand, in Figure 40, is an example of a horizontal appendage which repeats the horizontal character of the front or typical face of the primary mass of the table. The small drawers and divisions again take up and repeat the horizontal motive of the table, while the entire appendage may be subdivided under Rule 3b, giving the dominance to the center portion. The short curves in the appendage all tend to lead the eye in a satisfactory and smooth transition from one mass to the other or from the table [47] top to the appendage. The proportions of the small drawers are similar to the proportions of the table drawers. Rule 4c. All of these points of similarity bring the masses into close unity or oneness of appearance.

The top of the writing stand, in Figure 40, is an example of a horizontal extension that mirrors the horizontal design of the front or main part of the table. The small drawers and compartments reinforce the horizontal theme of the table, while the entire extension can be broken down under Rule 3b, emphasizing the central section. The short curves in the extension guide the eye smoothly and effortlessly from one area to another, whether from the table top to the extension. The proportions of the small drawers match those of the table drawers. Rule 4c. All these similarities create a sense of unity and cohesiveness in appearance.

The table legs, in Figure 41, are more difficult to adjust satisfactorily. The idea of the designer is, however, apparent. The legs leave the column of the table with a tangential curve and, sweeping out with a strong curve, repeat the horizontal line of the table top in the horizontal lines of their bottom surfaces.

The table legs, in Figure 41, are harder to adjust properly. However, the designer's intention is clear. The legs emerge from the table column with a gentle curve and, extending outward with a bold curve, mirror the horizontal line of the table top in the horizontal lines of their bottom surfaces.

Industrial Applications

Figure 41a, a modification of Figure 39, shows close unity between the three divisions of the mirror due to the pleasing curve of the center section with its tendency to bind the other sections to it. Again, the echoing of the spacings of the three drawers in the similar spacings of the three mirrors, makes the bond of unity still closer to the ideal arrangement. Rule 4c.

Figure 41a, a variation of Figure 39, demonstrates a strong connection among the three parts of the mirror because of the attractive curve of the center section, which tends to pull the other sections together. Furthermore, the matching distances between the three drawers and the three mirrors enhances the sense of unity, bringing it closer to the ideal design. Rule 4c.

Figures 41b and 41c are, in a way, parallel to Figure 41. The eye moves freely from the feet (appendages) along the smooth and graceful curves to the tall shaft or column of the primary mass. The turned fillets, introduced at the junction of the appendage and the primary mass, in Figure 41c, have a tendency to check this smooth passage making the arrangement in Figure 41b preferable. The hardware for the costumers is well chosen and in sympathy with the vertical proportions of the design.

Figures 41b and 41c are somewhat similar to Figure 41. The eye moves effortlessly from the feet (limbs) along the smooth and elegant curves to the tall main body. The turned fillets, placed at the connection between the limb and the main body, in Figure 41c, tend to interrupt this smooth flow, making the layout in Figure 41b more appealing. The hardware for the costumes is well selected and complements the vertical proportions of the design.

[48]

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 41b   Figure 41c

Fig. 41b   Fig. 41c

Appendages in Clay

With the word "clay" all difficulties in the treatment of appendages vanish. It is by far the easiest medium for the adaptation of the appendage to the primary mass. Covers, handles, and spouts are a few of the more prominent parts falling under this classification.

With the word "clay," all challenges in dealing with appendages disappear. It’s definitely the easiest material for fitting the appendage to the main body. Covers, handles, and spouts are just a few of the more notable components in this category.

The process of the designer is to create the primary rectangle, subdivide it into two horizontal subdivisions in accordance with Rule 2a, and proceed to add the desired number of appendages. The result may be suggested by the following illustrations. In Figure 43, Plate 17, the cover is a continuation of the curve of the top of the bowl, Rule 4a; the tops of the handles are continuations of the horizontal line in the top contour of the bowl, while the lower portions of the handles seem to spring or grow from the lower part of the bowl with a tangential curve.

The designer's process begins by creating a main rectangle, then splitting it into two horizontal sections as per Rule 2a, and then adding the required number of appendages. The outcome can be illustrated as follows. In Figure 43, Plate 17, the cover flows seamlessly from the curve at the top of the bowl, following Rule 4a; the tops of the handles continue the horizontal line of the bowl’s upper contour, while the lower parts of the handles appear to spring or grow from the bottom of the bowl with a smooth curve.

Covers, Spouts, and Handles

Figure 44 is a horizontal primary mass with the horizontal subdivision in the upper section of that mass. The spout and handle spring naturally from the body and balance each other in proportion, while the cover handle rises smoothly from the primary mass. The horizontal character of the primary mass is consistently carried out in the appendages.

Figure 44 is a flat primary shape with a horizontal division in the upper part of that shape. The spout and handle flow naturally from the body and create a balanced proportion, while the cover handle rises gracefully from the primary shape. The flatness of the primary shape is consistently reflected in the appendages.

The handle, in Figure 45, leaving the body at a tangent, rises with a long straight curve to turn suddenly and join the pitcher in harmony with its top. The apparent abruptness of the junction is softened by the rounded corners typical of clay construction.

The handle, in Figure 45, extends from the body at an angle, rising with a long, smooth curve before suddenly turning to connect with the pitcher at its top. The seemingly sharp join is softened by the rounded edges typical of clay craftsmanship.

The Rookwood set, Figure 42, represents three similar primary masses. The proportionate ratios and the horizontal subdivisions are the same throughout. The handle for the teapot has been curved in the center to give variety to the handle. This variation is a difficult thing to manage without consequent loss of unity as by this variation Rule 4a is violated. One thing may be said in its favor. It brings the hand closer to the spout and thus supports the pouring weight. But the unusual in design is to be discouraged until sufficient skill in simple designing has been acquired.

The Rookwood set, Figure 42, features three similar main pieces. The proportions and horizontal divisions are consistent throughout. The handle of the teapot is curved in the center to add some variety. However, this variation can be tricky to handle without losing overall unity, as it goes against Rule 4a. On the positive side, it positions the hand closer to the spout, making it easier to manage the weight while pouring. But it's best to avoid unusual designs until you have enough experience with basic designs.

In designing handle appendages for clay, they should be so placed that they readily control the weight of the material in the container and afford room for the fingers. Thus, it is better to have the larger portion of the handle opening at the top of the primary mass. The spout in all instances should continue sufficiently high to allow the container to be filled to its full capacity without danger of the contents running out of the spout. The glaze runs into rounded corners much more freely than into square ones, hence it is preferable to use rounded corners wherever possible.

In designing handle attachments for clay, they should be positioned to easily manage the weight of the material in the container and provide space for fingers. Therefore, it's better to have the larger part of the handle opening at the top of the main body. The spout should always extend high enough so that the container can be filled to its maximum capacity without the risk of spilling from the spout. Glaze flows into rounded corners more easily than into square ones, so it's best to use rounded corners whenever possible.

[50] Examples of Appendages in Class 2 (Pottery) Added to the Primary Mass For Utilitarian Purposes Plate 17
Requirements for Appendage Design


Freehand Curves

It is the unexpected curve that is welcome in all designing, provided it supports the structure and conforms to established rules. After completing a design involving appendages it should be checked from three points of view; (1) service, (2) unity between the primary mass and the appendages, and (3) variety of curvature. On this last point it is needless to say that compass curves are not desirable except in rounding small corners or in using fillets. It is well known that compass curves are difficult to assimilate into pleasing tangential effects. They are inclined to be monotonous and regular with a [51] "made by the thousand" appearance to them. One should trust to freehand sweeps, drawn freely with a full arm movement when possible. All curves should spring naturally from the primary mass. Blackboard drawing is excellent practice for the muscles used in this type of designing. In a short time it will be found possible to produce the useful long, rather flat curve with its sudden turn (the curve of force) that will make the compass curve tame and commonplace by comparison.

It’s the unexpected curve that is welcomed in all design, as long as it supports the structure and follows established guidelines. After finishing a design with extensions, it should be evaluated from three perspectives: (1) functionality, (2) harmony between the main mass and the extensions, and (3) variety in curvature. Speaking of the last point, it’s unnecessary to say that compass curves are not ideal except for rounding small corners or using fillets. It’s well known that compass curves are hard to blend into visually appealing tangential effects. They tend to be monotonous and regular, giving off a "made by the thousand" vibe. Instead, one should rely on freehand sweeps, drawn freely with a full arm movement when possible. All curves should naturally emerge from the main mass. Drawing on a blackboard is great practice for the muscles used in this type of design. Soon enough, you’ll be able to create the useful long, somewhat flat curve with its sudden turn (the curve of force) that will make the compass curve seem tame and ordinary by comparison.

Appendages in Metal

Figures 55, 56, and 57, Plate 18, show the close bond between the appearance of the appendage in clay, and the one in metal. While it is technically more difficult to adapt metal to the rules governing appendages than is the case with clay, the final results are, in most instances, equally pleasing to the eye.

Figures 55, 56, and 57, Plate 18, demonstrate the strong connection between the appearance of the appendage in clay and in metal. Although it's technically tougher to shape metal according to the rules governing appendages than it is with clay, the end results are, in most cases, just as visually appealing.

In most of the figures showing examples in metal, the appendages have to be secured to the primary mass by screws, rivets, or solder, whereas in clay they may be moulded into the primary mass. This tends to secure a more unified appearance; but in metal, the junction of the handle and the primary mass is often made a decorative feature of the design and gives added interest and variety to the project.

In most of the examples with metal, the parts have to be attached to the main piece using screws, rivets, or solder, while in clay, they can be shaped directly into the main piece. This creates a more cohesive look; however, in metal, the connection between the handle and the main piece is often highlighted as a decorative element of the design, adding extra interest and variety to the project.

The simple primary mass, Figure 58, has a horizontal space division in the lower portion of the mass. This point of variation of the contour has been used in the primary masses in Figures 55, 56, and 57, also as the starting point of that dominant appendage, the handle. Springing tangentially from the body, it rises in a straight line of extreme value in service, then with a slight turn it parallels and joins the top of the bowl, thus fulfilling the design functions of an appendage from both points of service and beauty. The spout and lid, Figure 55, may be likewise analyzed.

The simple primary mass, Figure 58, features a horizontal division in the lower part of the mass. This point of variation in shape has been utilized in the primary masses of Figures 55, 56, and 57, and serves as the starting point for the prominent feature, the handle. Emerging tangentially from the body, it extends in a straight line of significant utility, then with a slight curve, it aligns and connects with the top of the bowl, effectively serving both functional and aesthetic purposes as an attachment. The spout and lid, Figure 55, can also be analyzed in the same way.

[52] Examples of Appendages in Class 3 (Metal) Plate 18
Tangential Junctions

The points of tangency, in Figure 54, become a decorative feature of the design. The handles in the parts of the fire set, Figures 48 and 49, offer different problems. It is difficult to analyze the latter figures to determine the appendages as they are in such thorough unity with the handles and are practically subdivisions of the primary mass. But referring to the rule stating the fact that the appendages are subordinated to and attached to the primary mass, it may justly be stated that the shovel portion of the design may [53] legitimately be classed as an appendage. This will explain the need of a curve at the junction points and the feature of the decorative twists in Figure 49. Both designs may be analyzed into three horizontal divisions.

The points of tangency, in Figure 54, become a decorative aspect of the design. The handles in the sections of the fire set, Figures 48 and 49, present different challenges. It's tough to analyze the latter figures to identify the appendages since they are so closely integrated with the handles and are essentially part of the main structure. However, based on the principle that the appendages are subordinate to and connected with the main mass, it can rightly be said that the shovel part of the design may[53] appropriately be categorized as an appendage. This clarifies the need for a curve at the junction points and the characteristic decorative twists in Figure 49. Both designs can be broken down into three horizontal sections.

Andiron Design

The andirons, Figures 50 to 53, illustrate interesting transitions in wrought iron from the primary mass to the appendage. The vertical shaft of wrought iron has been treated as a primary mass while the feet may be classed as appendages. In Figure 50 we have an example of a frankly square junction point. Figure 51 discloses a weld with rounded corners, forming a more pleasing junction than does the abrupt angle of Figure 50. This conforms to Rule 4b. The appendage legs echo or repeat the vertical lines of the primary mass and there is consequently a sense of unity between them.

The andirons, Figures 50 to 53, show interesting changes in wrought iron from the main structure to the details. The vertical shaft of wrought iron is treated as the main structure, while the feet are considered details. In Figure 50, there's an example of a clearly square connection point. Figure 51 reveals a weld with rounded corners, creating a more pleasing connection than the sharp angle of Figure 50. This follows Rule 4b. The leg details reflect the vertical lines of the main structure, resulting in a sense of unity between them.

In Figure 52 the appendage foot is curved, and the primary mass has a similar curve on the top of the vertical column to apply Rule 4c to repeat the curve. The small links at X indicate an attempt to make the junction point more pleasing to the eye, but the link is too large to accomplish the desired result successfully. In Figure 53 the links have been materially reduced in size and in the amount of curvature. In this example the eye goes unhampered from appendage to primary or back again, without perceptible interruption and the unity of the mass, seriously threatened in Figure 52, is restored in Figure 53.

In Figure 52 the foot is curved, and the main body has a similar curve on top of the vertical column to apply Rule 4c to repeat the curve. The small links at X show an attempt to make the junction point more visually appealing, but the link is too large to achieve the desired effect successfully. In Figure 53 the links have been significantly reduced in size and curvature. In this example, the eye smoothly moves from the appendage to the primary structure or back again, without noticeable interruption, and the unity of the mass, which was seriously threatened in Figure 52, is restored in Figure 53.

In Figure 46 there is an example of a link becoming large enough to be classed as an appendage connecting two primary masses, e.g., the lantern and the wall. Under these conditions, one end of the appendage harmonizes with the lantern and the other end with the wall. Figure 47 shows a cast brass candlestick which is an excellent example, from the Studio, of tangential junction.

In Figure 46 there is an example of a link growing large enough to be seen as an attachment connecting two main parts, e.g., the lantern and the wall. In this situation, one end of the attachment aligns with the lantern and the other end with the wall. Figure 47 shows a cast brass candlestick that is a great example, from the Studio, of a tangential junction.

Influence of Tools and Materials

Clay may readily stand as the most adaptable material for appendages, with metal ranking second, and wood third. The grain of wood seems to interfere with the tangential junction of the appendage and primary mass. Appendages of wood are, however, quite necessary at times. Their use is merely a matter of lessening the contrast of conflicting lines in an addition of this nature.

Clay is probably the most versatile material for making attachments, with metal coming in second and wood third. The wood grain tends to disrupt the smooth connection between the attachment and the main body. However, there are times when wooden attachments are essential. Their use is basically about reducing the clash of differing lines in this kind of addition.

The band and bracket saws are required in many instances to construct the connecting link between opposing masses of wood. Hand building or casting is the means used to construct the appendages in plastic materials. Appendages in cement are seen in the uprights for cement seats and are generally translated into the primary mass by means of mouldings or curves.

The band and bracket saws are often needed to create the connection between two opposing pieces of wood. Hand building or casting is the method used to make the additions in plastic materials. Cement additions are found in the supports for cement seats and are typically incorporated into the main structure through mouldings or curves.

Forging or thin and raised metal construction affords many examples of the adaptability of material in constructing appendages. Rivets form decorative features at the junction points and should be placed with great care and relation to the decoration and the point of tangency.

Forging or thin and raised metal construction provides many examples of how adaptable materials can be when creating attachments. Rivets create decorative elements at the connection points and should be positioned with great care in relation to the decoration and the point of contact.

[54] Applied and Constructive Design. Principle 4 Plate 19

CLASS PRESENTATION INSTRUCTIONS

The typical views to be used in classroom work, with the ordinary range of problems, are shown on Plate 19. These typical views should be supplemented by dimensions, cross sections, and other views whenever necessary. Wood construction has been omitted from this sheet, but its development in design is quite similar to the steps indicated in the summary.

You can find the common views for classroom projects and the typical range of problems on __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. These standard views should include dimensions, cross sections, and other perspectives when necessary. Wood construction isn't covered in this document, but its design process follows similar steps as described in the summary.

DESIGN STEPS SUMMARY

(a) Draw the primary rectangle.

(a) Draw the main rectangle.

(b) Subdivide the rectangle into two or three horizontal and, if necessary, vertical divisions.

(b) Divide the rectangle into two or three horizontal sections and, if necessary, vertical sections.

(c) Estimate the dimensions of the appendage necessary to perform the desired service in the best manner.

(c) Determine the size of the attachment needed to perform the task effectively.

(d) If the appendage is a handle, place it in such a position that it not only appears to but actually does support the weight of the primary mass.

(d) If the attachment is a handle, place it so that it looks like it supports the weight of the main mass and actually does.

(e) Complete the contour curves of the primary mass based upon the horizontal division which acts as a unit of measurement or a turning point.

(e) Complete the outline curves of the main shape based on the horizontal split that acts as a measurement unit or turning point.

(f) Join the appendages to the primary mass by means of tangential curves.

(f) Attach the limbs to the main body using curved lines.

(g) Establish unity between the primary mass and the appendages by applying Rules 4a, 4b, and 4c.

(g) Create a connection between the main body and the additional parts following Rules 4a, 4b, and 4c.

(h) Dimension and otherwise prepare the drawing for shop use. See Plate 26.

(h) Size and prepare the drawing for shop use. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

PROPOSED PROJECTS

Design a sugar bowl, cream pitcher, and teapot. Consider them as different members of one set.

Design a sugar bowl, cream pitcher, and teapot. Consider them as separate pieces of the same set.

Design a sideboard 3 feet 3 inches high with plate rack, the design to contain two vertical and two horizontal divisions exclusive of the appendage.

Design a sideboard that's 3 feet 3 inches tall with a plate rack. The design should feature two vertical sections and two horizontal sections, excluding the extra piece.

RULES SUMMARY

Rule 4a. The appendage should be designed in unity with, and proportionately related to, the vertical or horizontal character of the primary mass, but subordinated to it.

Rule 4a. The attachment must align harmoniously with the vertical or horizontal nature of the main structure while being secondary to it.

[56] Rule 4b. The appendage should have the appearance of flowing smoothly and, if possible, tangentially from the primary mass.

[56] Rule 4b. The extension should appear to flow seamlessly and, if possible, at an angle from the main body.

Rule 4c. The appendage should, if possible, echo or repeat some lines similar in character and direction to those of the primary mass.

Rule 4c. The addition should, if possible, echo or repeat some lines that are similar in character and direction to those of the main body.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. State the nature and use of the appendage.

1. What is the purpose of the appendage and how is it utilized?

2. What is the relation of the size of the appendage to the size of the primary mass?

2. How does the size of the appendage relate to the size of the main mass?

3. How should the appendage be attached to the primary mass?

3. What is the proper way to attach the appendage to the main body?

4. How does Rule 4c help to secure unity between the appendage and the primary mass?

4. How does Rule 4c contribute to the unity between the appendage and the main body?

5. Are compass curves permissible in appendage design?

5. Are compass curves permitted in the design of appendages?

6. State influence of tools and materials upon appendage design.

6. How do tools and materials influence the design of appendages?


Chapter 6
ENRICHMENT OF THE CONTOURS OR OUTLINES OF DESIGNS IN WOOD

With this chapter we introduce contour enrichment, the second major division of industrial arts design.

With this chapter, we introduce contour enrichment, the second main area of industrial arts design.

Need and Value of Enrichment

A critic of furniture designed by the average manual arts student has stated frankly that while it might have been honestly constructed it was, in the first place, too heavy for a woman to move about the house and, in the second place, it represented a decidedly uneconomical use of that valuable material, wood. That there is a basis in fact for this statement cannot be denied. Is it true, then, that furniture must of necessity be clumsy and heavy when it is sufficiently simplified in constructive processes for school work? We may say emphatically, "No!"

A critic of furniture made by regular manual arts students has openly pointed out that although it might have been built with care, it's, first of all, too heavy for a woman to move around the house, and, second, it's a clearly wasteful use of that precious material, wood. There's definitely some truth to this claim. So, is it true that furniture has to be awkward and heavy when it's simplified enough for school projects? We can definitely say, "No!"

One may correct the proportions of an object and reduce the size of the materials in it to a minimum but still fail to secure the desirable elements of lightness and interest. The object may still look heavy and remain a box-like structure void of the grace synonymous with the best in design. It is, however, possible to correct the clumsy and heavy appearances by imparting to the design elements of grace and lightness. Two methods may be used, singly or together: (1) Enrichment of the Functional Outlines or Contours; (2) Surface Enrichment sometimes called Space Filling. These may be roughly classified respectively as three and two dimension enrichment.

One can fix the proportions of an object and minimize its materials, but it may still lack the desired qualities of lightness and interest. The object might still look heavy and continue to be a boxy design without the elegance that defines the best in design. However, it's possible to improve the awkward and heavy look by adding grace and lightness to the design. There are two methods to do this, either separately or together: (1) Enhancing the Functional Outlines or Contours; (2) Surface Enhancement, sometimes called Space Filling. These can be roughly categorized as three-dimensional and two-dimensional enrichment, respectively.

Contour Enrichment

The first, or outline enrichment, concerns itself with the structural lines. As all designing processes should start with the structure, it will be our policy to do so. The present chapter will deal only with enrichment of outlines of wood projects.

The first type, or outline enrichment, focuses on the structural lines. Since every design process should begin with the structure, that will be our approach. This chapter will solely address the enhancement of outlines in wood projects.

Rule 5a. Outline enrichment should be subordinated to and support the structure.

Rule 5a. Outline enrichment should be secondary to and enhance the structure.

Rule 5b. Outline enrichment should add grace, lightness, and variety to the design.

Rule 5b. Outline enrichment should bring elegance, ease, and diversity to the design.

[58] Common Errors in Contour Enrichment

Plate 19a

Plate 19a

Purpose of Contour Enrichment

It is the purpose of enrichment to add to the problem (1) grace; (2) lightness; (3) variety; (4) unity. If it is applied in a proper manner it should likewise add to the apparent structural strength. We should carefully guard the design, therefore, against (1) enrichment that has a tendency to obscure or destroy the structural lines; in other words, enrichment that is not subordinated to the structure, and (2) enrichment that adds nothing to the structure by its application; that is, one which does not increase either the apparent strength or the beauty of the object.

The goal of enrichment is to enhance the issue by adding (1) elegance; (2) lightness; (3) variety; and (4) unity. When done correctly, it should also contribute to the perceived structural strength. Therefore, we must carefully protect the design from (1) enrichment that tends to obscure or undermine the structural lines; in other words, enrichment that isn’t subordinate to the structure, and (2) enrichment that doesn’t add anything to the structure through its application; meaning, it doesn’t enhance either the perceived strength or beauty of the object.

Requirements of Contour Enrichment

As an example of this first point, the turned candlestick with the candle supported by a stack of turned balls alternating with tauri or thin discs tends to obscure completely the sense of support. Again, the landscape gardener feels that he is violating a fundamental principle in design if by planting vines to grow around a building, he obscures the foundation, and the roof appears, consequently, to rest on and be supported by the stems and leaves of the vines. Thus it is seen that the eye registers a sense of structural weakness when the main supports of an object disappear and are no longer to be traced under the enrichment.

As an example of this first point, the turned candlestick with the candle held up by a stack of turned balls alternating with thin discs tends to completely hide the sense of support. Similarly, the landscape gardener feels that he’s breaking a basic design principle if he plants vines around a building that cover the foundation, making it look like the roof is being held up by the stems and leaves of the vines. Thus, it’s clear that the eye perceives a sense of structural weakness when the main supports of an object are hidden and can’t be seen beneath the decorative elements.

Under the second point falls the indiscriminate placing of unrelated objects in the contour enrichment. Naturalistic objects similar to the claw foot and the human head, for example, should give way to natural curves that add to the appearance of total strength. Where are we to find these curves suited to our purpose?

Under the second point falls the random placement of unrelated objects in the contour enhancement. Naturalistic objects like the claw foot and the human head, for example, should be replaced with natural curves that enhance the overall strength of the design. Where can we find these curves that fit our needs?

Valuable Curves for Outline Enrichment

Up to this point emphasis has been placed upon straight and curved lines immediately connected with pure service. For grace and lightness it is necessary to depart at times from the rigidity of straight lines. To understand the character of this departure let us consider a simple bracket as a support for a shelf.

Up to this point, we've focused on straight and curved lines directly related to pure service. To achieve grace and lightness, it's sometimes necessary to move away from the strictness of straight lines. To grasp the nature of this shift, let's look at a simple bracket used to support a shelf.

This bracket acts as a link, connecting a vertical wall or leg with a horizontal member or shelf. A bracket shaped like a 45-degree triangle, Figure 10, page 24, gives one the sense of clumsiness. If the feeling of grace is to be imparted the eye must move smoothly along the outline of the bracket, giving one a sensation of aesthetic pleasure. A curved line will produce this effect more completely than will a straight line. One must likewise get the feeling that the curve of the bracket is designed to support the shelf.

This bracket serves as a connector, linking a vertical wall or leg with a horizontal member or shelf. A bracket shaped like a 45-degree triangle, Figure 10, page 24, creates a sense of clumsiness. To convey grace, the eye needs to move smoothly along the outline of the bracket, providing a feeling of aesthetic pleasure. A curved line achieves this effect more effectively than a straight line. It’s also important to sense that the curve of the bracket is meant to support the shelf.

[60] Natural and Geometric Curves With Their Use in Functional Outline Enrichment Plate 20

The Curve of Force

Valuable Curves

Turning to Figure 70, Plate 20, we find that whenever nature desires to support a weight she is inclined to use a peculiar curve seen at F. Possibly through continued observation the eye has associated this curve with strength or supporting power. Figure 71 has detailed this curve. It is found to consist of a long, rather flat portion with a quick and sudden turn at its end. The curve is known to designers as the Curve of Force and is most valuable in all forms of enrichment. Designers even in early ages used it in some form as will be noted from the fragment of Greek sculpture in Figure 72. Its beauty rests in its variety. A circle has little interest due to its rather monotonous curvature. The eye desires variety and the curve of force administers to this need and gives a sense of satisfaction. As designers on wood, how are we to utilize this curve for purposes of outline enrichment?

Turning to Figure 70, Plate 20, we find that whenever nature wants to support a weight, she tends to use a unique curve seen at F. Perhaps through continuous observation, our eyes have linked this curve with strength or support. Figure 71 has described this curve in detail. It consists of a long, relatively flat section with a sharp and sudden turn at the end. Designers refer to this curve as the Curve of Force, and it's incredibly valuable in all types of decoration. Even in ancient times, designers used it in some form, as can be seen from the fragment of Greek sculpture in Figure 72. Its beauty lies in its variety. A circle is pretty dull due to its monotonous curvature. Our eyes crave variety, and the curve of force satisfies this need and provides a sense of satisfaction. As wood designers, how can we use this curve to enhance our outlines?

An Approximate Curve of Force

For approximate similarity of curvature an ellipse constructed as shown in Figure 73 will be found convenient. By drawing several ellipses of varying sizes upon sheets of tin or zinc, a series of templates of utmost practical value may be formed and used as was done in securing the curves of force in Figures 74 and 75. If the rail or shelf is longer than the post, measured downward from the rail to the floor or to the next shelf, the ellipse should be used with its major axis placed in a horizontal position, Figure 75. If, on the contrary, the post is longer than the shelf the ellipse should have its major axis in a vertical position, Figure 74. Figures 76 and 77 show other instances of the use of the approximate curve of force. Many similar practical applications will occur to the designer.

To achieve a similar curvature, an ellipse created as shown in Figure 73 will be useful. By sketching several ellipses of different sizes on sheets of tin or zinc, you can create a set of templates that are really practical, just like what was done to capture the curves of force in Figures 74 and 75. If the rail or shelf is longer than the post, measure downward from the rail to the floor or to the next shelf, and the ellipse should be used with its major axis horizontal, Figure 75. Conversely, if the post is longer than the shelf, the ellipse should have its major axis vertical, Figure 74. Figures 76 and 77 illustrate other examples of using the approximate curve of force. Many other similar practical applications will come to mind for the designer.

Mouldings

We have classed the bracket as a link connecting a vertical and horizontal structure. Mouldings may likewise be considered as links connecting similar horizontal or vertical surfaces by bands of graded forms. Inasmuch as they effect the outline they are considered in this chapter. As the mouldings are to assist the eye to make the jump from one surface to another by easy steps, the position from which the mouldings are to be seen determines to some extent their design.

We’ve categorized the bracket as a connection between vertical and horizontal structures. Moldings can also be seen as links connecting similar horizontal or vertical surfaces through bands of varying shapes. Since they affect the outline, they are discussed in this chapter. The purpose of the moldings is to help the eye smoothly transition from one surface to another, so the viewpoint from which the moldings will be seen somewhat influences their design.

[62] Enrichment of the Contour or Outline by Mouldings Applied to Wood Plate 21

Figure 78 shows the relation of the spectator to three types of mouldings at A, B, and C. The top or crown (A) is to be seen from [63] below. On a large project the angle of the mouldings with the body of the object should be approximately 45 degrees. The intermediate moulding (B) is lighter than the crown and forms a transitional link that may be seen from either above or below. The lower or base moulding (C) is the widest member of the group as demanded by our sense of stability. It is seen from above. Both for sanitary and structural reasons it projects but slightly from the base. With this grouping in mind it is needless to say that a faulty moulding is one, some portion of which, hidden by intervening moulding, cannot be seen by the spectator.

Figure 78 illustrates the relationship of the viewer to three types of moldings at A, B, and C. The top or crown (A) is visible from below. In a large project, the angle of the moldings with the body of the object should be about 45 degrees. The intermediate molding (B) is lighter than the crown and acts as a transitional link that can be seen from either above or below. The lower or base molding (C) is the widest part of the group, as required for our sense of stability. It is visible from above. For both sanitary and structural reasons, it only slightly projects from the base. With this grouping in mind, it goes without saying that a faulty molding is one where some part, hidden by the intervening molding, cannot be seen by the viewer.

Architectural design and history have formulated a series of curves, geometric in character, that are regarded as standards in the Industrial Arts. Some of the more prominent curves with their constructions are shown in Figure 79. The horizontal divisions are analyzed in accordance with Rules 2a and 2b. It is noticed that the Scotia possesses a curve having the shape of the curve of force, while the two Cymas are saved from monotonous division by means of their reversed curves, illustrating the contrast of direction. The curves of Figure 80 are excellent lines for freehand practice in designing mouldings and will develop the principle of continuity of curvature or the smooth transition of one curve into the next.

Architectural design and history have established a collection of curves, characterized by geometric shapes, which are considered standards in the Industrial Arts. Some of the more notable curves and their constructions are displayed in Figure 79. The horizontal divisions are examined according to Rules 2a and 2b. It is observed that the Scotia has a curve resembling the shape of the force curve, while the two Cymas are prevented from being monotonous by their reversed curves, which highlight the contrast in direction. The curves of Figure 80 are excellent lines for freehand practice in designing moldings and will help develop the principle of continuous curvature or the smooth transition from one curve to the next.

Continuity and Contrast

To keep this continuity from the monotony of a Marcel Wave it is customary to break continuous curves by a fillet such as a straight line as shown at D, Figures 81, 82, and 83. When the desired outside diameter has been reached, contrast of direction is necessary and pleasing as a return, Figure 82. A glance at the curves so far considered will quickly determine whether they are fitted for the crown, intermediate or base mouldings. A curve should join a straight line with either a tangential or right angle junction, which makes for positiveness in contour expression.

To maintain continuity from the monotony of a Marcel Wave, it's common to break continuous curves with a fillet, like a straight line shown at D, Figures 81, 82, and 83. Once the desired outside diameter is reached, a change in direction is necessary and visually appealing as a return, Figure 82. A quick look at the curves we've discussed will easily show if they're suitable for crown, intermediate, or base moldings. A curve should connect to a straight line with either a tangential or right angle junction, which helps ensure clarity in contour expression.

Grouping of Curves

Application of these curves to outline enrichment for wood turning projects is to be governed by a strict adherence to Rules 2a or 2b, otherwise confusion and lack of unity will result. Figure 83 shows a major grouping under Rule 2b with the subdivisions and minor curves arranged under Rules 2a and 2b. Figure 84 shows a disregard for rules and the result is an undesirable monotony of contour. If smooth and even continuity of curvature is given [65] considerable thought, together with that for systematic grouping and variety, a pleasing result from wood turning (a much abused but pleasing form of outline enrichment) may be secured. Figures 85 and 86 are illustrations from the industrial field with moulding curves grouped, following and supporting the structural lines of the object. The columns in Figure 86 might, however, be advantageously reversed.

Using these curves to enhance wood turning projects should strictly follow Rules 2a or 2b; otherwise, it will lead to confusion and a lack of unity. Figure 83 shows a significant grouping under Rule 2b, with subdivisions and minor curves organized under Rules 2a and 2b. Figure 84 illustrates a neglect of the rules, resulting in an undesirable monotony of shape. If smooth and consistent curvature is given careful consideration, along with systematic grouping and variety, a pleasing outcome from wood turning (often misused but still an appealing form of outline enhancement) can be achieved. Figures 85 and 86 provide examples from the industrial sector, where molding curves are grouped to follow and support the structural lines of the object. However, the columns in Figure 86 could be effectively reversed.

[64]

Figure 85.—Modern Candlesticks

Figure 85.—Contemporary Candlesticks

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 86.—Modern Book Trough

Figure 86.—Contemporary Book Trough

Materials

Large objects designed to be seen from a distance require larger space divisions for their mouldings than do small objects seen from a nearer point. Material affects the curve somewhat. Smaller mouldings are more suited to the expensive woods like mahogany while larger curves may be used in pine or oak.

Large objects meant to be viewed from afar need more spacious divisions for their moldings than smaller objects viewed up close. The material also influences the curve a bit. Smaller moldings work better with pricey woods like mahogany, while larger curves can be made with pine or oak.

Evolution of Enriched Outline Design

We now have at our command a number of interesting and serviceable curves suited to the material. Plate 22 is a sheet of applications. Figures 87 to 94 deal with the book-rack end and in this, as in the initial chapter, architecture is referred to as the source for many laws of industrial design. It has seemed wise to illustrate some of these important parallels as follows:

We now have several interesting and useful curves that fit the material. Plate 22 is a sheet of applications. Figures 87 to 94 focus on the book-rack end, and in this case, as in the initial chapter, architecture is cited as the basis for many principles of industrial design. It seems smart to illustrate some of these significant similarities as follows:

We will assume the type of joint construction of the book-rack end as settled and the question of enrichment to be under consideration.

We will assume that the design of the book rack's end is finalized and now we will focus on the discussion of enhancements.

Figure 87 is a simple primary mass without enrichment. It is comparable to the plain box-like structure with monotonous outline and without interest. The eye follows the outline in the direction of the arrows, pausing at the square corners, which interrupt a free movement by a harsh right angle. The base (an appendage) repeats in each instance the lines of the primary mass.

Figure 87 is a basic, unadorned shape without any embellishments. It resembles a plain boxy structure with a boring outline and no appealing features. The eye moves along the outline in the direction of the arrows, stopping at the square corners, which create a jarring pause in the flow with their sharp angles. The base (an attachment) mirrors the lines of the main shape in every case.

Figure 88. Round corners, by freeing the design from the right angles, accelerate the eye movement and give a sense of added interest and grace to the contour.

Figure 88. Rounded corners, by removing the sharp angles, speed up eye movement and add a feeling of extra interest and elegance to the shape.

Figure 89. The cornice of a building suggests a similar arrangement which may be added to the primary mass. It adds the element of contrast of direction and variety of widths.

Figure 89. The cornice of a building indicates a similar layout that can be added to the main structure. It brings an element of contrasting direction and variety in widths.

Variations

Figure 90. The main primary mass of a building with two equal appendages will suggest the enrichment of the outline in sympathy with three vertical divisions. Rule 3b. The rounded corners again assist the eye to travel freely around the contours, thus giving a sense of unity to the entire form.

Figure 90. The main body of a building, along with two identical extensions, will enhance the outline in harmony with three vertical sections. Rule 3b. The rounded corners help the eye move smoothly around the edges, creating a feeling of unity for the whole shape.

[66] Enrichment of the Functional Outlines Or Contours As Applied to Wood Plate 22
[67]

Figures 101 and 102

Figures 101 and 102

Figure 91. The pediment of a Greek temple with the interest centered at the top of the pediment (x) causes a similar concentration of interest in the book-rack end. The slight inclination of the sides supplies variety of widths. The architect considers an object with the interest centered in this manner in the upper portion, as possessing more individuality than a motive with purely horizontal lines across the top boundary.

Figure 91. The triangular top of a Greek temple draws attention to the peak (x), creating a similar focus at the end of the book rack. The slight tilt of the sides adds a variety of widths. The architect sees an object that focuses interest in this way at the top as having more character than one with just horizontal lines across the upper edge.

[68] Folding Screen

Figure 102a

Fig. 102a

[69]

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 103.—A Modern Telephone Stand and Stool

Figure 103.—A Modern Phone Stand and Stool

[70] Figure 92. In this figure the curved inclination facilitates the upward movement of the eye, at the same time supplying variety of width.

[70] Figure 92. In this figure, the curved shape helps guide the eye upward while also providing a mix of widths.

Figure 93. The addition of an appendage to the outline of the Greek temple suggests a slight drop or variation in the top edge of the book-rack end which gives increased interest and grace through variety.

Figure 93. Adding an extension to the outline of the Greek temple implies a subtle dip or change in the top edge of the book rack's end, which adds more visual interest and elegance through variety.

Figure 94. Contrast of direction is supplied in this suggestion but it is questionable whether we are adding much to the interest by the corner.

Figure 94. This suggestion offers a contrast in direction, but it's debatable if we're really increasing the interest by the corner.

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 104.—Modern Chair

Figure 104.—Contemporary Chair

[71]

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 105.—A Modern Serving Table

Figure 105.—A Modern Serving Table

Figures 95 to 98 are variations of one theme, the foot stool, and Figure 99 adds suggestive designs for rails. D in Figure 99 shows the enrichment line cut to a depth which threatens the structural value of the rail. This is corrected in Figure 103. Figure 100 is an application of the curve of force to a chair leg B, with other possibilities at A and C. Numerous applications of the varied curves under consideration are found throughout this sheet.

Figures 95 to 98 are different takes on the same idea, the foot stool, and Figure 99 offers creative designs for rails. D in Figure 99 illustrates the decorative line cut to a depth that compromises the structural integrity of the rail. This issue is addressed in Figure 103. Figure 100 shows the use of the force curve on a chair leg B, with more options at A and C. Many applications of the various curves being discussed can be found throughout this sheet.

[72]

Figure 105a

Figure 105a

[73]

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 106.—Sheraton Table

Figure 106.—Sheraton Table

Before closing with enriched outlines it is well to consider flagrant violations of this enrichment now on the market. Figure 101 shows a typical example of complete lack of unity and simplicity. It is a type of design often associated with cheaply constructed furniture. It is an ornate parody on outline enrichment. The curves of extravagance are well shown in Figure 102 where large bulbous curves with no systematic grouping combine disastrous waste of material with lack of grace or lightness. It is excellent practice to redesign such examples as those shown in Figures 101 and 102 with special reference to Rule 5c.

Before wrapping up with enhanced outlines, it's important to look at the blatant violations of this enhancement currently available. Figure 101 presents a typical example of a complete lack of unity and simplicity. It's a type of design often linked to cheaply made furniture. It's an exaggerated mockery of outline enhancement. The excessive curves are clearly showcased in Figure 102, where large, bulbous curves with no systematic grouping result in a disastrous waste of materials combined with a lack of elegance or lightness. It's great practice to redesign examples like those shown in Figures 101 and 102 with special attention to Rule 5c.

Rule 5c. Outline enrichment, by its similarity, should give a sense of oneness or unity to the design, binding divergent members together.

Rule 5c. Outline enrichment, because of its similarity, should create a feeling of oneness or unity in the design, connecting different elements together.

[75] Illustrations 103 to 106 are typical forms of present day outline enrichment. Limitations of space will not permit reference to the use of Period furniture. Sheraton and Hepplewhite designs are most adaptable for school uses as may be seen by comparing the Sheraton desk (Figure 106) with the foot stool in Figure 96.

[75] Illustrations 103 to 106 are typical examples of modern outline enrichment. Limitations of space prevent reference to the use of period furniture. Sheraton and Hepplewhite designs are most suitable for school purposes, as can be seen by comparing the Sheraton desk (Figure 106) with the footstool in Figure 96.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Figure 83 and Plates 22 and 23 are indicative of what might be obtained from a class. The problem represented on Plate 23 is advantageously colored with the intended stain and with a small section of side wall and trim visible. See Chapter 16, Figures 458 to 463. Figure 102a shows the method of enlarging a design into a full size working drawing for shop purposes.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ and 23 demonstrate what to expect from a class. The issue shown in Plate 23 is effectively colored with the desired stain, along with a brief view of the side wall and trim. Check __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__ to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__ shows how to scale up a design into a full-size working drawing for shop use.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Draw the primary rectangle.

(a) Draw the main rectangle.

(b) Subdivide the rectangle into vertical and horizontal divisions.

(b) Divide the rectangle into vertical and horizontal sections.

(c) Determine parts to be treated by contour enrichment.

(c) Identify the sections that need improvement through contour enrichment.

(d) Determine method suited to the project: wood turning, moulding, etc.

(d) Select a method that suits the project: wood turning, molding, etc.

(e) Group the wood turning curves under a definite system included under Rules 2a and 2b. Group the mouldings under crown, intermediate, and base classifications. Add this enrichment to the primary mass or make other simple variations that will not destroy the unity of the project.

(e) Organize the wood turning curves into a specific system as detailed in Rules 2a and 2b. Classify the moldings into crown, intermediate, and base categories. Integrate this enhancement into the main structure or create other simple variations that won't disrupt the overall unity of the project.

(f) Dimension and otherwise prepare the drawing for shop use.

(f) Measure and prepare the drawing for use in the shop.

(g) Construct the project.

(g) Build the project.

Note.—If the designer is not properly equipped to prepare his own mouldings, he should consult moulding catalogs or the stock of some local lumber company.

Note.—If the designer isn’t properly equipped to make his own moldings, he should look at molding catalogs or the inventory of a local lumber company.

ADDITIONAL SUGGESTED PROBLEMS

Design a wood pedestal with the curves grouped into three horizontal divisions.

Design a wooden pedestal with curves arranged into three horizontal sections.

Design a hall table 2 feet 10 inches high and add simple contour enrichment.

Design a hall table that’s 2 feet 10 inches tall and include some simple contour detailing.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 5a. Outline enrichment should be subordinated to and support the structure.

Rule 5a. Outline enrichment should be secondary to and support the structure.

Rule 5b. Outline enrichment should add grace, lightness, and variety to the design.

Rule 5b. Outline enrichment should add elegance, ease, and diversity to the design.

Rule 5c. Outline enrichment, by its similarity, should give a sense of oneness or unity to the design, binding divergent members together.

Rule 5c. Outline enrichment should create a sense of unity in the design, bringing different elements together.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. State nature and need of enrichment.

1. Explain the nature and necessity of enrichment.

2. What two forms of enrichment are commonly used in industrial arts design?

2. What are the two common types of enrichment used in industrial arts design?

3. What four qualities are added to industrial design by contour enrichment?

3. What four qualities does contour enrichment add to industrial design?

4. What disturbing elements should be guarded against in the application of contour enrichment?

4. What challenging factors should we be cautious of when applying contour enrichment?

5. Describe the curve of force and its function in the contour enrichment of wood.

5. Describe the force curve and how it enhances the shape of wood.

6. What are mouldings? Name three types of mouldings, their positions with relation to the eye level, and some curves used in their design.

6. What are moldings? Name three types of moldings, their positions relative to eye level, and some curves used in their design.

7. Give examples of curves of continuity and contrast. By what means should two contrasting curves be separated?

7. Provide examples of curves with continuity and contrast. How should two contrasting curves be differentiated from each other?

8. How should a curve join a straight line?

8. How should a curve connect with a straight line?

9. Explain the grouping of contour curves in wood turning projects similar to a round leg or candlestick.

9. Describe how contour curves are grouped in wood turning projects like a round leg or a candlestick.

10. Present five designs for book-racks, enriched by changes of the contour. Give architectural cross references for each design.

10. Present five designs for book racks, enhanced by shape variations. Provide architectural cross references for each design.

11. Present three well designed table or chair legs and top and bottom rails and assemble one of these in a design.

11. Present three well-designed table or chair legs along with top and bottom rails, and put one of these together in a design.


Chapter 7
ENRICHMENT OF THE CONTOURS OR OUTLINES OF DESIGNS IN CLAY

Need of Enrichment

In the medium we are now about to consider there is a tendency for the enthusiastic beginner to over-elaborate the outline into meaningless forms. This possibly is due to the ease with which clay is manipulated. It would be well then to ask two questions before starting with the work of enriching the simple structure. First, why should it be enriched—is there a positive gain by so doing? Second, (if the decision is favorable to enrichment) where should it be enriched? Let us co-ordinate the parts to assist in this process.

In the medium we're about to discuss, there's a tendency for enthusiastic beginners to complicate the outline into meaningless shapes. This might be because clay is so easy to work with. So, it’s a good idea to ask two questions before we start enhancing the basic structure. First, why should it be enhanced—will there be a clear benefit? Second, (if we decide to enhance it) where should we add those enhancements? Let’s organize the parts to help with this process.

Parts Differing in Function

Rule 5d. Parts of one design differing in function should differ in appearance but be co-ordinated with the entire design. As a suggestion to guide one in enriching an object it is necessary to consider that parts differing in function may differ in appearance, but as members of one family they should still be related to the whole. For example, a spout, handle, and lid may differ in design from that of the body of a pitcher because they differ from it in function. Again, the rim and foot of a vase may be slightly changed or individually accented because of their respective duties. The base and holder of a candlestick may vary in design from the central part or handle, as each has a special function to perform. This rule of the change of appearance with the change of functional service (Rule 5d), is found throughout architectural design. The variation in design in the base, shaft, and capital of a column is possibly one of the most common examples. While differing in function they still must have unity and "hold together."

Rule 5d. Parts of a design that serve different functions should look different but be coordinated with the overall design. To enhance an object, it's important to recognize that parts serving different functions can have different appearances, but as part of the same family, they should still relate to the whole. For instance, the spout, handle, and lid of a pitcher can have different designs from the body because they serve different roles. Similarly, the rim and foot of a vase might be slightly altered or highlighted individually due to their specific functions. The base and holder of a candlestick can differ in design from the central part or handle, as each serves a unique purpose. This principle that appearance changes with functional differences (Rule 5d) is prevalent in architectural design. A classic example is the variation in design of the base, shaft, and capital of a column. While they differ in function, they still must have unity and "hold together."

Unity

These functional parts of one design, differing in service rendered, form centers of construction and may receive emphasis in outline enrichment. Corners and terminal points are likewise available for decoration and will be discussed at length later.

These functional parts of a design, which provide different services, create construction focal points and can be highlighted through enhanced outlines. Corners and endpoints can also be decorated, and we will discuss this in detail later.

[78]

Figure 107.—Clay Outline Enrichment in the Rookwood Potteries

Figure 107.—Clay Outline Enrichment in the Rookwood Potteries

Enrichment in clay and metal generally means a substitution of curved for straight lines in the enriched portions of the design. These curves have the ability to impart grace, lightness, and variety to an object provided they are based upon constructive features of the problem. They must have a unit of measurement and must likewise be appropriate to the material. It is therefore necessary to deal with clay in this chapter and follow with a consideration of metal in another chapter.

Enrichment in clay and metal usually means replacing straight lines with curves in the enhanced parts of the design. These curves can add elegance, lightness, and variety to an object as long as they're based on the underlying constructive elements of the design. They need to be measured consistently and should fit the material being used. Therefore, this chapter will focus on clay, followed by a discussion of metal in another chapter.

In Figures 109 to 123, Plate 24, we have a number of examples of variation of practically the same primary enclosing rectangle. Figure 108 represents a "squarely" proportioned circular bowl lacking both refinement of proportion and enrichment. Figure 109 has added refinement of proportions. Figures 110 and 111 have introduced an outline enriched to the extent of a simple curve. The[79] base is the dominant width in the first, and the top dominates in width in the second. The outline in Figure 112, while similar to 110 for a portion of its length, departs at a stated point and by curving in toward the base supplies more variety to the contour. We have already said that this outline curve should have a unit of measurement and by referring to Rules 2a and 2b we are able to formulate the following:

In Figures 109 to 123, Plate 24, we have several examples of variations on essentially the same primary enclosing rectangle. Figure 108 shows a "squared" circular bowl that lacks both proportional refinement and enhancement. Figure 109 has introduced more refined proportions. Figures 110 and 111 have added a simple curved outline. The[79] base is wider in the first example, while in the second, the top is the dominant width. The outline in Figure 112, while resembling 110 for part of its length, diverges at a specific point and curves in towards the base, providing more variety to the contour. We've already noted that this outline curve should have a unit of measurement, and by referring to Rules 2a and 2b, we can establish the following:

Unit of Measurement for Curves in Outline Enrichment

Rule 5e. In cylindrical forms outline curves with a vertical tendency should have their turning points or units of measurement in accordance with the horizontal divisions of Rules 2a and 2b. Figures 112 and 113 have as their unit of measurement two horizontal spaces formed in accordance with Rule 2a, while Figures 116 and 117 have still more variety by the addition of a compound curve with its turning points or unit of measurement based upon Rule 2b. Figures 114 and 115 with outlines similar to those in Figures 112 and 113, respectively, have an additional enrichment, the foot and rim accentuation.

Rule 5e. In cylindrical shapes, curves with a vertical tendency should have their turning points or units of measurement aligned with the horizontal divisions of Rules 2a and 2b. Figures 112 and 113 use two horizontal spaces as their unit of measurement, based on Rule 2a, while Figures 116 and 117 offer even more variety by incorporating a compound curve with turning points or units of measurement according to Rule 2b. Figures 114 and 115, with outlines similar to those in Figures 112 and 113, respectively, include an additional enhancement, the foot and rim emphasis.

Accentuation of Functional Parts in Clay

The new element of enrichment consists of accenting by adding to the design a modeled rim and a base or foot, as it is technically known. This not only strengthens the structure at these two functional points but, by adding a small section of shadow, it tends to break up the surface, Figure 127, and add to the variety of enrichment. Figures 124 to 127 show the building processes connected with this interesting and constructive addition.

The new element of enrichment involves enhancing the design by including a sculpted rim and a base or foot, as it's technically called. This not only reinforces the structure at these two functional points but also, by introducing a small area of shadow, helps to break up the surface, Figure 127, and adds to the variety of enrichment. Figures 124 to 127 illustrate the construction processes related to this fascinating and constructive addition.

Appendages

Figures 116 to 119 show variations of the preceding figures while Figures 120 to 123 introduce the appendages to preceding figures. As in the designing of all appendages, discussed in Chapter V, it is the designer's intention to balance spout and handle to avoid a one-sided or top-heavy appearance.

Figures 116 to 119 display variations of the earlier figures while Figures 120 to 123 present the additions to the earlier figures. As with the design of all additions discussed in Chapter V, the designer aims to balance the spout and handle to prevent an unbalanced or top-heavy look.

One of the principal difficulties that confronts the amateur designer is the failure to secure variety while retaining unity. This is largely due to a lack of ideas upon the subject and a marked lack of systematic development of one theme.

One of the main challenges that amateur designers face is achieving variety while maintaining unity. This is largely because of a shortage of ideas on the topic and a noticeable failure to systematically develop a single theme.

[80] Outline Enrichment of the Primary Mass in Clay

Plate 24

Plate 24

Systematic Development of Outline Enrichment in Clay

Attention is directed to the diagram in the lower portion of Plate 24. The idea is to start with some simple form in columns A, B, C, D, E, F, Figure 128. Figure 129 introduces two horizontal divisions. Rule 2a. The black portion is the dominant section. [81] Notice the change in outlines based upon this division. Figure 130 raises the division point of the two subdivisions into the upper half of the object. This brings out the need of an accented foot which is, however, not of sufficient prominence to be considered as a horizontal spacing. Figure 131 raises the horizontal division points, again causing the introduction of a larger foot and now qualifying it as a division of the whole mass. This then makes our design a three-division problem, Rule 2b, and places it under the restrictions of Rule 5e.

Attention is directed to the diagram in the lower portion of Plate 24. The idea is to start with some simple form in columns A, B, C, D, E, F, Figure 128. Figure 129 introduces two horizontal divisions. Rule 2a. The black section is the dominant area. [81] Notice the change in outlines based on this division. Figure 130 raises the division point of the two subdivisions into the upper half of the object. This highlights the need for an accented foot which is, however, not noticeable enough to be considered as a horizontal spacing. Figure 131 raises the horizontal division points, again leading to the introduction of a larger foot and now qualifying it as a division of the whole mass. This then makes our design a three-division problem, Rule 2b, and places it under the restrictions of Rule 5e.

The feet of all of the bowls have been systematically decreased in width by the converging lines C-C while the tops have been maintained constant in width. By this simple diagram an infinite number of designs may be formed and the choice of selection from the series, thoughtfully exercised, will supply the ideal bowl, ready to be translated into a full size working drawing. It is not the idea, however, to guarantee a perfect design in each one of these divisions as that would be practically impossible, but we have systematically applied a method of determination for stimulating the imagination. A series of articles by F.H. Rhead in the Keramic Studio first suggested the system of development by means of graded rectangles.

The feet of all the bowls have been intentionally narrowed by the converging lines C-C, while the tops have stayed the same width. With this simple diagram, you can create countless designs, and carefully choosing from this series will give you the perfect bowl, ready to be turned into a full-size working drawing. However, we don't aim to guarantee a flawless design in each of these sections, as that would be nearly impossible, but we have systematically applied a method to stimulate creativity. A series of articles by F.H. Rhead in the Keramic Studio first introduced the development system using graded rectangles.

Candlesticks

Plate 25 shows a further elaboration of the succeeding themes. The candlestick series, Figures 132 to 138, introduces two or three-space division problems with contour turning points at A, Rule 5e, and with accented or embryonic feet and rims. The change from the purely functional and unenriched member of Figure 132 through the series shows the enrichment changing slightly to meet the needs of the three functional parts: the base, the handle, and the candle socket. Rule 5d.

Plate 25 provides a deeper look into the following themes. The candlestick series, Figures 132 to 138, presents problems related to two or three-space divisions with contour turning points at A, Rule 5e, and features accented or basic feet and rims. The transition from the purely functional and unembellished member of Figure 132 through the series demonstrates a slight enrichment to cater to the needs of the three functional parts: the base, the handle, and the candle socket. Rule 5d.

Containers

Figure 139 shows a series of illustrations representing variations for containers. The first figure is without enrichment, followed by variations of the outline in the manner already suggested.

Figure 139 shows a series of illustrations representing different options for containers. The first figure is plain, followed by variations of the design as previously suggested.

Pourers

Figure 140 indicates a series of pourers with the least attractive design on the left end. This unsatisfactory design is found, upon analysis, to be due to centrally placed horizontal division violating Rule 2a. The design of the appendages in this series will again be found to conform with the rules in Chapter V. The units of measurement for the curves may be readily ascertained from observation.

Figure 140 shows a group of pourers with the least appealing design on the left side. This unsatisfactory design is found, upon analysis, to result from a horizontal division placed in the center that contradicts Rule 2a. The design of the appendages in this series will again be found to follow the rules in Chapter V. The units of measurement for the curves can be easily determined through observation.

[82] Outline Enrichment of the Primary Mass in Clay With Methods of Securing Variety

Plate 25

Plate 25

Similarity with Varying Primary Masses

Figure 141 is useful for the following purpose. It is desirable at times to develop a number of similar forms for a set, with a gradually increasing ratio of proportions, either in height or width. Figure 141 shows how the height may be increased while maintaining a common width. Notice the gradual proportionate increase of the height of the neck A-B as well as that of the body. The line X is of the utmost value in ascertaining the height of the intermediate bowls. The eye should now be so trained that the height of the neck A-B on the last bowl can be readily proportioned by eye measurement to that of the first bowl. A line similar to X will give the intermediate points.

Figure 141 is helpful for the following purpose. Sometimes it’s useful to create several similar shapes for a set, with a gradually increasing ratio of proportions, either in height or width. Figure 141 illustrates how the height can be increased while keeping a consistent width. Notice the gradual proportional increase of the height of the neck A-B as well as that of the body. The line X is extremely valuable for determining the height of the intermediate bowls. Your eye should now be trained to easily proportion the height of the neck A-B on the last bowl in relation to the first bowl through eye measurement. A line similar to X will indicate the intermediate points.

Figure 142 varies the width in a similar manner. Notice the gradually decreasing distances C-D-E-F, the spaces for which may be determined by the eye.

Figure 142 adjusts the width in a similar way. Notice the gradually decreasing distances C-D-E-F, with the spaces that can be determined visually.

[84] Rules 5d and 5e. Contour or Outline Enrichment. Clay. Instruction Sheet

Plate 26

Plate 26

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plate 26 suggests the sequential progression of steps leading to the potter's working drawing.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ outlines the step-by-step approach leading to the potter's working drawing.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Draw the primary rectangle.

(a) Draw the main rectangle.

(b) Add limits of functional parts: handle, spout, cover, etc.

(b) Define the bounds for functional parts: handle, spout, lid, etc.

(c) Establish unit of measurement for primary rectangle contour curves.

(c) Establish a unit of measurement for the main rectangle's contour curves.

(d) Design contour of primary mass and add the appendages to it, observing the rules pertaining to appendages and unit of measurement.

(d) Shape the main body and add extra parts, following the guidelines for those parts and the measurement units.

(e) Dimension and otherwise prepare the drawing for the potter's use. This includes the planning of a working drawing, one-eighth larger in all directions than the preliminary design, to allow for the shrinkage of the clay body. The working drawing should also be in partial sections to show the construction of the interior of the ware.

(e) Measure and prepare the drawing for the potter's use. This includes creating a working drawing that is one-eighth larger in every direction than the original design to account for clay shrinkage. The working drawing should also feature partial sections to illustrate how the interior of the piece is constructed.

SUGGESTED PROBLEM

Design a teapot, tea caddy, and cup showing a common unity in contour design. (Plate 82.)

Design a teapot, tea caddy, and cup that have a unified shape. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 5d. Parts of one design differing in function should differ in appearance but be co-ordinated with the entire design.

Rule 5d. Design elements that serve different functions should appear distinct but still align with the overall design.

Rule 5e. In cylindrical forms outline curves with a vertical tendency should [85] have their turning points or units of measurement in accordance with the horizontal divisions of Rules 2a and 2b.

Rule 5e. For cylindrical shapes, upward or downward curves should have their turning points or measurement units determined by the horizontal divisions from Rules 2a and 2b.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Give and illustrate the rule governing the change in the appearance of the design with the change of functional service.

1. Describe and demonstrate the rule that explains how the design adapts when its functional purpose changes.

2. What is the aesthetic value of curves in outline enrichment?

2. What is the aesthetic significance of curves in enhancing outlines?

3. Correlate the rule governing the unit of measurement for vertical contour curves with the rules controlling horizontal divisions.

3. Relate the rules for measuring vertical contour curves to the regulations governing horizontal divisions.

4. Show, by a diagram, the method of systematically varying the contours of circular forms: (a) by changing the horizontal divisions; (b) by varying the proportion of the primary mass.

4. Use a diagram to show the systematic method of altering the shapes of circular forms: (a) by modifying the horizontal sections; (b) by changing the proportion of the main mass.

5. What is the value of accenting the functional parts in clay design?

5. Why is it important to emphasize the functional parts in clay design?

Courtesy of James Milliken University

Thanks to James Milliken University

Figure 142a.—Outline and Surface Enrichment in College Pottery

Figure 142a.—Outline and Surface Enrichment in College Pottery

[86] Outline Enrichment of the Primary Masses of the Baser Metals

Plate 27

Plate 27


Chapter 8
ENRICHMENT OF THE CONTOURS OR OUTLINES OF DESIGNS IN BASE AND PRECIOUS METALS

Enrichment of the Base Metals—Iron, Copper, Brass, Bronze

The contours of clay forms are generally free to follow the curves and take the direction dictated by the knowledge and taste of the designer. Metal outlines are more restricted in this respect. Metal is frequently associated with service and consequently its design is often governed by its intended use. For example, if we were to design a metal drawer pull for a buffet, it would have to be considered in relation to the character and shape of the buffet. Again, the screws with which it is attached to the buffet would influence its outline design. It is, in other words, a dependent outline.

The shapes of clay objects can typically flow freely, following the curves and direction shaped by the designer's knowledge and taste. In contrast, metal shapes are more limited in this regard. Metal is often linked to functionality, which means its design is usually dictated by its intended purpose. For instance, if we were designing a metal drawer pull for a buffet, we would need to think about the style and form of the buffet itself. Additionally, the screws used to attach it to the buffet would affect its overall design. In other words, it’s a dependent outline.

Free and Dependent Outlines

To distinguish between an unrestricted outline and one bound by other considerations we will term the restricted outline a dependent outline, for its enrichment must be related to other forms either within or without its surface. A free outline on the other hand is one in which the designer is free to use his ideas unrestricted by any other outside consideration, except service and design consistent with the material.

To differentiate between an unrestricted outline and one limited by other factors, we will call the limited outline a dependent outline, because its development needs to connect with other forms, either within or outside its surface. A free outline, on the other hand, is one where the designer is free to express their ideas without being constrained by any outside considerations, apart from service and design that aligns with the material.

In order to emphasize the nature of a dependent outline we have Rule 5f. Dependent outline enrichment should be related to essential parts of a design and influenced by their forms and functions; it must be consistent with the idea of the subject.

In order to emphasize the nature of a dependent outline we have Rule 5f. Dependent outline enrichment should be connected to the essential parts of a design and shaped by their forms and functions; it must align with the core idea of the subject.

Enrichment of Edges

We will start with the simplest form of outline enrichment of base metals, the decoration of an edge. It is contrary to the laws of service to leave sharp edges on articles intended for intimate household use, except where cutting edges are required. The rounding of sharp edges is likewise dictated by the laws of beauty. The transition from one plane surface to another is assisted by a rounded edge, as the eye takes kindly to the softened play of light and shade.

We will begin with the most basic way to enhance the outline of base metals, which is decorating an edge. It's against the principles of functionality to leave sharp edges on items meant for regular household use unless they are cutting edges. Rounding off sharp edges is also guided by the principles of aesthetics. A rounded edge helps transition from one flat surface to another, as the eye appreciates the gentle interplay of light and shadow.

This gives us the simplest form of enrichment—the beveled, chamfered, or rounded edge, Figures 143 and 144, Plate 27. The rim of a[88] thin 18-gauge plate is likewise improved and strengthened by lapping the edge as shown in Figure 145, giving the rounded effect shown in Figure 144.

This provides us with the most basic type of enhancement—the beveled, chamfered, or rounded edge, Figures 143 and 144, Plate 27. The edge of a[88] thin 18-gauge plate is also enhanced and reinforced by lapping the edge as demonstrated in Figure 145, creating the rounded effect illustrated in Figure 144.

Enrichment of Functional Parts

There are six important functional parts with which we are brought into common contact in industrial design of base metals. There are many more, but these are the most common and consequently are of the utmost importance to the designer as design centers. These parts are itemized as follows: (1) Corners, (2) Appendages, (3) Intermediate Points, (4) Terminals, (5) Links, (6) Details. As the decorative treatment of each part varies with the functional duty, Rule 5d, separate treatment and consideration of each part will be necessary.

There are six key functional parts that we regularly encounter in industrial design of base metals. While there are many others, these are the most common and therefore extremely important to the designer as design focal points. These parts are listed as follows: (1) Corners, (2) Appendages, (3) Intermediate Points, (4) Terminals, (5) Links, (6) Details. Since the decorative treatment of each part differs based on its functional role, Rule 5d states that each part will need to be treated and considered separately.

Enrichment of Corners

Corners, as extreme turning points of a design, are often found convenient for the location of screw holes, rivets, etc. These important construction elements become prominent functional parts of the design and by custom and the laws of design, Rule 5d, they are capable of receiving outline enrichment. But the contour of the corner must be related to the screws or rivets, particularly if they are near the edge, hence our outline becomes a dependent outline and as such must be related to the rivets or screws by Rule 5f.

Corners, as key turning points in a design, are often ideal for placing screw holes, rivets, etc. These important construction elements become significant functional parts of the design and, according to design norms and Rule 5d, they can be enhanced in their outline. However, the shape of the corner needs to be connected to the screws or rivets, especially if they are close to the edge, which makes our outline a dependent outline that must align with the rivets or screws as stated in Rule 5f.

Figures 146 to 149 show various arrangements of this type of design. The unity of the design is not lost, and the functional parts are enriched by contours related to the elements of service (rivets). Figure 153 shows another but slightly modified example of the same laws applied to hinge construction. The enriched outline in this case is closely associated with the holes in the hinge. The hinges in turn must be related to the object for which they are designed. Figure 150 gives a common example of corner enrichment by means of varying the edge at the corners, i.e., by rounding the tray corners.

Figures 146 to 149 display different variations of this kind of design. The cohesiveness of the design remains intact, and the functional elements are enhanced by shapes linked to the service components (rivets). Figure 153 presents another slightly altered example of the same principles applied to hinge construction. The enhanced shape in this instance is closely tied to the holes in the hinge. The hinges, in turn, must correspond to the object they are intended for. Figure 150 provides a typical example of corner enhancement by adjusting the edges at the corners, i.e., by rounding the corners of the tray.

Enrichment of Appendages

As appendages have distinct functional duties their design may vary as the design of the arm of the human figure differs from the head. Yet, as parts of the same body, they must fit the shape of the object to which they are attached. The candle holder and handle as appendages in Figure 150 are designed in sympathetic relation by means of tangential and similar curves sufficiently varied to give the eye a feeling of variety in the design. The novel single flower holders, Figures 151 and 152, with the glass test tube acting as a [89] container show other possible forms of the appendage design. The first is informal while the second is formal, but both adhere to the first simple rules of appendage design. Rule 4a, etc.

As different body parts have specific functions, their designs can differ just like the arm of a human differs from the head. However, since they are parts of the same body, they need to match the shape of the object they are connected to. The candle holder and handle as appendages in Figure 150 are designed to complement each other, featuring curves that are both similar and varied enough to create a sense of diversity in the overall design. The new single flower holders, Figures 151 and 152, with the glass test tube serving as a container, showcase other possible designs for appendages. The first one has an informal style, while the second is more formal, but both follow the basic principles of appendage design. Rule 4a, etc.

Enrichment of Intermediate Points

Figure 156a.—Candlestick, Rendered by E.R.

Figure 156a.—Candlestick, Created by E.R.

The enrichment of center or intermediate points should be handled with great care and with a definite reason. Careless handling may cause the design to lack unity. Figures 154 and 155 show a simple twist as enrichment. The serviceable reason for this is to obtain a grip at the point of the twist. Again, it varies the character of the straight edges and adds interest without loss of compactness or unity. If one is desirous of widening a vertical or horizontal rod, the enrichment made by welding a number of small rods together with a spreading twist gives a pleasing and serviceable handle. Figure 156.

The enhancement of center or intermediate points should be done carefully and for a specific purpose. If done carelessly, the design may lose its cohesiveness. Figures 154 and 155 demonstrate a simple twist as an enhancement. The practical reason for this is to create a grip at the twist point. Additionally, it changes the appearance of the straight edges and adds interest without sacrificing compactness or unity. If someone wants to widen a vertical or horizontal rod, joining several small rods together with a spreading twist creates a nice and functional handle. Figure 156.

[90] Outline Enrichment of the Primary Mass in the Baser Metals. The Enrichment of Terminals, Links, and Details

Plate 28

Plate 28

Enrichment of Terminals

Free and Dependent Contour Enrichment

As the public demands a happy ending to a story or a play, so does the eye demand a well-designed ending to a design. The part that terminal enrichment plays in industrial design is, therefore, to say the least, important to us as designers. Figure 157 illustrates terminals in thin metal and is shown by courtesy of the School Arts [91] Magazine from one of the articles by Mr. Augustus Rose. The outlines are in part dependent in character, controlled by rivets. Notice the change of curve as the function changes from the dependent curve of the rivet area to the free outline of the handle and again from the handle to the cutting blade; a functional change of marked character, but in thorough unity with the entire design. It is again emphasized that whether the design possesses a free or a dependent outline, or a combination of both types, all parts of the design must be held together by entire unity. The rivets are occasionally placed toward the edge and a domed boss is used to accent the center as is shown in Figure 158.

As the audience expects a happy ending to a story or a play, the same goes for a well-crafted conclusion to a design. The role of terminal enrichment in industrial design is, to put it mildly, crucial for us as designers. Figure 157 shows terminals made of thin metal and is shared with permission from the School Arts [91] Magazine in one of Mr. Augustus Rose's articles. The outlines are partly defined by their character, shaped by rivets. Pay attention to how the curve changes as the function shifts from the dependent curve of the rivet area to the free outline of the handle, and then from the handle to the cutting blade; this is a significant functional change, yet it stays completely cohesive with the overall design. It’s worth noting again that whether the design features a free or a dependent outline, or a mix of both, all parts of the design must be unified by complete unity. The rivets are sometimes positioned toward the edge, with a domed boss used to highlight the center, as demonstrated in Figure 158.

The Ionic Volute

Terminal Enrichment in Wrought Metal

As the Curve of Force was a valuable curve in wood construction, so we find it an equally valuable curve for wrought metal. Its recurrence again and again in industrial design leads us to appreciate its value in the arts. It is the Ionic volute handed down to us in its present form from the time of the Greeks, who developed it to a high state of perfection.

As the Curve of Force was important in wood construction, it's also incredibly valuable for wrought metal. Its consistent use in industrial design helps us recognize its significance in the arts. It’s the Ionic volute passed down to us in its current form from the Greeks, who perfected it.

Curve of Beauty

While its geometric development is a tedious process, it may be easily constructed for practical purposes by the following method. In Figure 159, P represents a small cylinder of wood, possibly a dowel. A strong piece of thread, or fine wire, is wrapped around the base of the dowel a number of times and a loop is formed in the free end. A pencil with a sharp point is inserted in the loop and the pencil and dowel are placed together on a sheet of paper. As the thread unwinds from the dowel the point of the pencil will describe a volute which may be developed indefinitely. It will be noticed that no corresponding parts of the curve are concentric and it thus has constant variety. It has been termed the Curve of Beauty and is found in nature in the wonderfully designed shell of the nautilus.

While its geometric development can be a tedious process, it can be easily created for practical uses by following this method. In Figure 159, P represents a small cylinder of wood, possibly a dowel. A strong piece of thread or fine wire is wrapped around the base of the dowel several times, and a loop is formed in the free end. A sharpened pencil is inserted in the loop, and the pencil and dowel are placed together on a sheet of paper. As the thread unwinds from the dowel, the pencil's point will trace a volute that can be extended indefinitely. You'll notice that no corresponding parts of the curve are concentric, resulting in constant variety. It's called the Beauty Curve and can be found in nature in the beautifully designed shell of the nautilus.

It is advisable to form several templates for the volute out of bent wrought iron, of different sizes, and to practice drawing the curve many times to accustom the hand and the eye to its changes of direction. The "eye" or center portion is sometimes terminated by thinning and expanding in the manner shown in Figure 160.

It’s a good idea to create several templates for the volute using bent wrought iron in different sizes and to practice drawing the curve multiple times. This will help your hand and eye get used to its changes in direction. The "eye" or center part is sometimes finished by thinning and expanding, as shown in Figure 160.

[92] Outline Enrichment of the Primary Mass in Precious Metals. Silver

Plate 29

Plate 29

Greek Scroll

One form of application of the volute is shown in the terminal points of the candlestick in Figure 161. It is here shown combined with the second volute in the form of a reverse curve. In Figure 162, it has been combined with a smaller but reversed volute at the upper end. The entire and combined curve is commonly known as a Greek Scroll. In Figure 163 the Greek Scroll has been combined with the reverse curve of Figure 161 to form a portion of the bracket. In this figure we find the familiar curve of force faithfully serving its function as a supporting member for the top portion of the bracket.

One way the volute is applied is seen at the ends of the candlestick in Figure 161. Here, it’s shown combined with a second volute in the shape of a reverse curve. In Figure 162, it’s combined with a smaller but reversed volute at the top. The whole combined curve is commonly referred to as a Greek Scroll. In Figure 163, the Greek Scroll has been merged with the reverse curve of Figure 161 to create part of the bracket. In this figure, we observe the familiar curve of force effectively serving its purpose as a support for the upper part of the bracket.

Enrichment of Links

A link is a convenient filler in connecting parts of a right angle. It likewise serves as a brace in connecting several disconnected parts and is useful in maintaining the unity of a design. Figure 164 shows a common form of link with its ends thinned and expanded as shown in Figure 160. This construction may, however, be disregarded as it is technically quite difficult to accomplish.

A link is a handy connector for joining parts of a right angle. It also acts as a support for linking various separate sections and helps keep a design cohesive. Figure 164 illustrates a typical form of a link with its ends tapered and widened as displayed in Figure 160. However, this design can be overlooked since it is technically quite challenging to execute.

Enrichment of Details

Details are the smaller portions of a design and are similar to the trimmings and minor brackets of a building in relative importance. They enter to a considerable extent into wrought metal grille design, and are generally formed of the link, Greek scroll, or the Ionic volute, so as to be in harmony with the other parts of the design outline. Rule 5f. Their presence and use may be readily detected on Plate 28.

Details are the smaller parts of a design and are comparable to the trimmings and minor brackets of a building in terms of importance. They play a significant role in wrought metal grille design and are typically created using links, Greek scrolls, or Ionic volutes to match the other elements of the design outline. Rule 5f. Their presence and use can easily be found on Plate 28.

Rule 5g. A curve should join a straight line with either a tangential or right angle junction.

Rule 5g. A curve should connect to a straight line with either a smooth tangent or a right angle.

Summary of Wrought Metal Free Outline Enrichment

As we are now familiar with continuity in wood moulding curves we should feel, in reviewing the figures in this chapter, the value of flowing continuity and tangential junction points (Rule 5g) necessary in wrought metal enrichment. The curves that we have considered are adapted to the materials and a comparatively large and new field of design is opened to the designer through a combination of curves mentioned. Plate 30 is self-explanatory and brings out the general application of the foregoing principles as applied to cast bronze hardware. It is interesting to notice the change of enrichment paralleling the change of function as outlined in Rule 5d.

As we’re now familiar with the continuity in wood molding curves, we should recognize, when looking at the figures in this chapter, the importance of smooth continuity and tangential junction points (Rule 5g) that are essential in enhanced metal designs. The curves we’ve looked at are suited to the materials, and a relatively new and vast area of design opens up for designers through a combination of the mentioned curves. Plate 30 is clear and highlights the general application of the principles discussed for cast bronze hardware. It’s interesting to observe how the enhancements change alongside the shift in function, as noted in Rule 5d.

Outline Enrichment of Precious Metals

Outline Enrichment of Silver

Stones and Their Cuttings

Little has been written regarding the designing of jewelry. As can be readily seen, a semi-precious stone is the controlling factor in the major portion of the designs with silver as a background. Any enrichment merely accentuates the beauty of the setting. This statement would lead us to consider the outline as dependent in character and thoroughly related to the stone. It is necessary then to take the stone as a point of departure. The standard stone cuttings used in simple jewelry are shown in Figures 166 to 170. The first three and the last are cabochon cut, elliptical in contour with flat bottoms. The long axes have been drawn in each instance.

Not much has been written about jewelry design. As you can easily see, a semi-precious stone is the key element in most designs, with silver as the backdrop. Any embellishments simply enhance the beauty of the setting. This observation leads us to view the outline as dependent and closely related to the stone. Therefore, we should start with the stone as our focal point. The standard stone cuts used in simple jewelry are displayed in Figures 166 to 170. The first three and the last are cabochon cut, oval in shape with flat bottoms. The long axes have been indicated in each case.

[94]

Courtesy of P. and F. Corbin

Courtesy of P. and F. Corbin

Plate 30

Plate 30

Relation of Stone to Contour

With Figures 171 to 174 we begin to see the close relation between the stone and its enclosing form. Rule 5f. A longer major axis in the stone calls for an increased length in the corresponding axis of the silver foundation or background. It is really a re-echo of the proportions of the primary mass of the stone in the mass of the silver. It is well for the beginner to make the axis of the stone and the silver blank coincide and to use this long axis as a basis for future enrichment. In a vertical primary mass, similar to the one shown in Figure 180, it is better design to place the stone a short distance above the geometric center of the mass as it insures a sense of stability and balance. A stone when placed toward the bottom of a design of this nature is inclined to give a feeling of "settling down" or lost balance.

With Figures 171 to 174, we start to notice the close connection between the stone and its surrounding shape. Rule 5f. A longer major axis in the stone requires a longer corresponding axis in the silver foundation or background. This really reflects the proportions of the stone's primary mass in the mass of the silver. It's good for beginners to align the axis of the stone with the silver blank and use this long axis as a foundation for future enhancements. In a vertical primary mass, similar to the one shown in Figure 180, it's better to position the stone slightly above the geometric center of the mass, as this creates a sense of stability and balance. When a stone is placed too low in a design like this, it tends to create a feeling of "settling down" or imbalance.

Figure 176 varies the design shown in Figure 171. The two circles related to the stone are connected by four silver grains or balls. Figure 177 shows an attempt to enrich the contour of the silver, but there is a resulting tendency to detract from the simplicity of the unbroken outline and, as a result, little is gained by its attempted enrichment. Figures 178 and 179 show a better form of enrichment by accentuating the outline. This may be accomplished either by engraving a single line paralleling the contour or by soldering a thin wire around the outline.

Figure 176 changes the design shown in Figure 171. The two circles that relate to the stone are connected by four silver beads or balls. Figure 177 attempts to enhance the outline of the silver, but it tends to take away from the simplicity of the continuous outline, resulting in minimal gain from its attempted enhancement. Figures 178 and 179 present a better way to enhance it by emphasizing the outline. This can be done either by engraving a single line that follows the contour or by soldering a thin wire around the edge.

Need of Top and Side Views

While the top view of an article of jewelry may have been carefully designed the side view in most instances is totally neglected. The side view should show a steady graduation from the surface of the silver to the outline of the stone. This prevents the stone from bulging from the surface like a sudden and unusual growth. Doming, small wedges of silver, or a twist around the bezel may accomplish this as can be readily seen in Figures 181, 182, and 183.

While the top view of a piece of jewelry might have been thoughtfully designed, the side view is often completely overlooked. The side view should show a smooth transition from the surface of the silver to the edge of the stone. This prevents the stone from sticking out from the surface like an unexpected growth. Doming, small wedges of silver, or a twist around the bezel can achieve this, as can be easily seen in Figures 181, 182, and 183.

[96] Rules 5d, 5e, 5f, 5g. Contour or Outline Enrichment. Clay. Metal. Instruction Sheet

Plate 31

Plate 31

Motives for Outline Enrichment in Silver

While emphasis should be placed upon simplicity of outline, certain well regulated forms of enrichment may be added to the contour and enhance the beauty of the stone. Such motives with constructive steps are shown in Figure 184 and their application in Figures 185 to 188. It will be noticed that the enrichment invariably leads up to the stone which is the center of interest in the design. The ornament is likewise based upon the prominent axes of the stone.

While it's important to focus on a simple outline, certain carefully planned enhancements can be added to the shape to make the stone more beautiful. These designs with structured elements are illustrated in Figure 184 and their application in Figures 185 to 188. You'll notice that the embellishment always directs attention to the stone, which is the focal point of the design. The decoration is also centered around the main axes of the stone.

Free Outline Enrichment in Silver

Figures 189, 190, and 191 are types of beaten and raised silver work and show characteristic forms in silver, with two examples of accented outline enrichment. As they are curvilinear forms, their design is similar in many ways to clay forms of similar proportions and uses.

Figures 189, 190, and 191 are types of textured and shaped silverwork that display distinct silver forms, featuring two examples of highlighted outline embellishments. Since they are curved shapes, their design resembles in many ways the clay forms of similar sizes and purposes.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plate 31 shows the design steps necessary to the evolution of a lamp in two materials. A full size working drawing should follow Figure D.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ outlines the design steps required to create a lamp using two different materials. A full-size working drawing should follow Figure D.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Draw the unenriched primary mass.

(a) Sketch the basic primary shape.

(b) For dependent contours, locate the elements of service within the primary mass. This may be interpreted to mean rivets, screw holes, semi-precious stones, etc.

(b) Identify the service elements within the main structure for dependent contours. This can include items like rivets, screw holes, semi-precious stones, etc.

(c) Determine upon the portion of the contours to be enriched, gauged by its need for grace, lightness, and variety. This enrichment is preferably concentrated at the following points: edges, corners, appendages, intermediate points, terminals, links, and details. These points may be combined provided the result does not violate the simplicity of the structural lines.

(c) Decide which parts of the contours need improvement, based on their requirements for elegance, lightness, and variety. Focus this enhancement on edges, corners, attachments, midpoints, endpoints, connections, and details. These areas can be combined as long as the overall simplicity of the structural lines is maintained.

(d) Draw the enrichment in the predetermined area, causing it to be in harmony with such interior functional parts as screw holes, rivets, semi-precious stones, etc. Utilize suggested curves.

(d) Create enhancements in the specified area to align with the internal functional parts like screw holes, rivets, semi-precious stones, etc. Use the suggested curves.

(e) Review all of the contour curves added to the design. Are they feeble compass curves or do they have the character of long sweeping curves with short "snappy" turns for variety?

(e) Evaluate all the contour curves added to the design. Are they weak compass curves, or do they feature stylish long sweeping curves with shorter "snappy" turns for variety?

(f) Test the entire design for unity. Does the eye move smoothly through all parts of the contour? Does the design "hold together"? Are all links and appendages joined to the primary mass in a graceful tangential manner?

(f) Assess the entire design for cohesiveness. Does the eye move smoothly through all parts of the outline? Does the design feel unified? Are all connections and extensions attached to the main form in a graceful, flowing way?

(g) Dimension, add additional views, and details, if necessary, and otherwise prepare the drawing for shop use.

(g) Add dimensions, include extra views and details if necessary, and prepare the drawing for use in the workshop.

SUGGESTED PROBLEMS

Design an electric table lamp with square copper rod as a support, feet, and copper shade.

Design an electric table lamp using a square copper rod for the support, base, and shade.

Design a hinge for a cedar chest.

Design a hinge for a cedar chest.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 5f. Dependent outline enrichment should be related to essential parts of a design and influenced by their forms and functions; it must be consistent with the idea of the subject.

Rule 5f. Dependent outline enhancements should connect to the key parts of a design and be shaped by their forms and functions; they must align with the overall concept of the subject.

Rule 5g. A curve should join a straight line with either a tangential or right angle junction.

Rule 5g. A curve should meet a straight line at either a tangent point or a right angle.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Contrast contour enrichment of wood, clay, and metal.

1. Compare the contour details of wood, clay, and metal.

2. Define free and dependent outline in contour enrichment of base metal.

2. Define free and dependent outlines in the contour enhancement of base metal.

3. Describe and explain the use of the Ionic volute in contour enrichment of metal.

3. Describe how the Ionic volute is used to improve the contours of metal.

4. Define and present illustrations of contour enrichment designed for edges, corners, appendages, intermediate points, terminals, links, and other details in base metal.

4. Define and provide examples of contour enhancement for edges, corners, appendages, intermediate points, terminals, links, and other details in base metal.

5. Define and illustrate free and dependent contour enrichment of precious metal.

5. Define and provide examples of free and dependent contour enhancement of precious metal.

Figure 190a.—Union of Outline Enrichment on Clay and Metal

Image 190a.—Combination of Outline Enhancement on Clay and Metal


Chapter 9
SURFACE ENRICHMENT OF SMALL PRIMARY MASSES IN WOOD

With this chapter we enter upon a consideration of the third and last major division of Industrial Arts Design, that of Surface Enrichment.

With this chapter, we begin exploring the third and final major area of Industrial Arts Design, which is Surface Enrichment.

Nature and Need of Surface Enrichment

We have considered in previous chapters the subject of contour or outline enrichment. Now consider for a moment the fact that articles such as a square box, or tile, are not suited to outline enrichment, yet they have large, flat, and rather monotonous surfaces capable of decoration. It is readily seen that such surfaces will admit of further elaboration which we will distinguish from contour enrichment by using the term Surface Enrichment. As in contour enrichment, so in surface enrichment, the added element of design not only increases the beauty of the object but it likewise, if properly applied, gives apparent added strength to the structure.

We have discussed the topic of contour or outline enrichment in earlier chapters. Now, let's take a moment to think about how items like a square box or tile aren't suited for outline enrichment, but they do have large, flat surfaces that can be decorated. It's clear that these surfaces can be further enhanced, which we’ll refer to as Surface Enrichment, distinguishing it from contour enrichment. Just like with contour enrichment, the added design elements in surface enrichment not only enhance the object's beauty but also, if done correctly, give an appearance of increased strength to the structure.

Rule 6a. Surfaces to be enriched must admit of enrichment.

Rule 6a. Surfaces that need to be enriched must allow for enrichment.

When and Where to Enrich a Surface

Strictly utilitarian articles should not be ornamented by surface enrichment. As an example, a wooden mixing spoon, bowl, or wooden knife handle should not be enriched by carving, as the carving would interfere with the proper cleansing of the article. A surface exposed to considerable wear should not be enriched. Objects not strictly in the utilitarian class, such as a paper knife, book stall, envelope holder, or library table may be appropriately enriched in an unostentatious manner so that they will harmonize with their surroundings. But the enrichment should first be placed upon the surface in such a manner that it will not interfere with the functional use of the article for service. Large projections upon the back of a chair or upon the handle of a paper cutter are unpleasant and interfere with intended uses.

Strictly utilitarian items shouldn't have decorative enhancements. For example, a wooden mixing spoon, bowl, or knife handle shouldn’t have carvings since those would make it harder to clean them properly. Surfaces that get a lot of wear shouldn't be decorated. Items that aren’t purely functional, like a paper knife, book stand, envelope holder, or library table, can be subtly decorated to match their environment. However, the decorations should be designed in a way that doesn’t hinder the item's practical use. Large protrusions on the back of a chair or the handle of a paper cutter are not only unattractive but also obstruct their intended function.

[100]

Figure 191a.—Structure Obscured by Surface and Contour Enrichment

Image 191a.—Structure Hidden by Surface and Shape Enhancements

[101] Rule 6b. Surface enrichment must be related to the structural contours but must not obscure the actual structure.

[101] Rule 6b. Surface enrichment should align with the structural outlines but should not hide the actual structure.

Careful consideration should be given to the often-mentioned law that the surface enrichment must be thoroughly related to structure and contour but not so as to obscure either. We must keep in mind the fact that it is necessary to support the structure, not to cover it up by related ornament, as in Figure 191a.

Careful consideration should be given to the commonly discussed rule that the surface enhancement needs to be closely tied to the structure and shape without hiding either. We should remember that it's important to support the structure rather than distract from it with decorative elements, as in Figure 191a.

Conservative Use of Ornament

Most critics of industrial design complain of an overwhelming desire upon the part of the designer to over-decorate the structure. Surface enrichment runs wild over steam radiators, stoves, and wooden rocking chairs. Reserve is the watchword recommended as of extreme importance. The illustrations in this chapter are restricted to a limited range of design motives for the express purpose of simplifying the number of recommended methods.

Most critics of industrial design argue that designers have an excessive urge to over-decorate their creations. Decorative elements are often excessive on steam radiators, stoves, and wooden rocking chairs. Simplicity is emphasized as crucial. The illustrations in this chapter focus on a narrow selection of design ideas to simplify the recommended approaches.

Rule 6c. The treatment must be appropriate to the material.

Rule 6c. The treatment must be suitable for the material.

Relation of Enrichment to Material

The close-fibered woods with smooth, even textures are capable of more delicate enrichment than woods of coarser grain. Small articles are generally seen from a close range and should, therefore, be ornamented with finer decoration than large articles, such as a piece of furniture that is to be seen from a distance. The latter should have surface enrichment of sufficient boldness to "carry" or to be distinct from a distant point. Furthermore the enrichment should not have a "stuck on" appearance, but be an integral part of the original mass.

The tightly grained woods with smooth, even textures can support more intricate detailing than woods with a rougher grain. Small items are typically viewed up close, so they should be decorated with finer embellishments compared to larger items, like furniture that is seen from afar. The latter should have surface decorations that are bold enough to stand out from a distance. Additionally, the decorations should not look like they were just added on, but should be a natural part of the original piece.

Appropriate Methods of Surface Enrichment for Wood

There are three distinct means of ornamenting wood: (1) inlaying, depending for interest upon the difference in value and hue of the different inlaying woods used; (2) carved enrichment, depending upon line and mass for its beauty and made visible by contrasts of light and shade; (3) painting or staining of the surface with the interest dependent upon the colors or stains and their relation to each other and to the hue of the wood. It has been deemed wise to consider the first two types in the present chapter, and leave the last type for later consideration. In Chapters XV, XVI, and XVII, accentuation has been placed on wood coloring. The designer is advised to read those chapters before attempting to stain or color his problem.

There are three main ways to decorate wood: (1) inlaying, which relies on the differences in value and color of the various inlay woods used; (2) carved enhancement, which finds its beauty in line and form, highlighted by contrasts of light and shadow; (3) painting or staining the surface, where interest comes from the colors or stains and how they relate to each other and to the wood's natural color. It’s best to discuss the first two types in this chapter and save the last type for later. In Chapters XV, XVI, and XVII, the focus has been on wood coloring. Designers are encouraged to read those chapters before trying to stain or color their projects.

[102] Straight Line Surface Enrichment of a Small Primary Mass in Wood

Plate 32

Plate 32

Inlaying

Treating surface enrichment in its listed order we find that inlaying is one of the most common and best forms of enrichment for wood [103] work. As inlaying readily adapts itself to bands and borders, emphasis is placed upon them.

Treating surface enrichment in its listed order, we find that inlay is one of the most common and effective forms of enrichment for wood work. As inlay easily adapts to bands and borders, emphasis is placed on them. [103]

Rule 6i. Inlayed enrichment should never form strong or glaring contrasts with the parent surface.

Rule 6i. Inlaid enrichment should never create strong or harsh contrasts with the main surface.

Errors in Wood Inlay

Two conspicuous errors are often associated with inlaid designs. The first is the use of woods affording a glaring contrast with that of the project. Figure 209, Page 106. The right contrast of value is established when the inlay seems neither to rise from the surface nor sink through it. It should remain on the surface of the plane to be enriched, for it is surface enrichment. Figures 210, 211, and 212 are illustrative of pleasing contrasts.

Two noticeable mistakes are often linked to inlaid designs. The first is using woods that clash significantly with the project's overall look. The right contrast is achieved when the inlay neither stands out awkwardly nor appears to disappear into the surface. It should stay on the surface of the plane to enhance it, as it is meant for surface enrichment. Figures 210, 211, and 212 show examples of pleasing contrasts.

The second specific glaring error is the use of unrelated inlay. As an example, an Indian club is created by gluing many varicolored woods around a central core. The result of the pattern so formed has little relation to the structural lines, fails entirely to support them; and, as a result, should be discarded.

The second specific glaring mistake is the use of unrelated inlay. For example, an Indian club is made by gluing together various colored woods around a central core. The resulting pattern has little to do with the structural lines, does not support them at all, and should therefore be thrown away.

Carving

Carving is difficult for the average beginner in wood working design, therefore merely the simplest forms of the craft are suggested as advisable. Figure 205a. If an elaborate design is desired (Figure 205c), it should be first drawn in outline and finally modeled in relief by Plastelene. This model is then an effective guide for the carver, supplementing the original outline drawing.

Carving is challenging for most beginners in woodworking, so only the simplest forms of the craft are recommended. Figure 205a. If a complex design is wanted (Figure 205c), it should be sketched out first and then shaped in relief using Plastelene. This model serves as a useful guide for the carver, along with the original outline drawing.

Divisions of Carving

Carving may be roughly divided into the following groups: (1) high relief carving similar to heads, human figures, and capitals; (2) low relief carving in which the planes have been flattened to a comparatively short distance above the original block of wood, such as panels, which are good examples of this group; (3) pierced carving where the background has been entirely cut away in places, such as screens, which illustrate this type; (4) incised carving in which the design has been depressed below the surface of the wood. Geometric chip carving is a representative type of this group. There are possible variations and combinations of these groups.

Carving can be roughly divided into the following categories: (1) high relief carving, which includes heads, human figures, and capitals; (2) low relief carving, where the surfaces are flattened to a relatively short distance above the original block of wood, with panels being good examples of this category; (3) pierced carving, where the background has been completely cut away in certain areas, like screens that illustrate this type; (4) incised carving, where the design is pressed below the surface of the wood. Geometric chip carving is a key example of this group. There are also possible variations and combinations of these categories.

Rule 6j. Carved surface enrichment should have the appearance of belonging to the parent mass.

Rule 6j. The carved surface enhancement should look like it naturally belongs to the original material.

[104] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Wood With Borders of Curved and Straight Lines

Plate 33

Plate 33

The central governing thought in all carved designs is to show an interesting proportion of light and shade coupled with a unity between the raised portion of the design and the background. If the carving [105] has a glued on appearance it becomes mechanical and resembles a stamped or machine-produced ornament.

The main idea behind all carved designs is to create an engaging balance of light and shadow while maintaining a connection between the raised part of the design and the background. If the carving [105] looks like it was just stuck on, it feels mechanical and ends up resembling a stamped or machine-made decoration.

Steps Taken in Carving

A typical carved enrichment is carried through four steps: (1) the design is transferred to the wood surface by means of carbon paper; (2) the design is "set in" or separated from the ground by means of a grooved chisel; (3) the wood is cut away from the back of the design by a process of grounding; (4) the leaves and flowers or other elements of the design are modeled. The designer should keep these processes in mind when developing his design.

A typical carved enhancement involves four steps: (1) transferring the design to the wood surface using carbon paper; (2) outlining the design or separating it from the background with a grooved chisel; (3) removing the wood from the back of the design through a process called grounding; (4) shaping the leaves, flowers, or other elements of the design. The designer should consider these processes while creating their design.

The Designer's Vocabulary

It is now essential to find the extent of the vocabulary possible for the designer of surface enrichment. He has three large sources of information: first, geometric forms and abstract spots; second, natural organic objects such as flowers, leaves, animals, etc.; third, artificial objects, pots, jars, ink bottles, and other similar objects.

It is now crucial to determine the range of vocabulary available for the designer of surface enrichment. He has three main sources of information: first, geometric shapes and abstract patterns; second, natural organic objects like flowers, leaves, animals, etc.; third, man-made items such as pots, jars, ink bottles, and other similar objects.

He may assemble or group these objects or elements for future designs into four typical systems: first, bands or borders; second, panels; third, free ornament; and fourth, the diaper or all-over patterns.

He can put together or organize these objects or elements for future designs into four typical systems: first, bands or borders; second, panels; third, free ornament; and fourth, the diaper or all-over patterns.

Designing Bands on Borders

Rule 6d. Bands and borders should have a consistent lateral, that is, onward movement.

Rule 6d. Bands and borders should have a consistent lateral, meaning, forward movement.

Rule 6e. Bands and borders should never have a prominent contrary motion, opposed to the main forward movement.

Rule 6e. Bands and borders should never have a noticeable opposite motion that conflicts with the main forward movement.

Bands

Bands are particularly suitable for inlaying. They are composed of straight lines arranged in some orderly and structurally related manner. They are used for bordering, framing, enclosing, or connecting. They give a decided onward motion which tends to increase the apparent length of the surface to which they are applied. Referring to Plate 32, Figure 192, we find three typical bands, A, B, and C. It is often the custom to limit the width of the inlayed bands to the width of the circular saw cut. To secure unity, the center band in C is wider than the outside sections.

Bands work really well for inlaying. They consist of straight lines arranged in an orderly and structurally related way. They're used for borders, frames, enclosures, or connections. They create a strong sense of forward motion that can make the surface they’re applied to look longer. Looking at Plate 32, Figure 192, we can see three typical bands, A, B, and C. It's common to keep the width of the inlaid bands to the width of the circular saw cut. To create a sense of unity, the center band in C is wider than the outer sections.

[106] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 34

Plate 34

Accenting

A possible variation of motive in band designing may be secured by accenting. The single band has been broken up at D into geometric sections of pleasing length. But while this design gives variety, it also destroys the unity of a single straight line. Unity [107] may, however, be restored by the addition of the top and bottom bands at E. This method of restoring unity is of extreme value in all border arrangements and is constantly used by the designer.

A possible way to change the motive in band design is through accenting. The single band has been divided at D into geometric sections of appealing length. While this design creates variety, it also breaks the unity of a single straight line. Unity [107] can, however, be restored by adding the top and bottom bands at E. This technique for restoring unity is very important in all border arrangements and is frequently used by designers.

Rule 6f. All component parts of a border should move in unison with the main movement of the border.

Rule 6f. All parts of a border should move together with the main movement of the border.

Borders

Bands, as has just been stated, give distinctly "onward" movement. Borders are merely bands combined with other motives from the designer's vocabulary. As will be seen, bands, by their onward movement, tend to hold the other elements of the border together. Figure 193 is a border design without variety, unity, or interest. Figure 194 has added unity to a similar border by the addition of the double bands, but monotony is still present. Figure 195 suggests a method of relieving the monotony by accentuating every other repeat, thus supplying variety and creating an analogy to march-time music. Figure 196 has accentuated the monotonous border in Figure 194 by omitting every other square. This makes a simple and effective inlay pattern and suggests a large number of possible variations that could be applied to accented band motives.

Bands, as mentioned earlier, provide a clear sense of "forward" movement. Borders are simply bands combined with other elements from the designer's toolkit. As will be demonstrated, bands, through their forward motion, help to unify the other components of the border. Figure 193 is a border design that lacks variety, cohesion, or interest. Figure 194 has introduced unity to a similar border by incorporating double bands, but there is still a sense of monotony. Figure 195 proposes a way to break the monotony by emphasizing every other repeat, adding variety and mirroring the rhythm of march-time music. Figure 196 has enhanced the dull border in Figure 194 by removing every other square. This creates a simple and effective inlay pattern and suggests numerous potential variations that could be applied to accented band motifs.

Moorish Ornament

Figures 197 and 198 are border motives of geometric derivation taken from the historic schools of ornament. Figure 198 illustrates the "strap ornament" of the Moorish school. The simple underlying geometric net upon which these designs are based may be found in Meyer's Handbook of Ornament.

Figures 197 and 198 are border designs derived from geometric shapes inspired by traditional ornamentation. Figure 198 showcases the "strap ornament" from the Moorish tradition. The basic geometric framework that these designs are built on can be found in Meyer's Handbook of Ornament.

Inceptive Axes

Rule 6h. Borders intended for vertical surfaces may have a strongly upward movement in addition to the lateral movement, provided the lateral movement dominates.

Rule 6h. Borders designed for vertical surfaces can have a significant upward movement alongside the lateral movement, as long as the lateral movement is the main focus.

Upward and Onward Borders

In addition to the purely onward borders we now come to a variety with a distinctly upward movement as well. While this new feature adds materially to the interest of the border, it also adds to the difficulty of designing. The upward movement is often centered about an axis termed the Axis of Symmetry or Inceptive Axis, about which are grouped and balanced the different elements from the designer's vocabulary. When both sides are alike, the unit so formed is called a bilateral unit. Figure 199 shows the formation of a bilateral unit by means of grouping, accenting, and balancing straight lines [108] over an inceptive axis. By adding bands above and below and doubling these vertical lines to gain width, we form at A and B, Figure 199, inlaid designs with an upward and onward tendency or movement.

In addition to the purely horizontal borders, we now have a variety with a clearly upward movement as well. While this new feature significantly enhances the interest of the border, it also makes designing more challenging. The upward movement is often centered around an axis known as the Axis of Symmetry or Inceptive Axis, around which different elements from the designer's toolkit are grouped and balanced. When both sides are identical, the resulting unit is called a bilateral unit. Figure 199 demonstrates the creation of a bilateral unit through the grouping, accenting, and balancing of straight lines [108] over an inceptive axis. By adding bands above and below and doubling these vertical lines for more width, we create at A and B, Figure 199, inlaid designs with an upward and onward tendency or movement.

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 215.—Inlaid Band Border

Figure 215.—Inlaid Band Border

The introduction of curved lines and natural units allows us to add more grace to these combined movements. The leading lines of a small border, designed to be seen at close range, are planned in Figure 200. The central line or inceptive axis is repeated at regular intervals and the leading or skeleton lines are balanced to the right and left of this axis. These leading lines, as can be readily seen, have an upward and onward movement. To insure continuity, a small link and the top and bottom bands have been added to complete the onward movement.

The introduction of curved lines and natural shapes lets us enhance the elegance of these combined movements. The main lines of a small border, meant to be viewed up close, are created in Figure 200. The central line or starting axis is repeated at regular intervals, and the main or guiding lines are balanced on either side of this axis. These guiding lines, as you can easily see, have an upward and forward motion. To ensure continuity, a small link and the top and bottom bands have been added to complete the forward movement.

[109]

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 216.—Single and Double Band Inlaid Border

Figure 216.—Single and Double Band Inlaid Border

[110] Material for straight borders may be derived from geometry, nature, or artificial forms, but for borders designed in curves, nature is generally selected as a source.

[110] You can create straight borders from geometric shapes, natural elements, or man-made designs, but for curved borders, nature is usually the go-to inspiration.

Courtesy of C.E. Partch

Thanks to C.E. Partch

Figure 216a.—Work of High School Students

Figure 216a.—High School Student Work

Figure 201 illustrates a crude and uninteresting form, unsuited to outline enrichment. Figure 202 has brought Figure 201 into some semblance of order, but as can be readily seen by the primary outline which encloses it, the widest point occurs exactly midway from top to bottom, which makes the form monotonous. This defect has been remedied in Figure 203 and an interesting and varied area appears for the first time. What Dr. Haney calls "the feebly flapping curve" of Figure 202 has been replaced by the vigorous and "snappy" curve of Figure 203, which gives what is termed a dynamic or rhythmic value in surface enrichment.

Figure 201 shows a basic and dull shape that doesn’t enhance the outline. Figure 202 has organized Figure 201 to some extent, but as you can clearly see from the main outline surrounding it, the widest point is exactly in the middle, making the shape tedious. This issue has been fixed in Figure 203, and for the first time, an interesting and varied area appears. What Dr. Haney refers to as "the weakly flapping curve" of Figure 202 has been replaced by the energetic and "snappy" curve of Figure 203, which adds what’s known as dynamic or rhythmic quality to surface enrichment.

[111]

Courtesy of C.E. Partch

Thanks to C.E. Partch

Figure 216b.—Work of High School Students

Figure 216b.—High School Student Work

Rule 6g. Each component part of a border should be strongly dynamic and, if possible, partake of the main movements of the border.

Rule 6g. Every part of a border should have strong movement and, if possible, reflect the main dynamics of the border.

Any form which causes the eye to move in a given direction is strongly dynamic, and is opposed to the static form which does not cause a marked eye movement. A circle is symbolic of the static form, while a triangle is dynamic. In the designer's nomenclature, the term "rhythmic" may be used synonymously with "dynamic."

Any shape that makes the eye move in a particular direction is considered dynamic, in contrast to the static shape, which does not create noticeable eye movement. A circle represents the static shape, while a triangle represents the dynamic one. In design terminology, "rhythmic" can be used interchangeably with "dynamic."

Dynamic areas or forms should carry out the upward and onward movement of the leading lines. Figure 204 shows how closely dynamic areas are connected with nature's units for design motives. A slight change in the contour may transform a leaf into excellent material with which to clothe the leading lines. The curve of force, the cyma, and other curves described in previous chapters should be recognized by the designer and utilized in the contours of dynamic forms.

Dynamic areas or shapes should promote the upward and forward movement of the leading lines. Figure 204 illustrates the strong connection between dynamic areas and nature's elements for design inspiration. A small alteration in the shape can turn a leaf into a great resource for enhancing the leading lines. The curve of force, the cyma, and other curves discussed in earlier chapters should be acknowledged by the designer and incorporated into the shapes of dynamic forms.

[112]

Courtesy of C.E. Partch

Thanks to C.E. Partch

Figure 216c.—Instruction Sheet Problem

Figure 216c.—Instruction Sheet Issue

The leading lines of the border in Figure 200 are shown clothed or enriched in Figure 205. Vigorous dynamic spots, conventionalized from natural units, continue the upward and onward movement of the original leading lines. As will be noted, the background has been treated to allow the spots to appear in relief. Small "fussy" spots or areas have been omitted and the units, varied in size and strongly dynamic in form, balance over an inceptive axis. The small link reaches out its helping hand to complete the onward movement without loss of unity, while the bands above and below bind the design together and assist in the lateral movement. Figure 205 shows three methods of treatment: simple spots without modeling, from A to B; slight indications of modeling, from B to C; full modeling of the entire unit at C. The choice of treatment depends, of course, upon the skill of the craftsman.

The main lines of the border in Figure 200 are displayed dressed or enhanced in Figure 205. Energetic dynamic spots, simplified from natural forms, continue the upward and forward movement of the original main lines. As you'll see, the background has been designed to let the spots stand out. Tiny "fussy" spots or areas have been left out, and the units, varying in size and strongly dynamic in shape, balance over a starting axis. The small link extends a helping hand to maintain the forward movement without losing unity, while the bands above and below tie the design together and support the lateral movement. Figure 205 demonstrates three treatment methods: simple spots without modeling, from A to B; slight indications of modeling, from B to C; full modeling of the entire unit at C. The choice of treatment depends, of course, on the craftsman's skill.

[113]

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 217.—Carved and Accented Border and Triple Carved Band

Figure 217.—Carved and Enhanced Border and Triple Carved Band

Figure 206 shows a design varied from formal balance over a central axis of symmetry or an inceptive axis. It has a decided onward movement with the leaves balanced above and below the stem which is the axis. The "repeat" has been reversed at B and is more pleasing than the portion at A. The area of the background, in its relation to that used for ornamentation or "filling," cannot be predetermined with exactness. There should be no blank spaces for the eye to bridge. Some designers allow about one-third ground for two-thirds filling or enrichment. This proportion gives a full and rich effect and may be adopted in most instances as satisfactory.

Figure 206 shows a design that varies from a formal balance along a central axis of symmetry or a starting axis. It has a clear forward movement, with the leaves balanced above and below the stem, which serves as the axis. The "repeat" has been reversed at B and looks more appealing than the section at A. The background area, in relation to the decorative elements or "filling," cannot be exactly predetermined. There shouldn’t be any blank spaces for the eye to fill in. Some designers suggest using about one-third ground to two-thirds filling or embellishment. This ratio creates a full and rich effect and can generally be considered acceptable in most cases.

[114]

Courtesy of C.E. Partch

Thanks to C.E. Partch

Plate 35.—Instruction Sheet

Plate 35.—Guide Sheet

Point of Concentration—Effect upon Structure

When a border is used to parallel a rectangle it is customary to strengthen the border at the corners for two reasons: first, to strengthen, apparently, the structure at these points; second, to assist the eye in making the sudden turn at the corner. The corner enforcement affords momentary resting points for the eye, and adds pleasing variety to the long line of border. The strengthened point is called the point of concentration or point of force. Its presence and effect may be noted by the symbol P.C. in Figures 207, 208, 213, and 214.

When a border runs alongside a rectangle, it’s standard to reinforce the corners for two reasons: first, to apparently strengthen the structure at those points; and second, to help the eye navigate the sharp turn at the corner. The corner reinforcement provides brief resting spots for the eye and adds a nice variation to the long border. The reinforced point is referred to as the point of concentration or point of force. You can see its presence and effect noted by the symbol P.C. in Figures 207, 208, 213, and 214.

Chip Carving

Figure 213 represents the rather angular and monotonous chip carving motive. It is, however, a simple form of carved enrichment for wood construction. Figure 214 shows the more rhythmic flow of a carved and modeled enrichment. Two methods of leaf treatment are given at A and B.

Figure 213 represents the somewhat sharp and repetitive chip carving design. However, it serves as a straightforward way to enhance wooden structures through carving. Figure 214 illustrates a more rhythmic design with carved and shaped embellishments. Two styles of leaf treatment are shown at A and B.

Figures 215, 216, and 217 are industrial and public school examples of the forms of surface enrichment treated in this chapter.

Figures 215, 216, and 217 are examples from industry and public schools of the types of surface enrichment discussed in this chapter.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plate 35 shows the necessary working drawings for wood inlay and is supplied as a typical high school problem by Mr. C.E. Partch of Des Moines, Iowa. See Figure 216c.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ provides the necessary working drawings for wood inlay and is offered as a typical high school assignment by Mr. C.E. Partch from Des Moines, Iowa. See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Draw the primary rectangle, appendage, etc.

(a) Draw the main rectangle, attachment, etc.

(b) Subdivide the rectangle into its horizontal and vertical subdivisions.

(b) Break the rectangle down into its horizontal and vertical sections.

(c) Design very simple contour enrichment.

(c) Create very basic contour enhancements.

(d) Determine the location of zone of enrichment, and the amount and method of enriching the surface.

(d) Identify where the enhancement zone is located, along with the amount and method for enriching the surface.

(e) Make several preliminary sketches to determine the best design and add the one finally selected to the structure. Correlate with contour enrichment.

(e) Make several rough sketches to determine the best design and incorporate the chosen one into the structure. Align with contour enhancements.

(f) Add additional views, dimension, and otherwise prepare the drawing for shop use.

(f) Add more views and dimensions, and prepare the drawing for shop use.

SUGGESTED PROBLEM

Design a walnut side table 3 feet high and enrich with a double band inlay of ebony.

Design a walnut side table that is 3 feet tall and enhance it with a double band inlay of ebony.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 6a. Surfaces to be enriched must admit of enrichment.

Rule 6a. Surfaces requiring enhancement must support enhancement.

Rule 6b. Surface enrichment must be related to the structural contours but must not obscure the actual structure.

Rule 6b. Surface enhancement should reflect the structural shapes but must not obscure the actual structure.

Rule 6c. The treatment must be appropriate to the material.

Rule 6c. The treatment must be appropriate for the material.

Rule 6d. Bands and borders should have a consistent lateral, that is, onward movement.

Rule 6d. Bands and borders should consistently move sideways, indicating forward motion.

Rule 6e. Bands and borders should never have a prominent contrary motion, opposed to the main forward movement.

Rule 6e. Bands and borders should never display a noticeable opposite motion that conflicts with the main forward movement.

Rule 6f. All component parts of a border should move in unison with the main movement of the border.

Rule 6f. All parts of a border should move in harmony with the main movement of the border.

Rule 6g. Each component part of a border should be strongly dynamic and, if possible, partake of the main movement of the border.

Rule 6g. Each part of a border should be highly dynamic and, where possible, partake in the main movement of the border.

Rule 6h. Borders intended for vertical surfaces may have a strongly upward movement in addition to the lateral movement, provided the lateral movement dominates.

Rule 6h. Borders for vertical surfaces can have a strong upward movement along with the sideways movement, as long as the sideways movement remains predominant.

Rule 6i. Inlayed enrichment should never form strong or glaring contrasts with the parent surface.

Rule 6i. Inlaid enhancements should never create strong or jarring contrasts with the main surface.

Rule 6j. Carved surface enrichment should have the appearance of belonging to the parent mass.

Rule 6j. The carved surface enrichment should appear to belong to the main material.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Give the reasons why surface enrichment may be used as decoration.

1. Explain why surface enhancement can be used for decoration.

2. State an original example illustrating when and where to use surface enrichment.

2. Provide an original example that illustrates when and where to use surface enhancement.

3. Name an object from the industrial arts in which the structure has been weakened or obscured by the application of surface enrichment. Name an example of the correct use of surface enrichment and state wherein it has been correctly applied.

3. Name an object from industrial arts where the structure has been weakened or obscured by surface enhancement. Give an example of proper surface enhancement and explain how it has been effectively applied.

4. How should surface enrichment of small masses differ from that applied to larger masses; in what manner does the fiber of the wood affect the design?

4. How should the surface treatment of small masses differ from that applied to larger masses? How does the wood's grain influence the design?

5. Name three means of enriching the surface of wood. Briefly describe the processes of inlaying and carving, with the design restrictions governing each.

5. Name three methods to enhance the surface of wood. Provide a brief description of the processes of inlaying and carving, as well as the design limitations for each.

6. Give three sources of ornament open to the designer of surface enrichment.

6. List three sources of decoration available to a designer of surface embellishment.

7. Draw an accented triple band motive for inlay.

7. Create a design featuring an accented triple band for inlay.

8. What is the inceptive axis; a bilateral unit? What are leading lines; dynamic forms; points of concentration?

8. What is the starting axis; a two-sided unit? What are guiding lines, moving shapes, and points of focus?

9. Design an upward and onward continuous carved border for wood and base it upon a vertical inceptive axis. Treat as in A, Figure 205.

9. Create a continuous carved border that moves upward and onward for wood, using a vertical starting point as the base. Handle it as in A, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

10. Illustrate the manner in which structure may be apparently strengthened by a band or border.

10. Show how a band or border can make the structure appear stronger.


Chapter X
SURFACE ENRICHMENT OF SMALL PRIMARY MASSES IN WOOD—Continued

Enclosed and Free Ornament

Enclosed Ornament (Panels)

Chapter IX dealt with methods of developing continuous or repeating ornament (bands or borders). This leaves enclosed and free forms of surface enrichment to be considered in this chapter.

Chapter IX focused on ways to create continuous or repeating patterns (like bands or borders). This means that enclosed and free forms of surface decoration will be discussed in this chapter.

As an enclosed form, a panel may be enriched by geometric, natural, or artificial ornament. It is enclosed in a definite boundary of bands or lines and may be a square or other polygon, circle, ellipse, lunette, spandrel, lozenge, or triangle. As the decoration does not have the continuous repeating movement of the border and as it covers an enclosed area, it is necessarily treated in a different manner from either band or border. Its object is to decorate a plane surface. The enrichment may be made by means of carving, inlaying, or painting.

As a contained form, a panel can be enhanced with geometric, natural, or artificial designs. It is surrounded by a clear boundary of bands or lines and can take the shape of a square, polygon, circle, ellipse, lunette, spandrel, lozenge, or triangle. Since the decoration doesn’t have the ongoing repetitive movement of the border and covers a defined area, it is handled differently than a band or border. Its purpose is to beautify a flat surface. The enhancement can be done through carving, inlaying, or painting.

Free Ornament

Free ornament means the use of motives not severely enclosed by bands or panels. Free ornament is generally applied to centers or upper portions of surfaces to relieve a monotonous area not suited to either panel or border treatment. It may have an upward or a radial movement dependent upon the character of the member to be enriched.

Free ornament refers to the use of designs not tightly framed by bands or panels. It is typically applied to the centers or upper parts of surfaces to break up a dull area that doesn't fit with either panel or border styles. It can have an upward or radial direction, depending on the nature of the element being enhanced.

Summary

We then have three forms of possible surface enrichment: repeating or continuous motives, enclosed motives, and free motives. Our next point is to consider where the last two may be used appropriately in surface enrichment.

We have three ways to achieve surface enrichment: repeating or continuous patterns, enclosed patterns, and free patterns. Next, we need to think about where the last two can be used effectively in surface enrichment.

Zone of Enrichment

The panel of a small primary mass of wood may be enriched at any one of three places: first, at the margins; second, at the center; third, over the entire surface. The exact position is a matter to be determined by the structural design and the utilitarian requirements of the problem. For example, a bread board or taboret top would [118] require the enrichment in the margin with the center left free. A table leg might require an enrichment in the center of the upper portion of the leg, while a square panel to be inserted in a door, Figure 233, Page 124, might require full surface treatment.

The panel of a small primary piece of wood can be enhanced in one of three areas: first, at the edges; second, in the center; third, across the whole surface. The specific location depends on the structural design and practical needs of the situation. For instance, a cutting board or tabletop would need enhancement at the edges with the center left plain. A table leg might need enhancement in the center of its upper part, while a square panel meant for a door, Figure 233, Page 124, might require treatment on the entire surface.

Structural Reinforcement

Each area of panel enrichment should have one or more accented points known as points of concentration. The design should become more prominent at these places and cause the eye to rest for a moment before passing to the next point of prominence. The accented portion of the design at these points should be so related to the structure that it apparently reinforces the structure as a whole. Corners, centers of edges, and geometric centers are salient parts of a structure; we shall therefore be likely to find our points of concentration coinciding with them. Let us then consider the first of these arrangements as applied to enclosed enrichment.

Each area of panel enrichment should have one or more highlighted spots called points of concentration. The design should stand out more in these areas and encourage the viewer's eye to pause for a moment before moving to the next focal point. The highlighted part of the design at these points should relate to the overall structure in a way that seems to enhance it. Corners, centers of edges, and geometric centers are key parts of a structure; thus, we are likely to find our points of concentration aligning with them. Let’s consider the first of these arrangements as they apply to enclosed enrichment.

Marginal Panel Enrichment

Enclosed Enrichment for Partly Enriched Surfaces

Rule 7a. Marginal panel enrichment should parallel or be related to the outlines of the primary mass and to the panel it is to enrich.

Rule 7a. The marginal panel enrichment should align with or be connected to the outlines of the main body and the panel it is meant to enhance.

Rule 7b. Marginal points of concentration in panels should be placed (1) preferably at the corner or (2) in the center of each margin.

Rule 7b. Marginal points of concentration in panels should be placed (1) ideally at the corner or (2) in the center of each margin.

Rule 7c. To insure unity of design in panels, the elements composing the points of concentration and the links connecting them must be related to the panel contour and to each other.

Rule 7c. To ensure a cohesive design in panels, the elements forming the focal points and the links connecting them must be related to the panel shape and to one another.

Marginal Zone Enrichment

The marginal method of enrichment may be used when it is impossible to enrich the entire surface because the center is to be used for utilitarian purposes or because it would be aesthetically unwise to enrich the entire surface. The marginal zone is adapted to enriching box tops, stands, table tops, and similar surfaces designed preferably with the thought of being seen from above. We shall call such surfaces horizontal planes.

The marginal method of enrichment can be used when it's not possible to enhance the entire surface because the center will be used for practical purposes or because enriching the whole area wouldn't look good. The marginal zone is suitable for enhancing box tops, stands, table tops, and similar surfaces that are ideally designed to be viewed from above. We will refer to these surfaces as horizontal planes.

Points of Concentration


Points of Concentration in the Corner of Margin

As the design is to be limited to the margin, the panel outline is bound to parallel the contours, or outlines, of the surface to be enriched. It is well to begin the design by creating a panel parallel to the outlines of the enriched surface. Figure 218. The next step is to place the point of concentration in the marginal zone and within this figure. Common usage dictates the corners as the proper points. [119] It may be the designer's practice to use the single or double bands, Figures 218, 219, 220, with a single accentuation at the corners. The spots composing the point of concentration must have unity with the enclosing contours and with the remainder of the enrichment. Figure 220 is, in this respect, an improvement over Figure 219. But these examples are not true enclosed panel enrichment. They are the borders of Chapter IX acting as marginal enrichment. It is not until we reach Figure 221 that the true enclosed enrichment appears, when the panel motive is clearly evident. In this figure a single incised band parallels the contours of the figure until the corner is reached. Here we find it turning, gracefully widening to give variety, and supporting the structure by its own increased strength. The single band in Figure 221 acts as a bridge, leads the eye from one point of concentration to the next similar point, forms a compact mass with the point of concentration, and parallels the enclosing contours of the enriched surface.

As the design is meant to fit within the margin, the panel outline must follow the shapes of the area being decorated. It's best to start the design by creating a panel that runs parallel to the edges of the decorated surface. Figure 218. The next step is to position the main focus in the marginal area and within this shape. Generally, the corners are seen as the right points. [119] The designer might prefer to use single or double bands, Figures 218, 219, 220, with a single emphasis at the corners. The elements that make up the focal point need to connect with the surrounding shapes and the rest of the decoration. Figure 220 is, in this case, an improvement over Figure 219. However, these examples are not true enclosed panel decoration. They function as borders of Chapter IX serving as marginal decoration. It is only at Figure 221 that the genuine enclosed decoration emerges, when the panel design is clearly visible. In this shape, a single engraved band runs parallel to the outer edges of the figure until it reaches the corner. Here, it curves, widening gracefully to add variety, and it fortifies the structure with its enhanced strength. The single band in Figure 221 serves as a bridge, directing the viewer's eye from one focal point to the next similar point, forming a cohesive unit with the focal point, and aligning with the surrounding shapes of the decorated surface.

Points of Concentration in the Center of Margin

In Figure 222 the point of concentration is to be found in the center of each margin. This bilateral unit is clearly designed on and about the center lines of the square panel. These points of concentration take the place of previous concentrations at the corners which were based upon the square's diagonals. While accenting based upon the center lines is acceptable, this means of concentration does not seem so successfully to relate the accented part to the structural outlines as that of concentration based upon the diagonals. The latter, therefore, is recommended for beginners. The corners of Figure 222 are, however, slightly accented by means of the bridging spots x-x.

In Figure 222, the focus is in the center of each margin. This two-sided unit is clearly designed around the center lines of the square panel. These focus points replace earlier focuses at the corners, which were based on the square's diagonals. While emphasizing the center lines works, this method of focus doesn't seem to connect the highlighted area to the structural outlines as effectively as the focus on the diagonals. Thus, the latter is recommended for beginners. The corners of Figure 222 are, however, slightly emphasized using the bridging spots x-x.

Inceptive Axes or Balancing Lines

The diagonals and center lines of the surface enriched squares of Figures 221 and 222 and similar structural lines are inceptive axes, as they are center lines for new design groups. It may then be said that a strong basic axis or similar line depending upon the structure, may become the center line or inceptive axis upon which to construct a bilateral design. It is only necessary to have this inceptive axis pass through the enrichment zone of the panel. Hereafter in the drawings, inceptive axes will be designated by the abbreviation I.A. while the point of concentration will be indicated by the abbreviation P.C.

The diagonals and center lines of the surface-enriched squares of Figures 221 and 222 and similar structural lines are inceptive axes, as they serve as center lines for new design groups. It can be stated that a strong basic axis or a similar line, based on the structure, can become the center line or inceptive axis for constructing a bilateral design. It’s only necessary for this inceptive axis to pass through the enrichment zone of the panel. From now on in the drawings, inceptive axes will be referred to as I.A., while the point of concentration will be noted as P.C.

[120] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 36

Plate 36

Inceptive Axis

The strongest plea for the inceptive axis is the fact that it interlocks surface enrichment with the structure, insuring a degree of unity that might otherwise be unattainable.

The strongest argument for the initial axis is that it connects surface enhancement with the structure, ensuring a level of unity that might not be possible otherwise.

The carved enrichment of Figure 223 fully illustrates this point. The analytical study of Figure 224 shows the diagonal used as an inceptive axis, with the leading lines grouped about it at the corner point of concentration.

The detailed design of Figure 223 clearly demonstrates this point. The analysis of Figure 224 reveals the diagonal serving as a starting axis, with the leading lines arranged around it at the focal point of interest.

Free Enrichment

Rule 8a. Free ornament for partly or fully enriched surfaces should be based and centered upon an inceptive axis of the structure.

Rule 8a. Free decoration for partially or fully embellished surfaces should be based and centered on the initial axis of the structure.

Rule 8b. Free ornament should be related and subordinated to the structural surfaces.

Rule 8b. Free ornament should be connected to and support the structural surfaces.

Rule 8c. Points of concentration in free enrichment of vertically placed masses are usually located in and around the inceptive axis and above or below the geometric center of the design.

Rule 8c. Points of concentration in freely enriching vertically placed masses are typically found around the starting axis and either above or below the geometric center of the design.

Center Zone Enrichment

This method of surface enrichment is used to relieve the design of heavy members in the structure or to distribute ornament over the surface of lighter parts in a piece of furniture. An example is noted in Figure 246, Page 128, where the upper portion of the legs has center enrichment. As can be readily seen, the enrichment is generally free in character with little or no indication of enclosure. Figure 225 shows the application of free enrichment to a paneled screen or hinged door. The P.C. is in the upper portion of the door and is re-echoed in the door frames, while the ornament itself is strongly dynamic in movement with a decided upward tendency in sympathy with the proportions of the door. This motive might be developed by inlay, carving, or paint.

This surface enrichment method is used to lighten the design of heavy structural elements or to add decoration to the surfaces of lighter furniture pieces. An example is seen in Figure 246, Page 128, where the upper part of the legs features central enrichment. As you can easily see, the enrichment is generally open and free, with little or no sign of enclosure. Figure 225 illustrates the use of free enrichment on a paneled screen or hinged door. The enrichment is in the upper part of the door and is mirrored in the door frames, while the ornament itself is very dynamic in its movement, showing a clear upward direction that complements the door's proportions. This motif can be developed through inlay, carving, or painting.

Examples of Free Enrichment

Figure 226 is a carved Gothic leaf, appropriately used as enrichment of heavy furniture. The unit may be raised above the surface or, even more easily, depressed or incised into the surface. The small corner spot is added with the intention of bringing the leaf into sympathetic conformity with the contours. Note how the center line of both units in Figures 225 and 226 coincides with the inceptive axis of the structure. Let it again be reiterated that this binding of the surface enrichment to the structure by means of the coincidence of the axes of symmetry and the inceptive axes causes the most positive kind of unity. No part of this form of enrichment should be carved sufficiently high to give it the appearance of being separated from the main surface.

Figure 226 is a carved Gothic leaf, used to enhance heavy furniture. The piece can either be raised above the surface or, more simply, carved or incised into the surface. The small corner detail is added to make the leaf align smoothly with the contours. Notice how the center line of both pieces in Figures 225 and 226 aligns with the starting axis of the structure. It should be emphasized again that connecting the surface detail to the structure through the alignment of the symmetry axes and the starting axes creates a strong sense of unity. No part of this decorative element should be carved too high so that it looks like it’s separate from the main surface.

[122] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 37

Plate 37

Pierced Free Enrichment

Figures 227 and 228 are additional examples of free enrichment. Figure 228 has introduced by its monogram the individual touch of ownership so essential to the success of school designing. The monogram represents free enrichment while the border is marginal decoration with the point of concentration in the center of the top edge. Both types of enrichment are related to each other and to the structural contours.

Figures 227 and 228 are more examples of free enrichment. Figure 228 has added its monogram to provide a personal touch of ownership that is vital for successful school design. The monogram signifies free enrichment, while the border serves as a decorative element, with the focus at the center of the top edge. Both kinds of enrichment are connected to each other and to the overall structure.

Errors in the Use of Pierced Enrichment

Figure 229 is typical free pierced enrichment. The wood in the enriched portion is removed and the resulting figure supplies added lightness of construction and variety to the surface. One encounters this form of enrichment in the average school project with greater frequency than either inlaying or carving. It is with the thought of adding to the possibilities of school project decoration that the latter forms have been introduced. A word regarding the errors often encountered in pierced enrichment of the character of Figure 229 may not be amiss. Pupils, believing the square to be the last word in this form of enrichment, place the figure on the member to be enriched with little thought of its possible relation to the structural contours; the result is the un-unified design illustrated in Figure 230. To correct this, reference should be made to Rule 8b.

Figure 229 is a typical example of free pierced enrichment. The wood in the enriched section is removed, creating a figure that adds extra lightness to the construction and variety to the surface. You see this type of enrichment in average school projects more often than inlaying or carving. The intent of including the latter forms is to expand the decorative options for school projects. It’s worth mentioning some common mistakes often seen in pierced enrichment like Figure 229. Students, thinking that the square shape is the ultimate approach to this type of enrichment, place the figure on the piece they want to enhance without considering its relation to the structural shapes; the outcome is a disjointed design illustrated in Figure 230. To fix this, refer to Rule 8b.

Full Panel Enrichment

Rule 7d. The contours of fully enriched panels should parallel the outlines of the primary mass and repeat its proportions.

Rule 7d. The shapes of fully enriched panels should follow the outlines of the main mass and mirror its proportions.

Full Surface Enrichment

This is the richest and most elaborate form of enrichment when carried to its full perfection. It generally takes the form of a panel filled with appropriate design material. This panel may be used to enrich the plain end of a project such as a book stall and thus cover the entire surface, or it may be inserted into a large primary mass and accentuate its center as in a door, in a manner similar to Figure 233. Its use, whatever its position, leads us to the consideration of methods of designing full panels.

This is the most luxurious and detailed form of enrichment when it's fully developed. It usually comes in the shape of a panel filled with suitable design materials. This panel can enhance the plain end of a project, like a book stall, covering the entire surface, or it can be placed in a larger primary structure to highlight its center, like a door, similar to Figure 233. No matter where it’s used, it brings us to think about ways to design full panels.

[124] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 38

Plate 38

Rule 7e. The points of concentration for a fully enriched square panel may be in its center or in its outer margin.

Rule 7e. The focus points for a fully enriched square panel can be at its center or along its outer edge.

Square Panels

In planning designs for full panels, it would be well to consider: first, square panels; second, rectangular panels; third, varied panels. The point of concentration may be kept in the corners of a square panel, as designed in Figure 231, or it may be placed in the center, as shown in Figure 232. The effects, when assembled, are indicated in Figure 233.

In planning designs for full panels, it's important to consider: first, square panels; second, rectangular panels; third, varied panels. The primary focus can be kept in the corners of a square panel, as designed in Figure 231, or it can be placed in the center, as shown in Figure 232. The effects, when assembled, are indicated in Figure 233.

To secure these effects, a square panel is commonly divided into quarter sections by center lines. The diagonals of each quarter should be drawn before proceeding with the details of the design. These diagonals and center lines are the building lines or leading axes of the pattern. The leading lines and details are then grouped around these center and diagonal axes in a manner quite similar to the method used in Figures 223 and 224. These leading lines are then clothed with enrichment by applying the processes indicated in Chapter IX.

To achieve these effects, a square panel is usually divided into four sections by center lines. The diagonals of each section should be drawn before moving on to the design details. These diagonals and center lines serve as the basic lines or guiding axes of the pattern. The guiding lines and details are then arranged around these center and diagonal axes in a way that's quite similar to the method used in Figures 223 and 224. These guiding lines are then dressed with embellishments by applying the techniques outlined in Chapter IX.

Steps in Panel Designing

Without going into detail we may say that it is good practice: first, to draw the square panel; second, to draw the center lines and diagonals; third, to locate points of concentration; fourth, to make the leading lines move inwardly to center concentration or outwardly to corner concentration; fifth, to clothe these lines with ornament having strongly dynamic movement corresponding to the leading lines; sixth, to fill in remaining space with ornament, supporting the movement toward points of concentration, even though slight and minor contrasts of direction are added to give variety. When the entire design is completed one should ask the following questions: Does the design have unity? Does it seem too thin and spindling? And most of all, do the points of concentration and shape of the panel fit the structural outlines and proportions? We cannot fit a square peg into a round hole; neither can we fit a square panel into a circular or rectangular mass without considerable change to the panel.

Without going into detail, we can say that it's good practice: first, to draw the square panel; second, to draw the center lines and diagonals; third, to find points of focus; fourth, to direct the leading lines inward toward the center focus or outward toward the corners; fifth, to decorate these lines with ornaments that have strong dynamic movement matching the leading lines; sixth, to fill in the remaining space with decorations that support the movement toward the points of focus, even if slight and minor variations in direction are added for variety. Once the whole design is finished, one should consider the following questions: Does the design have unity? Does it appear too thin and spindly? And most importantly, do the points of focus and the shape of the panel match the structural outlines and proportions? We can't fit a square peg into a round hole; similarly, we can't fit a square panel into a circular or rectangular shape without significantly altering the panel.

Figures 234 and 235 have been drawn with the idea of suggesting a simple and modified form of panel enrichment which may be readily handled by the beginner. The tree as a decorative symbol is appropriate to wood, and its adaption to a square panel is drawn at Figure 235.

Figures 234 and 235 have been designed to offer a straightforward and updated way of enhancing panels that beginners can easily manage. The tree, as a decorative symbol, fits well with wood, and its design for a square panel is shown at Figure 235.

[126] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 39

Plate 39

Rectangular Panels

While a rectangular panel may be divided into sections by a number of different methods, it is well for the beginner in design to treat it as a vertical mass, designed to enrich a vertical surface. This vertical panel may then be divided into halves by the axis of symmetry, which should coincide with an inceptive axis, but it is not essential to balance the enrichment exactly in each half. Small deviations from exact symmetry sometimes give added variety to the design. Figure 235.

While a rectangular panel can be divided into sections in several ways, it's helpful for a beginner in design to think of it as a vertical shape meant to enhance a vertical surface. This vertical panel can be split in half along the line of symmetry, which should align with a starting axis, but it’s not necessary to perfectly balance the decoration in both halves. Minor deviations from perfect symmetry can actually add interest to the design. Figure 235.

Rule 7f. The points of concentration for a fully enriched vertical panel should be in the upper portion of the panel.

Rule 7f. The focus areas for a fully enriched vertical panel should be in the upper part of the panel.

Vertical Panels

The point of concentration in vertical panels should be in the upper portion, and all parts of the design, both leading lines and clothing, should have a strong upward tendency. Figure 236 is a vertical panel from historic ornament. The heavier parts have been designed at the bottom for stability and the lighter and more intricate members have been placed at the top.

The focus in vertical panels should be in the upper section, and all elements of the design, including leading lines and clothing, should have a strong upward direction. Figure 236 is a vertical panel from historic ornament. The heavier elements are designed at the bottom for stability, while the lighter and more intricate parts are placed at the top.

Rule 7g. The fully enriched panel and its contents should be designed in unified relation to the structural outlines, with the center line of the panel coinciding with the inceptive axis of the structure.

Rule 7g. The fully enriched panel and its contents should be designed to align with the overall structure, with the center line of the panel matching the initial axis of the structure.

To see how to apply rectangular panels to wood surfaces, let us look at Figure 240. This is a simple design with an incised background and might be used for enriching a narrow paneled door, newel post, or frame. The large areas are at the bottom; the point of concentration is at the top, and the entire design balances over the inceptive axis. The point of concentration consists of the geometrically treated small flower form, with its original lines modified to simplify the carving processes. The stem coincides with the inceptive axis, while narrow and sympathetically related minor panels fill in the background and keep the design from appearing weak and thin.

To see how to apply rectangular panels to wood surfaces, let’s look at Figure 240. This is a simple design with an engraved background and can be used to enhance a narrow paneled door, newel post, or frame. The larger areas are at the bottom; the focal point is at the top, and the whole design is balanced over the starting axis. The focal point features the geometrically designed small flower shape, with its original lines adjusted to make the carving process easier. The stem aligns with the starting axis, while narrow, related minor panels fill in the background to prevent the design from looking weak and flimsy.

Adapting Data to Material

Figure 237 is an accurate rendering of the flower form and is the data or record of facts for Figure 240. Figure 238 introduces the method of plotting the areas from these facts. Variety of form and area is, at this stage, desirable. Figure 239 has assembled these areas into orderly balance over the axis of symmetry. Figure 240 has again slightly modified them to apply to the vertical panel in wood.

Figure 237 is a precise representation of the flower's shape and serves as the data or record of facts for Figure 240. Figure 238 presents the approach to mapping the areas based on these facts. At this point, a variety of shapes and areas is preferred. Figure 239 has organized these areas into a balanced layout along the axis of symmetry. Figure 240 has made slight adjustments to fit the vertical wooden panel.

[128]

Courtesy of Berkey and Gay

Thanks to Berkey and Gay

Figure 246.—Example of Free and Marginal Enrichment

Figure 246.—Example of Free and Marginal Enrichment

Varied Panels

Panels of Varied Shapes

The panels under consideration up to this time have been designed to harmonize with square and rectangular contours. The panel may, however, become a most flexible and sympathetic element, changing its form to suit the ever-changing contours. But though change of shape affects the contents of the panel to a certain extent the points of concentration and the inceptive axes still act as our guide. Objects are arranged formally on each side of the inceptive axes and the space filling is approximately the same as in former examples.

The panels we've looked at so far have been designed to match square and rectangular shapes. However, the panel can also be a very adaptable and responsive element, shifting its form to fit varying shapes. While changing its shape does influence the contents of the panel to some degree, the focal points and starting axes still serve as our guide. Objects are organized in a structured way on either side of the starting axes, and the way space is filled is roughly similar to previous examples.

Use of Artificial Objects

The still life sketches of the art class may be conventionalized into appropriate motives for utilitarian objects as shown in Figure 241. This use of still life suggests a most desirable correlation and a welcome one to many drawing teachers. Three points should be kept in mind: first, adaptability of the object, its decorative possibilities, and appropriateness to service; second, adjustment of the panel to contours; third, adjustment of the object to the wood panel.

The still life sketches from the art class can be simplified into suitable designs for practical objects as shown in Figure 241. This approach to still life indicates a highly beneficial connection that many drawing instructors appreciate. There are three important points to remember: first, the adaptability of the object, its decorative potential, and its suitability for use; second, aligning the panel with the shapes; third, fitting the object to the wooden panel.

Some portion of the object should be designed to parallel the panel. Small additional spots may assist in promoting harmony between the object and the panel boundary. These three considerations are essentially necessary factors in the design of enclosed enrichment. Figures 242 and 243 are other adaptations of panel design to varied contours.

Some part of the object should be designed to match the panel. Small additional accents may help create a sense of harmony between the object and the panel's edge. These three factors are essentially necessary for designing enclosed enhancements. Figures 242 and 243 are other adaptations of panel design to different shapes.

Free Balance

In the foregoing examples the designs are more or less rigidly balanced over the inceptive axis or axis of symmetry. Imaginary axis it is, but, acting with the panel, it nevertheless arbitrarily limits the position of all parts within the panel. By removing this semblance of formal balance, we approach what is termed free balance. In this we find that the designer attempts to balance objects informally over the geometric center of the panel or combined panels. As the arrow points in Figure 244 indicate, the problem is to balance the trees in an informal and irregular manner, avoiding "picket fence" regularity. In all of this freedom there is a sense of order, since a mass of trees on one side of the geometric center is balanced by a similar mass on the other side. Indeed, in Figure 244 this may be carried even to the point of duplicating in reverse order the outside panels of the Triptych.

In the examples above, the designs are somewhat rigidly balanced around the starting axis or the axis of symmetry. It’s an imaginary axis, but it still arbitrarily restricts where all the parts can be placed within the panel. By removing this appearance of formal balance, we get closer to what’s called free balance. Here, the designer tries to balance objects informally around the geometric center of the panel or combined panels. As the arrows in Figure 244 show, the goal is to balance the trees in a casual and uneven way, avoiding that "picket fence" uniformity. Despite all this freedom, there’s still a sense of order, as a group of trees on one side of the geometric center is balanced by a similar group on the other side. In fact, in Figure 244, this can even go as far as mirroring the outside panels of the Triptych in reverse order.

[130] Rules 7d to 7e—Enclosed Surface Enrichment with Application of Still Life to a Fully Enriched Surface

Plate 40

Plate 40

Figure 245 again reverts to artificial motives, illustrated in free balance. The jet of steam is the unifying factor which brings the cup into harmony with the enclosing space. Figure 246 shows illustrations of free balance and border enrichment from the industrial market.

Figure 245 returns to artificial motives, demonstrated in free balance. The steam jet is the element that creates harmony between the cup and the surrounding space. Figure 246 presents examples of free balance and border enhancement from the industrial market.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plate 40 indicates the necessary design steps for a panel surface enrichment correlating with still life drawing. Note the connection between the ink bottle, pen, and book as used to decorate a book stall.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ outlines the key design steps for enhancing a panel surface related to still life drawing. Pay attention to how the ink bottle, pen, and book are arranged to decorate a book stall.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

For Square Panel Surface Enrichment

For Square Panel Surface Enrichment

(a) Draw the primary rectangle of the principal surface, appendages, etc.

(a) Draw the main rectangle for the surface, attachments, etc.

(b) Subdivide into major vertical and horizontal divisions.

(b) Break it down into main vertical and horizontal sections.

(c) Design simple contour enrichment. Determine location of zone of enrichment (the panel), the amount and method of enriching the surface.

(c) Create simple contour enhancements. Determine where the enrichment zone (the panel) will be, as well as how much and what method will be used to enhance the surface.

(d) Draw outline of the panel which should be sympathetically related to the contours.

(d) Draw the outline of the panel to fit nicely with the contours.

(e) Draw diameters, diagonals, or center lines of the panel. Regard these as possible inceptive axes.

(e) Draw diameters, diagonals, or center lines of the panel. Think of these as potential starting axes.

(f) Locate points of concentration on either diameters, diagonals, or center lines.

(f) Identify points of focus on any diameters, diagonals, or center lines.

(g) Draw leading lines in sympathy with the contours of the panel, the inceptive axis, and the point of concentration.

(g) Draw guiding lines that follow the shapes of the panel, the starting axis, and the focal point.

(h) Clothe the leading lines with enrichment that shall be appropriate to the structure, the material, and the intended service. Note the result. Is the panel agreeably filled without appearing overcrowded or meager? Several preliminary sketches should be made.

(h) Enhance the main lines with decorations that suit the design, material, and intended use. Check the outcome. Does the panel look well-filled without being overcrowded or too sparse? A few initial sketches should be made.

(i) Add additional views, dimension, and otherwise prepare the drawing for shop use.

(i) Include additional views, dimensions, and prepare the drawing for use in the shop.

SUGGESTED PROBLEM

Design a glove box and enrich the cover with a simple carved panel with marginal panel enrichment.

Design a glove box and enhance the cover with a simple carved panel and some decorative elements on the edges.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Enclosed Surface Enrichment for Partly Enriched Panels

Enclosed Surface Enrichment for Partly Enriched Panels

Rule 7a. Marginal panel enrichment should parallel or be related to the outlines of the primary mass, and to the panel it is to enrich.

Rule 7a. Marginal panel enhancements should align with or relate to the outlines of the main section and the panel it enhances.

Rule 7b. Marginal points of concentration in panels should be placed (1) preferably at the corners or (2) in the center of each margin.

Rule 7b. Concentration points in panels should ideally be positioned (1) at the corners or (2) in the center of each margin.

Rule 7c. To insure unity of design in panels, the elements composing the points of concentration and the links connecting them must be related to the panel contour and to each other.

Rule 7c. To ensure a cohesive design in panels, the elements that create the focal points and the connections between them must relate to both the panel's shape and to each other.

Enclosed Surface Enrichment for Fully Enriched Panels

Enclosed Surface Enrichment for Fully Enriched Panels

Rule 7d. The contours of fully enriched panels should parallel the outlines of the primary mass and repeat its proportions.

Rule 7d. The shapes of fully enriched panels should match the outlines of the main mass and reflect its proportions.

Rule 7e. The points of concentration for a fully enriched square panel may be in its center or in its outer margin.

Rule 7e. The focus points for a fully enriched square panel can be in its center or along its outer edge.

Rule 7f. The points of concentration for a fully enriched vertical panel should be in the upper portion of the panel.

Rule 7f. The focal points for a fully enriched vertical panel should be located in the upper part of the panel.

Rule 7g. The fully enriched panel and its contents should be designed in unified relation to the structural outlines, with the center line of the panel coinciding with the inceptive axis of the structure.

Rule 7g. The fully enriched panel and its contents should be designed cohesively with the structural outlines, ensuring that the center line of the panel aligns with the main axis of the structure.

Free Surface Enrichment

Free Surface Enrichment

Rule 8a. Free ornament for partly or fully enriched surfaces should be based and centered upon an inceptive axis of the structure.

Rule 8a. Free decoration for partially or fully enriched surfaces should be based and centered on the starting axis of the structure.

Rule 8b. Free ornament should be related and subordinated to the structural surfaces.

Rule 8b. Any decorative elements should connect to and support the structural surfaces.

Rule 8c. Points of concentration in free enrichment of vertically placed masses are usually located in and around the inceptive axis and above or below the geometric center of the design.

Rule 8c. Focus points in freely enriching vertically positioned forms are usually found around the starting axis and either above or below the geometric center of the design.

Postulate: Surface enrichment should be inseparably linked to the surface and to the outlines or contours.

Postulate: Surface enhancement should be closely linked to the surface and to the outlines or contours.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What is a panel?

1. What is a panel?

2. State three sections or areas at which a panel may be enriched. Give reasons for selecting a given area.

2. Identify three sections or areas where a panel can be enhanced. Explain why you chose a specific area.

3. Explain relation of point of concentration to each section.

3. Describe how the point of focus relates to each section.

4. In marginal enrichment, is it preferable to locate the point of concentration in the center or corner of the margin? Why?

4. In marginal enhancement, is it better to place the focus point in the center or at the corner of the margin? Why?

5. What is the value of an inceptive axis with relation to the unity of a design? What is its relation to the structure?

5. What is the role of a starting axis in terms of overall unity in a design? How does it connect to the structure?

6. Give the characteristics and use of free enrichment.

6. Describe the features and uses of free enrichment.

7. State the use of full panel enrichment.

7. Explain how full panel enrichment is utilized.

8. Where may the point of concentration be located in full square panel enrichment?

8. Where can the focus point be found in full square panel enrichment?

9. Name six steps essential to the designing of a square panel.

9. Name six essential steps needed to design a square panel.

10. For what specific purpose is a vertical rectangular panel adapted?

10. What specific function is a vertical rectangular panel designed for?

11. Where should the point of concentration be located in a vertical rectangular panel?

11. Where should the focal point be located in a vertical rectangular panel?

12. Draw a flower form and adapt it to a carved enrichment in wood.

12. Sketch a flower shape and adapt it for a wood carving design.

13. To what uses are panels of varied shapes adapted?

13. What are the different applications for panels of various shapes?

14. How may artificial objects be adapted to surface enrichment?

14. How can artificial objects be modified for surface enrichment?

15. Explain the term "free balance."

15. What does the term "free balance" mean?


Chapter 11
SURFACE ENRICHMENT WITH MINOR SUBDIVISIONS OF LARGE PRIMARY MASSES IN WOOD

Minor Subdivisions

This article is, in part, a brief summary and review of Rules 2a, 2b, 3a, 3b, 3c (vertical and horizontal major divisions) with application to minor subdivisions. By minor spacings or subdivisions in wood work we refer to the areas occupied by drawers, doors, shelves, and other small parts subordinated in size to the large or major divisions such as large front or side panels, etc. These smaller or minor subdivisions in wood work are bounded by runners, rails, guides, and stiles depending upon the form of construction and character of the minor subdivision. Major divisions are often bounded by legs, table tops, and principal rails.

This article is partially a quick overview and review of Rules 2a, 2b, 3a, 3b, and 3c (major vertical and horizontal divisions) as they apply to minor subdivisions. When we talk about minor spacings or subdivisions in woodworking, we mean the areas taken up by drawers, doors, shelves, and other smaller components that are smaller than the major divisions, like large front or side panels, etc. These smaller or minor subdivisions in woodworking are defined by runners, rails, guides, and stiles, depending on the construction style and the nature of the minor subdivision. Major divisions are usually defined by legs, tabletops, and main rails.

It is an interesting and useful fact that rules governing major divisions generally apply equally well to minor ones. There are a few exceptions and additions to be noted in their appropriate places.

It’s a fascinating and helpful fact that the rules for major divisions usually apply just as well to minor ones. There are a few exceptions and additions to mention in their proper context.

When minor subdivisions are well planned they supply one of the most interesting forms of surface enrichment or treatment, for if we consider paneling an appropriate form of decoration, we are equally privileged to feel that each small drawer or door adds its quota of interest to the sum total of the entire mass. We are equally justified in accenting these drawers or doors with panel decoration or other forms of surface enrichment provided that harmony is maintained.

When small subdivisions are well planned, they create one of the most engaging forms of surface enhancement or treatment. If we see paneling as a suitable decoration, we can also appreciate that each little drawer or door contributes its part to the overall appeal of the whole piece. We can confidently highlight these drawers or doors with panel decorations or other types of surface enhancement, as long as harmony is preserved.

These minor subdivisions, properly enriched, may become equalizers, or elements which adjust the design to the character of the surroundings destined to receive the project of which they are a part.

These minor subdivisions, properly enhanced, can become equalizers or elements that adapt the design to the character of the surroundings intended to receive the project of which they are a part.

Vertical Sections and Their Divisions

With reference to the illustrations, Figure 247, Plate 41, shows a simple minor panel treatment falling under Rule 3a. Single or preferably double band inlay might have been suitably substituted for the sunken panels. As many craftsmen are not properly equipped to produce inlays, it is practicable to use stock inlays, thus simplifying the process.

With reference to the illustrations, Figure 247, Plate 41, shows a simple minor panel treatment that falls under Rule 3a. A single or preferably double band inlay could have been appropriately used instead of the sunken panels. Since many craftsmen don’t have the right tools to create inlays, it’s practical to use ready-made inlays, which simplifies the process.

[134] Surface Enrichment and Minor Space Divisions for Large Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 41

Plate 41

Minor Subdivisions of Three Vertical Major Parts or Divisions

In a three-part design it is the designer's desire to gain the effect of lightness and height by the use of Rule 3b. As a simple treatment of a three-part design, Figure 248 needs little comment. Figures 249 and 250 are examples of dividing, by means of minor divisions, the outer sections of a three-part design.

In a three-part design, the designer aims to create a sense of lightness and height using Rule 3b. As a straightforward approach to a three-part design, Figure 248 requires minimal explanation. Figures 249 and 250 illustrate how to divide the outer sections of a three-part design using minor divisions.

The small drawers in the right and left sections of Figure 250 might have been improved in proportion by again applying Rule 2a to their design, thereby varying the measure of their heights. The enclosed panel enrichment affords pleasing variety to the otherwise unvaried front panels. Rule 7g.

The small drawers in the right and left sections of Figure 250 could have been made better proportionally by applying Rule 2a to their design again, which would have varied their heights. The decorative panels add a nice variety to the otherwise plain front panels. Rule 7g.

Unbroken Vertical Divisions

Figures 251 and 252 show unbroken drawer runners continuing through all three vertical sections, thus definitely binding these sections together. It is seen that this device is conducive to unity, whenever two or three vertical divisions have been used.

Figures 251 and 252 show continuous drawer runners that link all three vertical sections, firmly connecting them. This design promotes cohesion whenever two or three vertical divisions are utilized.

Figure 252 is a repetition of Figure 251, but shows the echo or continuation of the three divisions of the primary mass into the appendage. The use of the single or double band enrichment still further binds the minor subdivisions of the primary mass into ideal unity with the appendage.

Figure 252 repeats Figure 251, but reflects the echo or continuation of the three parts of the main mass into the appendage. The use of single or double band enrichment further connects the smaller subdivisions of the main mass into a cohesive whole with the appendage.

Sequential Progression of Minor Horizontal Space Divisions

Rule 2c. A primary mass may be divided into three or more smaller horizontal masses or sections by placing the larger mass or masses at the bottom and by sequentially reducing the height measure of each mass toward the smaller division or divisions to be located at the top of the mass.

Rule 2c. A main mass can be split into three or more smaller horizontal masses or sections by positioning the larger mass or masses at the bottom and gradually lowering the height of each mass towards the smaller sections that will be at the top of the mass.

Sequential Arrangement of Minor Horizontal Divisions

Rule 2c. Let us now imagine the center section of a three-part design to be removed and extended upward. Its transformation by this process into a cabinet or chiffonier similar to Figure 253, Plate 42, introduces the new principle of sequential progression. Instead of adhering to the limitation of Rules 2a and 2b, this arrangement shows that the horizontal divisions may be gradually decreased in height from the bottom toward the top of the primary mass. By this rhythmic decrease in the measure of the height, the eye is led through an orderly gradation through lesser areas to the top, thus giving a pleasing sensation of lightness and variety to the structure. By this method, also, the large areas are retained at the bottom to give stability and solidity to the structure. A quick test of these conditions may be made by reversing Figure 254, thus producing a more decidedly pleasing effect.

Rule 2c. Let’s now imagine removing the center section of a three-part design and extending it upward. This change transforms it into a cabinet or chiffonier similar to Figure 253, Plate 42, introducing the new concept of sequential progression. Rather than sticking to the limitations of Rules 2a and 2b, this arrangement shows that the horizontal divisions can gradually decrease in height from the bottom to the top of the main structure. This rhythmic reduction in height guides the eye through a smooth transition to smaller areas at the top, creating a pleasant sense of lightness and variety in the design. Additionally, the large areas at the bottom are preserved to provide stability and strength to the structure. A quick test of these conditions can be done by reversing Figure 254, resulting in a more visually appealing effect.

[136] Surface Enrichment and Minor Space Divisions for Large Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 42

Plate 42

This orderly gradation or sequence of heights need not be carried out with absolute mathematical precision such as 7-6-5-4-3-2-1. Arrangements similar to the following progression make for equally pleasing and more varied effect: 9¼-8-6¾-6-5-4¾. Many designers repeat similar heights for two neighboring horizontal spaces as, 6-5-5-4¾, but the upward gradation should be apparent. Figure 255, an Austrian motive, shows a strongly marked sequence with the top division broken by Rule 3b. It is better practice to keep such attempts confined to the bottom or top members of the sequence or loss of unity may be the final result.

This organized range of heights doesn't have to follow strict mathematical precision like 7-6-5-4-3-2-1. Arrangements like this progression can create just as pleasing and more varied effects: 9¼-8-6¾-6-5-4¾. Many designers repeat similar heights for two adjacent horizontal spaces, such as 6-5-5-4¾, but the upward gradation should still be noticeable. Figure 255, an Austrian design, shows a clearly defined sequence with the top part interrupted by Rule 3b. It's better to keep these variations confined to the bottom or top parts of the sequence; otherwise, unity may be lost in the end.

By applying this principle to the center section of a three-part design, we now have illustrated in Figure 256 the new sequence in its application, and Figures 257 and 258 are variations of the same idea.

By using this principle in the middle section of a three-part design, we've now shown in Figure 256 the new sequence in its application, and Figures 257 and 258 are variations of the same concept.

Two Horizontal and Three Vertical Divisions

We now come to the transitional type of design where three vertical sections begin to lose their dominance as major divisions, but still retain their places in the design as minor sections. Replacing these in prominence is the horizontal major section or division. The first immediate result of this change as shown in Plate 43 is to produce a more compact surface with a greater impression of length because of the presence of strongly accented horizontal lines which are always associated with horizontal divisions. This transitional style with its minor but dominant horizontal divisions would harmonize with the long horizontal lines of a room or similar lines in the furniture. The full expression of this style or type will be readily seen by comparing Plates 43 and Figures 251 and 252, Plate 41. Several styles of period furniture have been introduced in Plate 43 to prove the universality of these principles of space divisions.

We now reach the transitional type of design where three vertical sections start to lose their status as the main divisions but still hold their roles as minor sections. Taking their place in prominence is the horizontal major section or division. The first immediate result of this change, as shown in Plate 43, is a more compact surface that gives a greater sense of length due to the presence of strongly emphasized horizontal lines, which are always linked with horizontal divisions. This transitional style, with its minor yet prominent horizontal divisions, would complement the long horizontal lines of a room or similar lines in the furniture. The full expression of this style or type will be easily seen by comparing Plates 43, Figures 251, 252, and Plate 41. Several styles of period furniture have been introduced in Plate 43 to demonstrate the universality of these principles of space divisions.

[138] Surface Enrichment and Minor Sub Divisions For Large Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 43

Plate 43

Dominance of Lower or Upper Sections

Figures 259, 260, and 262, Plate 43, are divided by three minor vertical sections cut by two minor horizontal divisions with the dominance in the lower section. Rule 2a. The arrangement of the small central drawers could have been more varied by the application of the principle of sequential progression. Figures 261 and 263 show similar vertical spacings with a difference in the arrangements of the horizontal divisions. In these figures the dominance has been placed in the upper section of the primary mass by the division created by the runner above the lower drawer. It is likewise seen that Figure 263 needs a top appendage to bind the top into closer unity with minor spacings.

Figures 259, 260, and 262, Plate 43, are divided by three small vertical sections separated by two small horizontal divisions, with the focus in the lower section. Rule 2a. The layout of the small central drawers could have been more diverse by using the principle of sequential progression. Figures 261 and 263 have similar vertical spacings but differ in the arrangement of the horizontal divisions. In these figures, the emphasis is placed in the upper section of the main mass by the division created by the runner above the lower drawer. It is also apparent that Figure 263 requires a top piece to bring the top together more cohesively with the smaller spacings.

Transitional Types

In carrying the transitional type to which we have referred in the previous paragraphs from the vertical space influence toward the horizontal, we are gradually approaching three minor horizontal divisions, still maintaining three minor vertical divisions in a modified and less prominent form. Figure 264 is an approach toward three horizontal divisions. As only one clear-cut horizontal space division is visible, this figure is not a pure example. The upper horizontal space division is broken up into a three-part design by the drawer guides. It is not until we reach Figure 266 that three horizontal divisions are clearly evident.

In moving the transitional type we mentioned earlier from a vertical influence to a horizontal one, we're gradually getting closer to three minor horizontal divisions, while still keeping three minor vertical divisions in a modified and less noticeable way. Figure 264 is a step towards three horizontal divisions. Since there's only one clear horizontal space division visible, this figure isn't a perfect example. The upper horizontal space division is divided into a three-part design by the drawer guides. It's not until we get to Figure 266 that three horizontal divisions are clearly noticeable.

Horizontal Divisions

Three Minor Horizontal Divisions Cut by Varying Numbers of Vertical Divisions

The horizontal minor divisions in furniture are generally drawer runners and the vertical minor divisions are often drawer guides. The horizontal divisions may be arranged in either one of two ways: first, by the application of Rule 2b; or second, by applying Rule 2c, the rule of sequential progression. Figures 266, 267, and 268, Plate 44, are representative of the former while Figures 269 and 270 are typical of the latter. The result in either case is a compactly designed and solid mass of simple structural lines. On some occasions we find the three-part rule used for minor divisions within the horizontal sections, while again the two-part rule is used. The method depends upon the desired use and appearance. In either case the long areas and large masses are to be retained as far as possible near the bottom of each primary mass, as this custom tends to give a sense of solidity to the design.

The horizontal minor divisions in furniture are usually drawer runners, while the vertical minor divisions are typically drawer guides. The horizontal divisions can be organized in one of two ways: first, by using Rule 2b; or second, by using Rule 2c, the rule of sequential progression. Figures 266, 267, and 268, Plate 44, represent the first method, while Figures 269 and 270 are examples of the second. In both cases, the result is a compact design with simple structural lines. Sometimes, we see the three-part rule used for minor divisions within the horizontal sections, while other times the two-part rule is applied. The choice depends on the intended use and appearance. In either scenario, the long areas and large masses should be kept as low as possible within each primary mass, as this approach helps provide a sense of solidity to the design.

[140] Surface Enrichment and Minor Sub Divisions for Large Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 44

Plate 44

Four Vertical Divisions

Figure 271 is a rare reversion to more than three vertical divisions. In this case, Rule 3c has been observed and we find all of the panels are of equal size. Variety has been secured by means of the horizontal spacings.

Figure 271 is a rare return to more than three vertical divisions. In this case, Rule 3c has been followed, and we see that all the panels are the same size. Diversity has been achieved through the horizontal spacing.

Free Balance

Free Minor Space Treatment

Free Balance

This form of design is inherent in the Japanese system. It consists in the planning and balancing of unequal areas over a geometric center. It is not subject to definite rules as is the more formal balancing. The reader is referred to Mr. Arthur Dow's excellent book on Composition for further discussion of the subject. Figure 272, Plate 45, is an example of partly formal and partly free balance and its method of treatment.

This style of design is a key aspect of the Japanese system. It involves planning and balancing uneven areas around a geometric center. It's not governed by strict rules like more formal balancing. For more on this topic, the reader is directed to Mr. Arthur Dow's excellent book on Composition. Figure 272, Plate 45, illustrates an example of a balance that is partly formal and partly free, along with its approach.

Carving and Piercing as Applied to Large Masses

Figures 273 and 274 are pierced designs, thoroughly related to the structure and in no way weakening it. Figure 273 is representative of a type which, if carried to extremes, will cause the structure to become too weak for service; it is, therefore, necessary to guard and restrict this form of enrichment. The carving of Figure 275, combined with the contour enrichment, forms a pleasing variation to this common type of furniture design.

Figures 273 and 274 are pierced designs that are closely linked to the structure and do not compromise its integrity. Figure 273 represents a type that, if taken too far, could make the structure too weak for use; therefore, it’s important to monitor and limit this kind of decoration. The carving of Figure 275, along with the contour enhancement, creates a nice variation on this standard furniture design.

Small minor details in furniture construction should be designed with as much care as the larger major or minor parts. The larger areas or spaces in small details similar to stationery shelves and pigeon holes must harmonize in proportion with the space in which they are placed and of which they are a part.

Small details in furniture construction should be designed with as much care as the larger parts. The bigger areas or spaces of small details, like stationery shelves and pigeonholes, must harmonize in proportion with the space they occupy and are a part of.

Small Minor Details of Large Primary Masses

The three-part or three-vertical division system, Rule 3b, is generally used to design the small details in furniture as may be seen in Figures 276, 277, 278, and 279; while the rule of sequence, Rule 2c, may be employed again to subdivide these small details in a horizontal direction with as much variety as is consistent with unity. Figure 280 is a leaded glass surface enrichment for doors. Note the leading lines of the enrichment as they parallel the dominant proportions of the panel opening.

The three-part or three-vertical division system, Rule 3b, is typically used to design the finer details in furniture, as seen in Figures 276, 277, 278, and 279; while the rule of sequence, Rule 2c, can also be used to further divide these small details horizontally, providing as much variety as is consistent with unity. Figure 280 is an enriched leaded glass surface for doors. Notice how the leading lines of the enrichment align with the main proportions of the panel opening.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plate 46 is a typical high school sheet of design problems, with the masses accentuated by pen shading. See Plate 15.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ is a standard high school design problem sheet, with the masses marked using pen shading. Refer to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) to (e). See similar steps in Chapter IV.

(a) to (e). See related steps in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

[142] Surface Enrichment and Minor Sub Divisions for Large Primary Masses in Wood

Plate 45

Plate 45

SUGGESTED PROBLEM

Design a sideboard 3 feet 3 inches high with plate rack. The primary mass should have three minor horizontal divisions and three minor vertical divisions, with the horizontal divisions accented.

Design a sideboard that's 3 feet 3 inches tall and includes a plate rack. The main section should have three small horizontal areas and three small vertical areas, with a focus on the horizontal sections.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Sequential Progression of Minor Horizontal Space Divisions

Step-by-Step Development of Small Horizontal Space Divisions

Rule 2c. A primary mass may be divided into three or more smaller horizontal masses or sections by placing the larger mass or masses at the bottom and by sequentially reducing the height measure of each mass toward the smaller division or divisions to be located at the top of the mass.

Rule 2c. A main mass can be divided into three or more smaller horizontal masses or sections by placing the larger mass or masses at the bottom and gradually reducing the height of each mass as you move towards the smaller section or sections at the top.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What are minor subdivisions in wood construction?

1. What are minor subdivisions in woodworking?

2. What is the effect of a design with dominant vertical major divisions? State its use.

2. What effect does a design with prominent vertical divisions have? Describe its use.

3. Show some customary methods of dividing three vertical major divisions into minor subdivisions.

3. Show some common ways to break down three vertical main sections into smaller subdivisions.

4. State the rule of sequential progression. Give illustrations from the industrial arts.

4. Explain the rule of sequential progression and provide examples from industrial arts.

5. Describe the transitional stage between the point where the dominance of the vertical motive ceases and the horizontal influence begins.

5. Describe the transition from where the vertical element ends to where the horizontal influence begins.

6. What is the effect of a design with dominant horizontal major divisions? State its use.

6. What effect does a design with strong horizontal sections have? Describe how it’s used.

7. Show some customary methods of subdividing horizontal major divisions into minor subdivisions.

7. Show some common methods for breaking down major horizontal divisions into smaller subdivisions.

8. What should be the relation in a design between the details of a project and the divisions of the primary mass?

8. What should the relationship be between the details of a project and the sections of the main structure in a design?

[144] Instruction Sheet. Surface Enrichment of Large Masses in Wood

Plate 46

Plate 46


Chapter 12
SURFACE ENRICHMENT OF CLAY

Limitations for Surface Enrichment

In some respects the surface enrichment of clay is similar to that of wood as, for example, the similarity produced by inlays in clay and in wood. On the other hand the enrichment of clay is unhampered by the restricting effects of unequal resistance of the material, such as the grain of wood. Again it is limited to those effects or forms of enrichment that are capable of withstanding the intense heat to which ceramic decoration is subjected. See Frontispiece.

In some ways, the surface enhancement of clay is similar to that of wood, like the similarities created by inlays in both materials. However, the enhancement of clay isn’t limited by the uneven resistance of the material, like the grain of wood. Additionally, it is restricted to those effects or types of enhancement that can endure the high temperatures that ceramic decoration is exposed to. See Frontispiece.

Courtesy of the Rookwood Potteries

Thanks to Rookwood Potteries

Figure 281.—Filling the Saggars before Firing

Figure 281.—Loading the Saggars Before Firing

Decorative Processes of Surface Enrichment

Forms of Manipulation

Before proceeding with a design it is well for one to understand clearly the possibilities of clay enrichment. He must know what kind of designs are best suited to clay as a medium, to the intended service, and to the ultimate application of the heat of the pottery kiln. Without entering into technicalities let us briefly discuss the following processes. The first three deal with finger and tool manipulation of the clay body and are consequently the simpler of the processes. The last five are concerned chiefly with the addition of coloring pigments either to the clay or to the glaze and are, therefore, more complex in character.

Before starting a design, it's important to clearly understand the potential of clay enrichment. You need to know what types of designs work best with clay as a medium, what the intended use is, and how the heat from the pottery kiln will affect the final product. Let’s briefly discuss the following processes without getting too technical. The first three involve using your fingers and tools to shape the clay and are therefore the simpler ones. The last five focus mainly on adding coloring pigments to either the clay or the glaze and are, as a result, more complex.

[146]

Courtesy of The Rookwood Potteries

Thanks to The Rookwood Potteries

Figure 282.—Stacking the Kiln

Figure 282.—Loading the Kiln

Processes

Rule 9a. Surface enrichment of clay must be so designed as to be able to withstand the action of heat to which all ware must be submitted.

Rule 9a. The surface treatment of clay must be designed to endure the heat that all pottery will be exposed to.

Rule 9b. Incised, pierced, and modeled decoration in clay should be simple and bold and thus adapted to the character of the material.

Rule 9b. Incised, pierced, and modeled decoration in clay should be straightforward and striking, reflecting the nature of the material.

Incising

1. This is the simplest form of enrichment, a process familiar to the earliest primitive potters and appropriate now for beginners. It consists of the process of lowering lines or planes into the clay body to the depth of from one-sixteenth to one-eighth of an inch. These lines or planes should be bold and broad. They may be made with a blunt pencil or a flat pointed stick. A square, rectangular, or round stick may be used as a stamp with which to form a pattern for incising. Illustrations of simple incising may be found in Figures 283, 284, 295, 319, 330. The tiles shown are about six inches square.

1. This is the most basic form of enrichment, a technique well-known to the earliest primitive potters and suitable now for beginners. It involves pressing lines or shapes into the clay body to a depth of about one-sixteenth to one-eighth of an inch. These lines or shapes should be bold and wide. You can create them using a blunt pencil or a flat pointed stick. A square, rectangular, or round stick can be used as a stamp to create a pattern for carving. You can find illustrations of simple carving in Figures 283, 284, 295, 319, 330. The tiles shown are approximately six inches square.

Piercing

2. This process is less common and, as its name implies, is carried out by cutting through the clay. It may be done with a fine wire. Either the background or the design itself may be thus removed. The effect produced is that of lightening an object such as the top of a hanging flower holder, a window flower box, or a lantern shade.

2. This process is less common and, as its name suggests, is done by cutting through the clay. It can be performed with a fine wire. Either the background or the design itself can be removed this way. The result is that it lightens an object like the top of a hanging flower holder, a window flower box, or a lantern shade.

Modeling

3. By adding clay to the main body, and by working this clay into low relief flower or geometric forms, one has the basic process of modeling. The slightly raised areas of clay form a pleasing play of light and shade that varies the otherwise plain surface of the ware. The process should be used with caution, for over-modeling, Figure 325, will obstruct the structural outlines and, because of its over prominence as decoration, will cease to be surface enrichment. In the technical language of the designer over-modeling is an enrichment which is not subordinated to the surface. In articles intended for service this high relief modeling is unsanitary and unsatisfactory.

3. By adding clay to the main body and shaping it into low relief flowers or geometric designs, you get the basic process of modeling. The raised areas of clay create a nice contrast of light and shadow that enhances the otherwise plain surface of the piece. This technique should be used carefully, as too much modeling, Figure 325, can obscure the structural outlines and, since it becomes overly prominent as decoration, it loses its role as surface enrichment. In designer terminology, excessive modeling is an enhancement that isn’t subordinated to the surface. For items meant for use, this high relief modeling is unhygienic and unappealing.

Figures 286 and 287 show incising with slight modeling, while 324, 328, and 329 are examples of more complex enrichment.

Figures 286 and 287 show incision with some minor shaping, while 324, 328, and 329 are examples of more intricate enrichment.

[148] Surface Enrichment of Clay. Rectangular and Square Areas.

Plate 47

Plate 47

Introduction of Coloring Pigments

With the introduction of the second group comes an added interest and difficulty, that of the introduction of color. Pigments that will withstand the application of heat are suggested at different points.

With the introduction of the second group comes increased interest and complexity, especially with the addition of color. At various points, pigments that can withstand heat are recommended.

Inlay

4. This process consists of removing certain areas from the clay body to the depth of one-eighth inch and filling in the depression with tinted clay. Tints formed by the addition of ten per cent or less of burnt umber or yellow ochre to the modeling clay will give interesting effects. Figures 284, 285, 320, and 321 show forms which may be developed by this process.

4. This process involves taking out specific areas from the clay body to a depth of one-eighth of an inch and filling in the dip with colored clay. Adding ten percent or less of burnt umber or yellow ochre to the modeling clay creates interesting effects. Figures 284, 285, 320, and 321 show shapes that can be created using this method.

Sgraffito, an Italian process, is more difficult than inlaying, but the effect is similar. A thin layer of colored clay is placed over the natural clay body, and the design is developed by cutting away this colored coating in places, thus exposing the natural clay body. Figure 306. There are variations of this plan that may be attempted by the advanced designer.

Sgraffito, an Italian technique, is trickier than inlaying, but the result is similar. A thin layer of colored clay is applied over the natural clay body, and the design is created by carving away parts of this colored layer, revealing the natural clay underneath. Figure 306. There are different versions of this method that advanced designers can try out.

Slip Painting

5. Slip is clay mixed with water to the consistency of cream. For slip painting this mixture is thoroughly mixed with not more than ten per cent of coloring pigment as represented by the underglaze colors of the ceramist. This thick, creamy, colored slip is then painted on the surface of the clay body while damp, much as the artist would apply oil colors. The ware, when thoroughly dried, is glazed and fired, which produces the effect shown in Figures 290, 291, and 327. The color range is large; almost any color may be used with the exception of reds and strong yellows. A colorless transparent glaze should be used over beginner's slip painting.

5. Slip is clay mixed with water to a cream-like consistency. For slip painting, this mixture is thoroughly blended with no more than ten percent of coloring pigment, as indicated by the ceramist's underglaze colors. This thick, creamy, colored slip is then applied to the surface of the damp clay body, similar to how an artist would use oil paints. Once the piece is completely dry, it gets glazed and fired, producing the effects shown in Figures 290, 291, and 327. The color options are extensive; practically any color can be used except for reds and bright yellows. A clear, transparent glaze should be applied over beginner's slip painting.

Colored Glazes

6. This process refers to the direct introduction of the colored pigment into the glaze. By varying the glaze formula we may have a clear, transparent, or glossy glaze similar to Figure 317, a dull surfaced opaque effect, termed a matt glaze, Figure 332; or a glossy but opaque faience glaze similar to the blue and white Dutch tiles. There are other forms such as the crystalline and "reduced" glazes, but these as a rule are far beyond the ability of the beginning craftsman in ceramics.

6. This process involves directly mixing colored pigment into the glaze. By changing the glaze formula, we can create a clear, transparent, or glossy glaze similar to Figure 317, a dull, opaque finish known as a matt glaze, Figure 332; or a glossy but opaque faience glaze like the blue and white Dutch tiles. There are other types like crystalline and "reduced" glazes, but these are generally too advanced for novice ceramic craftsmen.

[150] Surface Enrichment of Clay. Shallow Circular Forms: Plates, etc.

Plate 48

Plate 48

Combinations

It is possible to use these three types of glazed surface in various ways. For example, a vase form with an interesting contour may be left without further surface enrichment except that supplied by clear glaze or by a colored matt similar to certain types of Teco Ware.

It’s possible to use these three types of glazed surfaces in different ways. For instance, a vase with an interesting shape might be left without any additional surface enhancement, relying only on a clear glaze or a colored matte finish similar to some types of Teco Ware.

[151] It is likewise possible to apply transparent glazes over incised designs, inlay or slip painting, increasing their beauty and the serviceability of the ware. A semi-transparent glaze is sometimes placed over slip painting giving the charm inherent to the Vellum Ware of the Rookwood Potteries. Figure 332. Greens, blues, yellows, and browns, with their admixtures, are the safest combinations for the craftsman who desires to mix his own glazes.

[151] You can also use transparent glazes over carved designs, inlays, or slip painting, enhancing their beauty and the durability of the pottery. A semi-transparent glaze is often added over slip painting, capturing the unique charm of the Vellum Ware from Rookwood Potteries. Figure 332. Greens, blues, yellows, and browns, along with their mixes, are the safest choices for a craftsman looking to create his own glazes.

Underglaze Painting

7. This process may be seen in the examples of Newcomb Pottery illustrated particularly in Figure 314 or 326. The underglaze pigment is thinly painted upon the fired "biscuit," or unglazed ware. A thin, transparent glaze is then placed over the color, and in the final firing the underneath color shows through this transparent coating, thus illustrating the origin of the name underglaze or under-the-glaze painting. Sage-green and cobalt-blue underglaze colors are frequently used in Newcomb designs with harmonious results. The outline of the design is often incised and the underglaze color, settling into these channels, helps to accentuate the design. Figure 314.

7. This process can be seen in the examples of Newcomb Pottery shown especially in Figure 314 or 326. The underglaze pigment is painted thinly onto the fired "biscuit," or unglazed ware. A thin, transparent glaze is then applied over the color, and in the final firing, the color underneath shows through this transparent layer, illustrating the origin of the term underglaze or under-the-glaze painting. Sage-green and cobalt-blue underglaze colors are commonly used in Newcomb designs with harmonious results. The outline of the design is often incised, and the underglaze color settles into these channels, helping to emphasize the design. Figure 314.

Porcelain or Overglaze Painting

8. This is popularly known as china painting and consists of painting directly upon the glazed surface of the ware and placing it in a china kiln where a temperature between 600 degrees and 900 degrees C. is developed. At this point the coloring pigment melts or is fused into the porcelain glaze, thus insuring its reasonable permanence. Figure 302.

8. This is commonly referred to as china painting and involves painting directly on the glazed surface of the pottery and then putting it in a china kiln where the temperature reaches between 600 and 900 degrees Celsius. At this stage, the coloring pigment melts or fuses into the porcelain glaze, ensuring its durability. Figure 302.

The eight processes briefly described may be readily identified on the plates by referring to the figures corresponding to those which number the processes and are added to each figure number. Two processes are sometimes suggested as possible for one problem.

The eight processes described can easily be found on the plates by looking at the figures that match the numbers assigned to each process, which are added to the figure numbers. Sometimes, two processes are proposed as options for one problem.

Classification of Structural Clay Forms

Different clay forms require different modes of treatment. To simplify these treatments will now be our problem. It has been found convenient to form four divisions based upon the general geometric shape of the ware. The first, Plate 47, includes rectangular and square areas; the second, Plate 48, shallow and circular forms; the third, Plate 49, low cylindrical forms; and the fourth, Plate 50, high cylindrical forms. The first three divisions have distinct modes of design treatment, while the fourth interlocks to a considerable extent with the third method. We shall now consider each plate with reference to its use and possible forms of enrichment. For the sake of brevity, the results have been condensed into tabulated forms.

Different clay shapes require different treatment methods. Simplifying these treatments will now be our focus. We've found it helpful to create four categories based on the general geometric shape of the piece. The first, Plate 47, includes rectangular and square shapes; the second, Plate 48, consists of shallow and circular forms; the third, Plate 49, features low cylindrical shapes; and the fourth, Plate 50, consists of high cylindrical forms. The first three categories have distinct design treatment methods, while the fourth overlaps significantly with the third method. We will now look at each plate in terms of its use and potential forms of decoration. For the sake of brevity, the results have been summarized in tabulated forms.

[152] Surface Enrichment of Clay. Low Cylindrical Forms.

Plate 49

Plate 49

[153] Each geometric form or type on these plates has not only distinctive methods of design treatment but characteristic locations for placing the design as well. These places or zones of enrichment have been indicated in the following tabulated forms by the letters in parentheses. There are a number of zones for each plate. For example, Plate 47 has its distinctive problems as tiles, weights, etc., and five characteristic zones of enrichment described on pages 153-155 and indicated by the letters A, B, C, D, E, followed by a brief description of that zone. Each zone is still further analyzed into its accompanying type of design, inceptive axis, point of concentration, and illustrations. Each plate has the proper zone of enrichment immediately following the figure number and in turn followed by the process number.

[153] Each geometric shape or type shown on these plates has unique design treatment methods as well as specific locations for placing the design. These areas for enhancement are indicated in the following table by the letters in parentheses. Each plate features several zones. For instance, Plate 47 presents its own distinct challenges like tiles, weights, etc., along with five specific zones of enhancement detailed on pages 153-155 and marked by the letters A, B, C, D, E, followed by a brief description of each zone. Each zone is further broken down into its corresponding design type, starting axis, focal point, and illustrations. Each plate lists the appropriate enrichment zone right after the figure number, followed by the process number.

Square and Rectangular Areas, Plate 47

Marginal Enrichment

Problems: Tiles for tea and coffee pots, paper weights, window boxes; architectural tiles for floors, and fire places.

Problems: Tiles for teapots and coffee pots, paperweights, window boxes; architectural tiles for floors and fireplaces.

(A) Zone of Enrichment: In the margin.
Reason for Choice: Central area to be devoted to zone of service requiring simplicity in design.
Type of Design: Bands or borders.
Inceptive Axis: For corners; the bisector of the angle.
Points of Concentration: The corners and, if desired, at equal intervals between the corners.
Illustrations: Figures 283, 284, 286, 287, 288.

(A) Zone of Enrichment: In the margin.
Reason for Choice: Central area dedicated to a service zone requiring a simple design.
Type of Design: Bands or borders.
Inceptive Axis: For corners; the angle bisector.
Points of Concentration: The corners and, if desired, at equal intervals between the corners.
Illustrations: Figures 283, 284, 286, 287, 288.

Center Enrichment

(B) Zone of Enrichment: center of surface, free ornament.
Type of Design: Initials, monograms, street numbers, geometric patterns, and other examples for free ornament. A star or diamond is not appropriate enrichment for a square area unless properly related to the contour by connecting areas.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical or horizontal diameters or diagonals.
Points of Concentration: Center of embellishment.
Illustrations: Figure 285.

(B) Zone of Enrichment: center of the surface, free decoration.
Type of Design: Initials, monograms, street numbers, geometric patterns, and other examples of free decoration. A star or diamond is not suitable decoration for a square area unless it's properly connected to the shape by surrounding areas.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical or horizontal lines or diagonals.
Points of Concentration: Center of decoration.
Illustrations: Figure 285.

[154] Surface Enrichment of Clay. High Cylindrical Forms. Vases, Pitchers, etc.

Plate 50

Plate 50

Full Vertical Surface Enrichment

(C) Zone of Enrichment: full surface enrichment in a horizontal position.
Type of Design: A symmetrical pattern generally radiating from the geometric center of the surface and covering at least two-thirds of the surface.
Inceptive Axes: Diameters or diagonals of the area.
Points of Concentration: At the corners or the center of the outer margin; at geometric center, as in a rosette.
Illustrations: Figures 283, 289, and 291.

(C) Zone of Enrichment: complete surface enhancement in a horizontal position.
Type of Design: A balanced pattern typically radiating from the geometric center of the surface and covering at least two-thirds of the area.
Inceptive Axes: Diameters or diagonals of the space.
Points of Concentration: At the corners or the center of the outer edge; at the geometric center, like in a rosette.
Illustrations: Figures 283, 289, and 291.

Full Horizontal Surface Enrichment

(D) Zone of Enrichment: full surface enrichment in a vertical position.
Type of Design: A symmetrical pattern with a strong upward movement and covering more than one-half of the surface.
Inceptive Axis: The vertical center line.
Point of Concentration: Upper section of the surface.
Illustrations: Figures 290 and 292.

(D) Zone of Enrichment: complete surface enrichment in a vertical position.
Type of Design: A balanced pattern with a strong upward flow, covering more than half of the surface.
Inceptive Axis: The vertical centerline.
Point of Concentration: Upper part of the surface.
Illustrations: Figures 290 and 292.

Free Balance

(E) Zone of Enrichment: free balance over full surface.
Type of Design: Semi-decorative motive preferably covering the entire surface.
Inceptive Axis: Masses freely balanced over the geometric center of the area.
Point of Concentration: Near, but not in the exact center.
Illustrations: Figures 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298.
Note: The points of concentration should be accented by slight contrast of value and hue. See chapters on color.

(E) Zone of Enrichment: free balance across the entire surface.
Type of Design: Semi-decorative pattern preferably covering the whole surface.
Inceptive Axis: Masses freely balanced over the geometric center of the area.
Point of Concentration: Close to, but not exactly in the center.
Illustrations: Figures 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298.
Note: The points of concentration should be highlighted with slight contrast in value and color. See chapters on color.

[156] Applied and Constructive Design. Rule 9: Enrichment of the Primary Mass by a Border.

Plate 51.—Instruction Sheet

Plate 51.—Guide Sheet

Shallow Circular Forms, Plate 48

Problems: Plates, saucers, ash trays, card receivers, almond and candy bowls.

Problems: Plates, saucers, ashtrays, card holders, almond and candy bowls.

Marginal Enrichment

(A) Zone of Enrichment: margin of interior surface; margin of exterior surface.
Type of Design: Bands or borders thoroughly related to the structural contours. Bands for exterior enrichment may be placed directly on the contour, Figures 299 and 301, thus forming an [157] accented contour (F) or slightly removed from it, as in Figure 300.
Inceptive Axes: For interior surfaces, the radii of the contour circle generally supply the axes of symmetry.
Points of Concentration: For interior surfaces, the points of concentration may be placed in or near the radii of the area.
Illustrations: Figures 302, 303, 304, 305, 306.

(A) Zone of Enrichment: inside surface edge; outside surface edge.
Type of Design: Bands or borders closely related to the structural shapes. Bands for outside enhancement can be placed right on the shape, Figures 299 and 301, creating an [157] emphasized shape (F) or slightly away from it, as seen in Figure 300.
Inceptive Axes: For inside surfaces, the radii of the contour circle usually provide the symmetry axes.
Points of Concentration: For inside surfaces, the points of focus may be placed in or near the radii of the area.
Illustrations: Figures 302, 303, 304, 305, 306.

Low Cylindrical Forms, Plate 49

Marginal Enrichment

Problems: Cups, pitchers, steins, nut and rose bowls, low vase forms.

Problems: Cups, pitchers, mugs, nut and rose bowls, low vase shapes.

(A) Zone of Enrichment: upper margin of exterior.
Type of Design: Borders of units joining each other or connected
by bands or spots acting as connecting links. Rule 9c.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical elements of the exterior surface. Elements are imaginary lines dividing the exterior surface into any given number of vertical sections. Elements used as center lines form the axes of symmetry about which the butterfly of Figure 308 and similar designs are constructed.
Points of Concentration: On each vertical element.
Illustrations: Figures 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 316.

(A) Zone of Enrichment: upper edge of the outside.
Type of Design: Borders of units that connect with each other or are linked
by bands or spots serving as connecting elements. Rule 9c.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical components of the outer surface. These are imaginary lines that divide the outer surface into multiple vertical sections. The elements used as center lines create the axes of symmetry around which the butterfly of Figure 308 and similar designs are made.
Points of Concentration: On each vertical component.
Illustrations: Figures 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 316.

Full Vertical Surface Enrichment

(D) Zone of Enrichment: full vertical surface.
Type of Design: Extended borders with strongly developed vertical lines or forms. Less than one-half of the surface may be covered.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical elements.
Points of Concentration: In upper portion of vertical elements, hence in upper portion of area.
> Illustrations: Figures 307, 314, 317, 318.

(D) Zone of Enrichment: full vertical surface.
Type of Design: Extended borders with strongly developed vertical lines or shapes. Less than half of the surface may be covered.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical elements.
Points of Concentration: In the upper part of the vertical elements, so in the upper part of the area.
> Illustrations: Figures 307, 314, 317, 318.

(E) Zone of Enrichment: free balance of full surface. (See D, above).
Illustration: Figure 315.

(E) Zone of Enrichment: unrestricted balance of the entire surface. (See D, above).
Illustration: Figure 315.

Problems: Vases, jars, pitchers, tall flower holders, covered jars for tea, crackers, or tobacco.

Problems: Vases, jars, pitchers, tall flower holders, covered jars for tea, snacks, or tobacco.

High Cylindrical Forms, Plate 50

Marginal Enrichment

(A) Zone of Enrichment: margin of exterior.
Type of Design: Borders of geometric units, freely balanced floral units, and other natural motives placed in upper margin of mass.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical elements of cylinder.
Points of Concentration: In upper portion of vertical elements.
Illustrations: Figures 319, 320, 321, 327, 331, 332.

(A) Zone of Enrichment: outer edge.
Type of Design: Edges of geometric shapes, harmoniously arranged floral patterns, and other natural motifs placed in the upper part of the mass.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical components of the cylinder.
Points of Concentration: Upper part of the vertical components.
Illustrations: Figures 319, 320, 321, 327, 331, 332.

Full Surface Enrichment

(D) Zone of Enrichment: full surface of exterior.
Type of Design: Free of formal conventionalized unit repeated on each vertical element. The units may be juxtaposed or may be connected by bands or similar links.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical elements of cylinder.
Point of concentration: In upper portion of vertical elements.
Illustrations: Figures 322, 323, 324, 326, 328, 329.

(D) Zone of Enrichment: entire outer surface.
Type of Design: Unconventional, without repeating formal units on each vertical element. The units can be placed side by side or connected by bands or similar links.
Inceptive Axes: Vertical elements of a cylinder.
Point of concentration: In the upper part of the vertical elements.
Illustrations: Figures 322, 323, 324, 326, 328, 329.

Types of Commercial Pottery

The reader should carefully consider the postulate and various divisions of Rule 7 and try to apply them to the material now under consideration. Acknowledgment is made for material supplied by the Rookwood Potteries for Figures 288, 289, 292, 293, 294, 297, 298, 315; 327 and 332; Newcomb Potteries, Figures 314, 316, 317, 318, 326; Teco Potteries, 329; Keramic Studio Publishing Company, 302, 307, 308, 310, 312.

The reader should carefully think about the statement and different sections of Rule 7 and try to apply them to the material being examined. Thanks are given for the materials provided by Rookwood Potteries for Figures 288, 289, 292, 293, 294, 297, 298, 315; 327 and 332; Newcomb Potteries, Figures 314, 316, 317, 318, 326; Teco Potteries, 329; Keramic Studio Publishing Company, 302, 307, 308, 310, 312.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plate 51 illustrates the marginal surface enrichment of low cylindrical forms, with part surface enrichment of two higher forms.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ shows a slight increase in low cylindrical shapes on the surface, along with some surface enhancement of two taller shapes.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Draw primary mass:

(a) Draw the main mass:

For square or rectangular areas draw square rectangle, etc.

For square or rectangular areas, draw a square, rectangle, etc.

For shallow circular forms draw a circle.

For shallow circular shapes, draw a circle.

For low cylindrical forms draw a rectangle; subdivide this if desired by a unit of measurement into two horizontal divisions.

For low cylindrical shapes, draw a rectangle; if desired, divide it into two horizontal sections using a measurement unit.

For high cylindrical forms draw a rectangle; subdivide this if desired by a unit of measurement into two or three horizontal divisions. Rule 5e.

For tall cylindrical shapes, draw a rectangle; if desired, divide it into two or three horizontal sections using a unit of measurement. Rule 5e.

(b) Design simple contour enrichment based upon these units of measurement.

(b) Create straightforward contour enhancements using these measurement units.

(c) Locate zone of enrichment.

(c) Identify the zone of enhancement.

(d) Draw inceptive axes:

(d) Draw initial axes:

For square or rectangular areas draw diameters, diagonals, or both.

For square or rectangular areas, draw diameters, diagonals, or both.

For shallow circular forms draw radii of the primary circle; concentric circles for bands.

For shallow circular shapes, draw the radii of the main circle; use concentric circles for the bands.

For low cylindrical forms draw the elements of the underlying cylindrical form for extended borders or lines paralleling the top or bottom of the primary mass for bands.

For low cylindrical shapes, draw the features of the base cylindrical shape for extended borders or lines that run parallel to the top or bottom of the main mass for bands.

For high cylindrical forms draw inceptive axes similar to low cylindrical forms.

For tall cylindrical shapes, draw initial axes similar to those for short cylindrical shapes.

(e) Locate points of concentration in these inceptive axes.

(e) Identify areas of focus in these initial axes.

(f) Determine manner and amount of surface enrichment.

(f) Decide how and to what extent to enhance the surface.

(g) Add leading lines and develop these into surface enrichment.

(g) Add guiding lines and integrate these into surface enhancement.

(h) Make potter's working drawing, full size (See Plate 26). Add the necessary amount for shrinkage and otherwise prepare the drawing for potter's use.

(h) Create a full-size working drawing for the potter (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__). Include the necessary amount for shrinkage and prepare the drawing for the potter's use.

(i) Make a paper tracing of the surface enrichment for transfer to clay body and cut a zinc or tin template as a contour guide in building the form.

(i) Create a paper outline of the surface enhancement for transferring to the clay body and cut a zinc or tin template to act as a contour guide when shaping the form.

SUGGESTED PROBLEMS

Design a cider or chocolate set with appropriate surface enrichment.

Design a cider or chocolate set with appropriate surface enhancements.

Design an architectural tile 6 in. by 9 in. for accenting a brick fireplace in the home.

Design a 6 in. by 9 in. architectural tile to complement a brick fireplace in a home.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 9a. Surface enrichment of clay must be so designed as to be able to withstand the action of heat to which all ware must be submitted.

Rule 9a. The surface layer of clay must be designed to withstand the heat that all items must endure.

Rule 9b. Incised, pierced, and modeled decoration in clay should be simple and bold and thus adapted to the character of the material.

Rule 9b. Decorations in clay that are carved, pierced, or shaped should be simple and striking, in line with the material's nature.

Rule 9c. A border should not be located at the point of greatest curvature in the contour of a cylindrical form. The contour curve is of sufficient interest in itself at that point.

Rule 9c. A border should not be placed at the point where a cylindrical shape curves the most, as the curve itself is significant enough at that point.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Compare the surface enrichment of clay with that of wood.

1. Compare how much clay is enhanced on the surface versus wood.

2. State a major requirement of a good pottery design.

2. State a key requirement for good pottery design.

3. Give the broad divisions into which it is possible to divide the decorative processes of clay surface enrichment.

3. Outline the main categories for classifying decorative techniques used to enhance clay surfaces.

4. Name and briefly describe eight methods of enriching the surface of clay.

4. List and briefly explain eight methods to enhance the surface of clay.

5. What precautions should be exercised with regard to the use of incised, pierced, and modeled decoration?

5. What precautions are necessary when using incised, pierced, and modeled decoration?

6. Should a border be placed at the point of greatest curvature of the contour? Give reasons.

6. Should a border be added at the point of greatest curvature of the contour? Provide reasons.

7. Name method of classifying structural forms in clay into four groups.

7. Name the method for classifying structural forms in clay into four groups.

8. State problems and possible zones of enrichment in each group. Give reasons for choice.

8. Identify issues and potential areas for improvement in each group. Explain your reasoning for your choices.

9. State type of design unit, conventionalized, natural or artificial forms, location of inceptive axis, points of concentration, and process for each zone of enrichment.

9. Specify the type of design unit (conventional, natural, or artificial forms), the placement of the starting axis, points of focus, and the process for each area of enhancement.

10. What is an element of a cylindrical surface?

10. What is an element of a cylindrical surface?


Chapter 13
SURFACE ENRICHMENT OF PRECIOUS METALS

Small Flat Planes

Base and Precious Metals

Chapter XII referred to clay as a free and plastic material adapted to a wide range of surface enrichment processes. Metal as a more refractory material offers greater resistance to the craftsman and is relatively more limited in its capacity for surface enrichment. As was the case in the consideration of contour enrichment for designing purposes, it is necessary in the consideration of surface enrichment to divide metal into two groups: precious and base metals. As the field of design in both base and precious metals is large, we shall consider the surface enrichment of precious metals only in this chapter.

Chapter XII described clay as a versatile and moldable material that can be used for various surface enhancement techniques. Metal, being a more durable material, poses more challenges for artisans and is somewhat limited in its ability to enhance surfaces. Similar to the way we looked at contour enhancement for design, when considering surface enrichment, we need to categorize metal into two groups: precious and base metals. Since the design possibilities in both categories are extensive, we will focus on the surface enrichment of precious metals only in this chapter.

Divisions for Enrichment

Following an order similar in character to that used in clay designing, problems in both base and precious metals may be divided into four classified groups as follows: flat, square, rectangular, or irregular planes; shallow circular forms; low cylindrical forms; high cylindrical forms. Designs included in the first group, flat planes, comprise such problems as are typically represented by tie pins, fobs, rings, and pendants. The design problems presented by these examples are so important that it is wise to restrict this chapter to flat planes.

Following an order similar to that used in clay design, issues in both base and precious metals can be broken down into four main categories: flat, square, rectangular, or irregular planes; shallow circular shapes; low cylindrical forms; and high cylindrical forms. The designs in the first category, flat planes, include typical items like tie pins, fobs, rings, and pendants. The design challenges associated with these examples are so significant that it's best to focus this chapter on flat planes.

Rule 10g. The inceptive axis should pass through and coincide with one axis of a stone, and at the same time be sympathetically related to the structure.

Rule 10g. The starting axis should go through and align with one axis of a stone, and at the same time, be related to the structure in a harmonious way.

Rule 10h. The position of the inceptive axis should be determined by: (1) use of the project as ring, pendant, or bar pin, (2) character of the primary mass as either vertical or horizontal in proportion.

Rule 10h. The position of the starting axis should be determined by: (1) the use of the project as a ring, pendant, or bar pin, (2) the nature of the main mass as either vertical or horizontal in proportion.

Inceptive Axes and Points of Concentration

The semi-precious or precious stone is commonly found to be the point of concentration of these designs. The inceptive axes of tie pins, pendants, and fobs are generally vertical center lines because of the vertical positions of the objects when worn. The inceptive axes,[161] moreover, should pass through the point of concentration and, at the same time, be sympathetically related to the structure. Rings and bar pins are frequently designed with horizontal inceptive axes, so determined by their horizontal characteristics and positions.

The semi-precious or precious stone is usually the focal point of these designs. The main axes of tie pins, pendants, and fobs are typically vertical center lines because of how they hang when worn. These main axes,[161] should also go through the focal point and be harmoniously connected to the overall structure. Rings and bar pins are often designed with horizontal main axes, based on their horizontal features and positions.

The point of concentration for tie pins, pendants, and fobs in formal balance, in addition to coinciding with the inceptive axis, is generally located above or below the geometric center of the primary mass. The point of concentration for rings and bar pins is placed in the horizontal inceptive axis and centrally located from left to right.

The focal point for tie pins, pendants, and fobs in formal balance, besides aligning with the starting axis, is typically found above or below the geometric center of the main mass. The focal point for rings and bar pins is along the horizontal starting axis and centrally positioned from left to right.

Typical Processes of Enrichment

Economy of Material

As a step preliminary to designing, and in order that the enrichment may be conventionalized or adapted to conform to the requirements of tools, processes, and materials, it is now imperative to become familiar with a number of common forms of surface enrichment in metal. There are eight processes frequently encountered in the decoration of silver and gold: piercing, etching, chasing or repousséing, enameling, inlaying, stone setting, building, carving. To these may be added planishing, frosting or matting, and oxidizing as methods employed to enrich the entire surface. Economy of material is of prime importance in the designing of precious metal and, particularly in gold projects, conservation of the metals should be an urgent consideration in all designs.

As a preliminary step to designing, and to ensure that the enrichment can be standardized or adapted to meet the needs of tools, processes, and materials, it’s now essential to be familiar with several common methods of surface enrichment in metal. There are eight processes that are commonly used in decorating silver and gold: piercing, etching, chasing or repoussé, enameling, inlaying, stone setting, building, and carving. Additionally, methods like planishing, frosting or matting, and oxidizing can also be used to enhance the entire surface. Saving materials is critically important when designing with precious metals, and especially for gold projects, conserving metals should be a top priority in all designs.

Rule 10a. Designs in precious metals should call for the minimum amount of metal necessary to express the idea of the designer for two reasons: (1) good taste; (2) economy of material.

Rule 10a. Designs in precious metals should require the least amount of metal needed to convey the designer's idea for two reasons: (1) good taste; (2) cost-effectiveness.

Evolution and Technical Rendering of Processes

A non-technical and brief description of each process follows. All designs in this chapter may be identified by referring to the process numbers after the figure description as 1, 3, 5; 2, 4, 6, corresponding to the key numbers on Plate 52. A design to be submitted to the craftsman should be a graphic record of technical facts in addition to good design, which requires that we should have an expressive technical means of rendering each process. The last column, on Plate 52, indicates this rendering. In addition to this rendering each one of the eight technical processes has been carried through three design steps. 1. (first column, Plate 52) Planning the original primary mass, with its inceptive axis suggested by the structure and intended use. It passes through the point of concentration. 2. (second column, Plate 52). The division of the primary mass into zones of service and enrichment with the suggestion of the leading lines which, at some points, are parallel to the contours and lead up to the point of concentration. The contours in this column have, in several instances, been changed to add lightness and variety to the problem. 3. The last step (column three, Plate 52) shows the design with graphic rendering suggestive of the completed process.

A non-technical and brief description of each process follows. All designs in this chapter can be identified by referring to the process numbers after the figure description as 1, 3, 5; 2, 4, 6, corresponding to the key numbers on Plate 52. A design to be submitted to the craftsman should be a graphic record of technical facts in addition to good design, which means we need to have an expressive technical means of rendering each process. The last column, on Plate 52, indicates this rendering. Each of the eight technical processes has gone through three design steps. 1. (first column, Plate 52) Planning the original primary mass, with its initial axis suggested by the structure and intended use. It passes through the point of concentration. 2. (second column, Plate 52). The division of the primary mass into service zones and enrichment, suggesting leading lines that, at some points, run parallel to the contours and lead up to the point of concentration. The contours in this column have, in several instances, been altered to add lightness and variety to the problem. 3. The last step (column three, Plate 52) shows the design with graphic rendering that suggests the completed process.

[162] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Metal with Evolution and Rendering of Eight Processes of Enrichment

Plate 52

Plate 52

[163] Technical Processes and Methods of Illustrating Same in a Design

[163] Technical Processes and Ways to Illustrate Them in a Design

Piercing

1. Removal of design unit or background by means of the jeweler's saw. Bridges of metal should be left to support firmly all portions of the design. Test this by careful study of the design. Rendering—shade all pierced portions of the design in solid black. Slightly tint portions of the design passing under other parts. Illustration, Figure 336.

1. Remove the design unit or background using a jeweler's saw. Leave metal bridges to firmly support all parts of the design. Check this by thoroughly examining the design. For rendering—shade all the cut-out parts of the design in solid black. Lightly tint sections of the design that are underneath other parts. Illustration, Figure 336.

Rule 10j. All surface enrichment should have an appearance of compactness or unity. Pierced spots or areas should be so used as to avoid the appearance of having been scattered on the surface without thought to their coherence.

Rule 10j. All surface enrichment should look compact or unified. Any pierced spots or areas should be used in a way that avoids the impression of being carelessly scattered on the surface without regard for their cohesiveness.

Etching

2. Coating either design or background with an acid resistant, to be followed by immersion of the article in an acid bath. Allow the unprotected portion to be attacked and eaten by the acid to a slight depth. Rendering—slightly tint all depressed or etched parts of the design. Illustration, Figure 339.

2. Coat either the design or the background with an acid-resistant layer, then immerse the item in an acid bath. Let the unprotected areas be slightly corroded by the acid. Rendering—lightly color all the recessed or etched parts of the design. Illustration, Figure 339.

Chasing or Repousséing

3. The embossing and fine embellishment of a metal surface by the application of the hammer and punches. The work is conducted mainly from the top surface. Rendering—stipple all parts of the background not raised by the process. Chasing should seem an integral part of the background and not appear stuck upon it. Illustration, Figure 342. Rule 10k.

3. The embossing and detailed decoration of a metal surface using hammers and punches. The work is primarily done on the top surface. Rendering—texture all areas of the background that aren't raised by the process. Chasing should look like a natural part of the background and shouldn't seem added on. Illustration, Figure 342. Rule 10k.

Enameling (Champleve)

4. A process of enameling over metal in which the ground is cut away into a series of shallow troughs into which the enamel is melted. Exercise reserve in the use of enamel. Over-decoration tends to cheapen this valuable form of decoration. Rendering—shade the lower and right-hand sides of all enameled areas to suggest relief. Illustration, Figure 345. If possible render in tempera color.

4. A method of applying enamel to metal where the surface is carved into a series of shallow grooves that are filled with melted enamel. Use enamel sparingly. Too much decoration can make this valuable form of art look less impressive. For rendering, shade the lower and right sides of all enameled areas to create a sense of depth. Illustration, Figure 345. If possible, use tempera paint for rendering.

[164] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Precious Metal. Contour and Surface Enrichment of Flat Planes. Pins and Brooches.

Plate 53

Plate 53

Rule 10i. Caution should be exercised with regard to the use of enamel. Over-decoration by this material tends to cheapen both process and design.

Rule 10i. Be careful when using enamel. Too much decoration with this material can make both the process and design look cheap.

Rule 10l. The lanes or margins between enameled spots should be narrower than the lane or margin between the enamel and the contour of the primary mass.

Rule 10l. The spaces or margins between enameled areas should be narrower than the space or margin between the enamel and the edge of the main mass.

Inlaying

5. The process of applying wire, etc., to an incision on metal either by burnishing or fusing the metal into the cavities. Rendering—tint the darker metal or, if possible, render in color. Illustration, Figure 348.

5. The process of applying wire, etc., to a cut in metal either by polishing or melting the metal into the gaps. Coloring—shade the darker metal or, if possible, add color. Illustration, Figure 348.

Stone Cutting

6. An enrichment of the surface by the addition of semi-precious or precious stones. Other enrichment is generally subordinated to the stone which then becomes the point of concentration. All enrichment should lead toward the stone. Small stones may, however, be used to accentuate other points of concentration in surface enrichment. Rendering—shade the lower and right-side of the stone to suggest relief. Pierced subordinate enrichment should be shaded in solid black. A concentric line should be drawn outside of the contour of the stone to designate the thin holding band, or bezel, enclosing the stone on all sides. Illustration, Figure 351.

6. An enhancement of the surface by adding semi-precious or precious stones. Other enhancements usually support the stone, which becomes the main focus. All enhancements should draw attention to the stone. However, small stones can be used to highlight other focal points in the surface enhancement. For rendering, shade the lower and right side of the stone to suggest depth. Any pierced supporting enhancements should be shaded in solid black. A concentric line should be drawn outside the stone’s outline to indicate the thin holding band, or bezel, surrounding the stone on all sides. Illustration, Figure 351.

Rule 10d. Surface enrichment should at some point parallel the contours of both primary mass and point of concentration, especially whenever the latter is a stone or enamel.

Rule 10d. Surface enrichment should eventually follow the shapes of both the main mass and the point of concentration, especially when the latter is a stone or enamel.

Rule 10e. In the presence of either stone or enamel as a point of concentration, surface enrichment should be regarded as an unobtrusive setting, or background.

Rule 10e. When there is either stone or enamel as a focal point, surface enrichment should be seen as a subtle setting or backdrop.

Rule 10f. Stone or enamel used as a point of concentration should form contrast with the metal, either in color, brilliancy, or value, or all three combined.

Rule 10f. Stone or enamel used for focus should contrast with the metal, either in color, brightness, or value, or a combination of all three.

Building

7. The process of applying leaves, wire, grains, and other forms of surface enrichment to the plane of the metal. These may afterwards be carved or chased. Rendering—shade the lower and right-hand lines; slightly tint the lower planes of the metal. Illustration, Figure 354.

7. The act of applying leaves, wire, grains, and other types of surface enhancement to the surface of the metal. These can later be carved or chased. For rendering—shade the lower and right-hand lines; lightly tint the lower surfaces of the metal. Illustration, Figure 354.

[166]

Courtesy of the Elverhoj Colony

Thanks to the Elverhoj Colony

Figure 372a.—Tie Pins

Figure 372a.—Tie Pins

Courtesy of the Elverhoj Colony

Courtesy of the Elverhoj Community

Figure 372b.—Tie Pins

Figure 372b.—Tie Clips

Carving

8. The process of depressing or raising certain portions of the metal surface by means of chisels and gravers. By the use of these tools the surface is modeled into planes of light and shade, to which interest is added if the unaggressive tool marks are permitted to remain[167] on the surface. Rendering—shade the raised and depressed portions to express the modeling planes. As this is a difficult technical process the designer is advised to model the design in plastelene or jewelers' wax first. Illustration, Figure 357.

8. The process of lowering or elevating certain areas of the metal surface using chisels and gravers. By using these tools, the surface is shaped into areas of light and shadow, which become more interesting if the subtle tool marks are left on the surface. Rendering—shade the raised and lowered areas to highlight the modeled surfaces. Since this is a challenging technical process, it's recommended that the designer first model the design in plastelene or jewelers' wax. Illustration, Figure 357.

Rule 10k. Built, carved, and chased enrichment should have the higher planes near the point of concentration. It is well to have the stone as the highest point above the primary mass. When using this form of enrichment, the stone should never appear to rise abruptly from the primary mass, but should be approached by a series of rising planes.

Rule 10k. Built, carved, and chased enrichment should have the higher surfaces near the focal point. It's best to have the stone as the highest point above the main mass. When using this type of enrichment, the stone should never seem to jut out suddenly from the main mass, but should be reached through a series of ascending planes.

Planishing

9. The process of smoothing and, at the same time, hardening the surface of the metal with a steel planishing hammer. The hammer strokes give an interesting texture to the surface which may be varied, from the heavily indented to the smooth surface, at the will of the craftsman. The more obvious hammer strokes are not to be desired as they bring a tool process into too much prominence for good taste. Rendering—print desired finish on the drawing.

9. The method of smoothing and simultaneously hardening the metal surface with a steel planishing hammer. The hammer strokes create a unique texture on the surface, which can range from deeply indented to smooth, depending on the craftsman's choice. More prominent hammer strokes are not preferred, as they can make the tool marks too noticeable for good taste. Rendering—print desired finish on the drawing.

Frosting

10. A process of sand blasting or scratch brushing a metal surface to produce an opaque or "satin" finish. Rendering—similar to planishing.

10. A method of sandblasting or scratch brushing a metal surface to create an opaque or "satin" finish. Rendering—similar to planishing.

Oxidizing

11. A process of darkening the surface of metal by the application of chemicals. Potassium sulphite will supply a deep, rich black to silver and copper. Rendering—see Planishing.

11. A method for darkening metal surfaces using chemicals. Potassium sulfite provides a deep, rich black finish for silver and copper. Rendering—see Planishing.

Design of Pins and Brooches

The eleven processes mentioned above are among those which, by recent common practice, have become familiar to the craftsman in precious metals. While they do not cover the entire field, they at least give the beginner an opportunity to design intelligently in terms of the material.

The eleven processes mentioned above are some that, through recent common practice, have become known to craftsmen working with precious metals. While they don't encompass everything, they at least provide beginners with a chance to design thoughtfully using the material.

Dependent Surface Enrichment for Pins

Plate 53 is mainly the enrichment of the flat plane by the addition of semi-precious stones (process six). Whatever surface enrichment is added to this design becomes dependent enrichment and quite analogous to dependent contour enrichment, Plate 29, inasmuch as it has to be designed with special reference to the shape and character of the stone. Figures 358 to 363 are examples of dependent contour enrichment; Figures 364 to 371 are examples of dependent surface enrichment. Figures 358 to 367 are based upon vertical inceptive axes as appropriate to their intended service. The point of concentration may be located at practically any point on this inceptive axis, provided the major axis of the stone coincides with the inceptive axis. The best results are obtained by placing the stone a little above or below the exact geometrical center of the primary mass.

Plate 53 is primarily about enhancing a flat surface by adding semi-precious stones (process six). Any surface enhancement added to this design becomes dependent enhancement and is quite similar to dependent contour enhancement, Plate 29, since it must be designed with special attention to the shape and characteristics of the stone. Figures 358 to 363 are examples of dependent contour enhancement; Figures 364 to 371 are examples of dependent surface enhancement. Figures 358 to 367 are based on vertical inceptive axes as suitable for their intended use. The focal point can be placed almost anywhere along this inceptive axis, as long as the major axis of the stone aligns with the inceptive axis. The best results come from positioning the stone slightly above or below the exact geometric center of the main mass.

[168] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Precious Metals. Contour and Surface Enrichment Applied to Fobs.

Plate 54

Plate 54

Inceptive Axes for Pins

Figures 368 to 372 show articles based upon a horizontal inceptive axis. The stone, in accordance with formal balance, is in the geometric center from left to right. One notices the important fact that the surface enrichment must bring the stone and contour together in sympathetic relation and, at the same time, be related to both stone and contour. This again brings out the meaning of dependent surface enrichment. The contour enrichment is to be kept as simple as possible and the interest concentrated upon the surface enrichment. The accentuation of both surface and contour enrichment in a single design marks the height of bad taste in design.

Figures 368 to 372 show articles based on a horizontal starting axis. The stone, reflecting formal balance, is positioned in the geometric center from left to right. It's important to note that the surface detailing must connect the stone and contour in a harmonious way and also relate to both the stone and the contour. This highlights the idea of dependent surface detailing. The contour detailing should be kept as simple as possible, with the focus on the surface detailing. The emphasis on both surface and contour detailing in a single design represents the peak of poor taste in design.

Rule 10b. Contour and surface enrichment should never appear to compete for attention in the same design.

Rule 10b. Contour and surface enhancement should never seem to compete for attention in the same design.

Fobs

Plate 54 shows flat planes, the service of which suggests vertical inceptive axes. Figure 380 is noted as an exception to this vertical inceptive axis as it possesses a vertical primary mass but with radial inceptive axes. The interesting manner by which the dynamic leaves of the outer border transmit their movement to the inner border, which in turn leads toward the point of concentration, is worthy of attention. The points of concentration in other designs on this plate are all contained in the vertical inceptive axes.

Plate 54 displays flat surfaces that imply vertical starting points. Figure 380 stands out as an exception to this vertical starting point since it has a vertical main mass but features radial starting points. The interesting way the dynamic leaves of the outer edge convey their movement to the inner edge, which ultimately leads to the focal point, deserves attention. The focal points in other designs on this plate are all located along the vertical starting points.

Rings

Plate 55, at first thought, would seem to fall under the classification of low cylindrical forms but when reference is made to Figure 385 it is readily seen that the ring has to be first developed as a flat plane, to be afterwards bent into the required form. Care should be taken to keep the design narrow enough to be visible when the ring is in position on the finger.

Plate 55, at first glance, might seem to fit into the category of low cylindrical shapes, but when you refer to Figure 385, it's clear that the ring needs to be initially created as a flat shape before being shaped into the final form. It's important to ensure that the design is narrow enough to be visible when the ring is worn on the finger.

[170] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Precious Metal. Enrichment of Flat Planes. Rings

Plate 55

Plate 55

The long horizontal band of the ring supplies the motive for the horizontal inceptive axis as a common basis or starting point for a large number of designs. If the designer so desires, the vertical axis of the finger is authority for an elliptical stone to be placed with its major axis as a vertical line in harmony with the finger axis. In any instance the designer seeks to lead the eye from the horizontal portion of the ring (the finger band) toward the point of concentration (the stone), by means of surface enrichment. A long sloping[171] contour curve helps, as a transition line in the boundary, to carry the attention from the stone to the finger band. A great number of devices are used to complete a similar transition in the surface enrichment. Figure 390a. Too much piercing weakens the structure, and it is therefore to be avoided.

The long horizontal band of the ring serves as the basis for the horizontal starting point in many designs. If the designer prefers, the vertical axis of the finger can support placing an elliptical stone with its longest side aligned vertically to match the finger axis. In every case, the designer aims to guide the eye from the horizontal part of the ring (the finger band) to the focal point (the stone) through surface enhancement. A long, sloping contour curve acts as a transition line at the boundary, directing attention from the stone to the finger band. Many techniques are used to achieve a similar transition in surface enhancement. Figure 390a. Too many piercings weaken the structure, so they should be avoided.

Courtesy of the Elverhoj Colony

Thanks to the Elverhoj Colony

Figure 390a.—Rings

Figure 390a.—Rings

Plate 56 suggests some vertical flat planes for pendants. While no definite rule can be stated for the location of the stone, from past experience, it is easier for beginners to place the stone on the vertical inceptive axis slightly above the geometric center of the primary mass. Figures 391 to 395. A design thus formed is less likely to appear heavy, although there is nothing arbitrary about the suggestion.

Plate 56 suggests some vertical flat planes for pendants. While there’s no strict rule about where to put the stone, from past experience, it’s easier for beginners to position the stone on the vertical starting axis just above the geometric center of the main piece. Figures 391 to 395. A design created this way is less likely to look heavy, although the suggestion isn't random.

Rule 10c. Parts of a design differing in function should differ in appearance but be co-ordinated with the entire design.

Rule 10c. Different functional parts of a design should look different but still coordinate with the overall design.

[172] Surface Enrichment of Small Primary Masses in Precious Metal. Enrichment of Flat Planes of Pendants, Chains, Lockets.

Plate 56

Plate 56

Pendants and Chains

In pendant design the surface enrichment generally carries the attention from the contour of the pendant to the stone, thus insuring [173] unity at this point, while the contour lines often lead the attention from the pendant to the chain. The eye should move in unbroken dynamic movement from pendant to chain. The chain may have points of accent designed to vary the even distribution of the links. These accents are frequently composed of small stones with surface enrichment sympathetically designed in unity with pendant, chain, and stone. Figure 401 shows examples of this arrangement and similarly the need of a horizontal inceptive axis to harmonize with the length of the chain. These small accents are quite similar in design to bar pin motives.

In pendant design, the surface details usually draw attention from the shape of the pendant to the stone, ensuring a cohesive look at that point, while the outline often directs attention from the pendant to the chain. The eye should move in a smooth, dynamic flow from the pendant to the chain. The chain can include accent points designed to break up the uniformity of the links. These accents are often made up of small stones with surface details that are thoughtfully designed to match the pendant, chain, and stone. Figure 401 shows examples of this arrangement and highlights the need for a horizontal starting axis to match the length of the chain. These small accents are quite similar in design to bar pin motifs.

Rule 10m. Transparent and opaque stones or enamel should not be used in the same design.

Rule 10m. Clear and solid stones or enamel shouldn't be combined in the same design.

Relation of Stones to Metal

For the designer's purposes we may consider two kinds of stones, the transparent and the opaque. These should not be mixed in one design. The most favorable stones are those forming contrasts of value or brilliancy with the metal as, for example, the amethyst, lapis lazuli, or New Zealand jade, with silver; or the dark topaz, or New Zealand jade, with gold. Lack of these contrasts gives dull, monotonous effects that fail to make the stone the point of concentration. Figure 467. These effects may be partially overcome by frosting, plating, or oxidizing the metal, thus forming stronger contrasts of value.

For the designer's purposes, we can consider two types of stones: transparent and opaque. These shouldn't be mixed in a single design. The best stones are those that create contrasts in value or brilliance with the metal, like amethyst, lapis lazuli, or New Zealand jade with silver, or dark topaz or New Zealand jade with gold. A lack of these contrasts leads to dull, monotonous effects that fail to make the stone the focal point. Figure 467. These effects can be partially improved by frosting, plating, or oxidizing the metal, creating stronger contrasts in value.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plates 52 and 57 are representative of the steps, processes, and problems for school use.

Plates __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ show the steps, processes, and challenges for school use.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Draw the primary mass.

(a) Sketch the primary mass.

(b) Locate the inceptive axis in this primary mass with its direction determined by the ultimate use or position of the primary mass and its general shape.

(b) Identify the starting axis in this main mass, with its direction determined by the final use or placement of the main mass and its overall shape.

(c) Locate zone of enrichment.

(c) Identify the area for enhancement.

(d) Locate point of concentration in the zone of enrichment and in the inceptive axis.

(d) Find the focal point in the enhancement area and along the initial axis.

(e) Design simple contour enrichment.

(e) Design simple contour enhancements.

(f) Design leading lines in sympathy with the contour and leading toward the point of concentration.

(f) Create leading lines that align with the shape and guide attention toward the focal point.

(g) Elaborate the leading lines in sympathy with the material, the type of enrichment, the contours, and the inceptive axis.

(g) Develop the main lines to complement the material, the type of enhancement, the shapes, and the initial axis.

(h) Render in the technical manner suggested by Plate 52, dimension the primary mass, and otherwise prepare the drawing for shop use.

(h) Produce the drawing using the technical method recommended by __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, dimension the main part, and prepare the drawing for shop use.

Courtesy of the Elverhoj Colony

Thanks to the Elverhoj Colony

Figure 401a.—Pendants

Figure 401a.—Earrings

[175]

Courtesy of the Elverhoj Colony

Thanks to the Elverhoj Colony

Figure 402.—Pendants

Figure 402.—Earrings

SUGGESTED PROBLEM

Design a built-up ring using an elliptical cabochon cut stone as the point of concentration. The inceptive axis is vertical.

Design a ring featuring an elliptical cabochon cut stone as the main focus. The starting axis is vertical.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Small Flat Planes

Small Flat Planes

Rule 10a. Designs in precious metals should call for the minimum amount of metal necessary to express the idea of the designer for two reasons: (1) good taste; (2) economy of material.

Rule 10a. When working with precious metals, use the least amount necessary to express the designer's vision for two reasons: (1) good taste; (2) materials should be cost-effective.

Rule 10b. Contour and surface enrichment should never appear to compete for attention in the same design.

Rule 10b. Contour and surface enhancements should not compete for attention within the same design.

Rule 10c. Parts of a design differing in function should differ in appearance but be co-ordinated with the entire design.

Rule 10c. Different functional parts of a design should differ in appearance but still coordinate with the overall design.

Rule 10d. Surface enrichment should at some point parallel the contours of both primary mass and point of concentration, especially whenever the latter is a stone or enamel.

Rule 10d. Surface embellishments should ultimately follow the contours of both the main body and the focal point, especially when that point is a stone or enamel.

Rule 10e. In the presence of either stone or enamel as a point of concentration, surface enrichment should be regarded as an unobtrusive setting, or background.

Rule 10e. If a stone or enamel is the focal point, surface embellishments should act as a subtle setting or background.

Rule 10f. Stone or enamel used as a point of concentration should form contrast with the metal, either in color, brilliancy, or value, or all three combined.

Rule 10f. The stone or enamel as the focal point should contrast with the metal in terms of color, brightness, value, or a combination of all three.

Rule 10g. The inceptive axis should pass through and coincide with one axis of a stone, and at the same time be sympathetically related to the structure.

Rule 10g. The starting axis should align with one axis of the stone and be harmoniously connected to the overall structure.

Rule 10h. The position of the inceptive axis should be determined by (1) use of the project as ring, pendant, or bar pin, (2) character of the primary mass as either vertical or horizontal in proportion.

Rule 10h. The orientation of the starting axis should depend on (1) how the piece will be used as a ring, pendant, or bar pin, (2) whether the main body is primarily vertical or horizontal.

Rule 10i. Caution should be exercised with regard to the use of enamel. Over-decoration by this material tends to cheapen both process and design.

Rule 10i. Use enamel carefully. Overusing it can make both the process and design appear cheap.

Rules 10a to m: Surface Enrichment of Small Flat Planes of Precious Metal. IA=Inceptive Axis. Instruction Sheet

Plate 57

Plate 57

Rule 10j. All surface enrichment should have an appearance of compactness or unity. Pierced spots or areas should be so used as to avoid the appearance of having been scattered on the surface without thought to their coherence.

Rule 10j. All surface embellishments should appear neat and cohesive. Any holes or gaps should be arranged to avoid looking randomly scattered across the surface.

Rule 10k. Built, carved, and chased enrichment should have the higher planes near the point of concentration. It is well to have the stone as the highest point above the primary mass. When using this form of enrichment the stone should never appear to rise abruptly from the primary mass, but should be approached by a series of rising planes.

Rule 10k. Built, carved, and chased details should be placed on elevated areas near the focal point. Ideally, the stone should be the highest point above the main body. When using this type of detail, the stone should gradually rise from the main body through a series of stepped planes, rather than appearing to jut out suddenly.

Rule 10l. The lanes or margins between enameled spots should be narrower than the lane or margin between the enamel and the contour of the primary mass.

Rule 10l. The gaps or edges between enameled areas should be smaller than the space or margin between the enamel and the edge of the main shape.

Rule 10m. Transparent and opaque stones or enamel should not be used in the same design.

Rule 10m. Opaque and solid stones or enamel shouldn't be used together in the same design.

Postulate.—The design should conform to the limitations and requirements of tools, processes, and materials, and should be durable and suitable for service.

Postulate.—The design must comply with the limitations and requirements of tools, processes, and materials, and should be durable and suitable for use.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What is often used as a point of concentration in the surface enrichment of precious metals? Why?

1. What is typically used as a focal point for the surface embellishment of precious metals? Why?

2. State direction of the inceptive axis for problems similar to: (a) tie pins, (b) pendants, (c) fobs, (d) rings, (e) bar pins? Why? Under what grouping of planes may they be placed?

2. What direction should the starting axis take for designs such as: (a) tie pins, (b) pendants, (c) fobs, (d) rings, (e) bar pins? Why? What category of planes can they be grouped into?

3. State the relation between the point of concentration and the inceptive axis.

3. Explain the relationship between the focal point and the starting axis.

4. Give three steps in the design evolution of surface enrichment for small flat planes.

4. List three steps in the design process for enhancing the surfaces of small flat areas.

5. Describe briefly eleven decorative processes for the surface enrichment of precious metals with the technical rendering of each.

5. Briefly describe eleven decorative techniques for enhancing the surfaces of precious metals, including the technical specifics for each.

6. Illustrate examples of dependent contour and dependent surface enrichment of precious metals.

6. Provide examples of dependent contour and dependent surface enrichment of precious metals.

7. Where should a stone in a design similar to a pin or brooch be placed with reference to the inceptive axis and the geometric center of the primary mass?

7. How should a stone be positioned in a design like a pin or brooch in relation to the starting axis and the geometric center of the main body?

8. Illustrate manner of planning primary mass, inceptive axis, point of concentration, contour, and surface enrichment of: (a) pins, (b) fobs, (c) rings, (d) pendants and chains.

8. Illustrate how to plan the main layout, starting point, focal area, outline, and overall enhancement for: (a) pins, (b) fobs, (c) rings, (d) pendants and chains.

9. State the relation of stone or enamel to metal.

9. Discuss the relationship of stone or enamel to metal.

10. What rule should govern the amount of metal used in a design?

10. What guideline should determine the amount of metal used in a design?

11. State the objection to a design with contour and surface enrichment equally elaborated.

11. Present the argument against a design that fully develops both contour and surface details.

12. Is it possible to vary the design motive of a chain from that of a pendant? Why and how?

12. Can the design of a chain differ from that of a pendant? Why and how?

13. Give illustration and requirements of a good design in champleve enamel.

13. Provide examples and standards for effective design in champlevé enamel.

14. What precautions should be exercised in designing pierced enrichment?

14. What precautions should be observed when designing pierced embellishment?

15. What rules should be observed in designing a built-up or carved design?

15. What guidelines should be followed when creating a built-up or carved design?

[178] Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses in Precious Metals. Treatment of Flat and Semi-flat Surfaces.

Plate 58

Plate 58


Chapter 14
SURFACE ENRICHMENT OF LARGE PRIMARY MASSES IN BASE AND PRECIOUS METALS

Enrichment for Small Areas

The surface enrichment of small, flat primary masses treated in Chapter XIII emphasized the designer's tendency for full surface enrichment of small areas. Such treatment has proved satisfactory because the eye can readily and immediately observe and comprehend or assimilate an enrichment upon a small area. For larger enriched areas considered in this chapter, full surface enrichment becomes a questionable policy for the following reasons.

The surface enhancement of small, flat primary shapes discussed in Chapter XIII highlighted the designer's tendency for full surface enhancement of small areas. This method has been effective because the eye can quickly and easily notice and understand or take in an enhancement on a small area. For larger enhanced areas addressed in this chapter, full surface enhancement becomes a questionable approach for the following reasons.

Enrichment for Large Areas

It is true that the old time craftsman with consummate skill fully enriched large surfaces, but two factors interfere with this mode of treatment today. The first factor is the decidedly practical nature of the problem. The service to which the modern industrial project is put interferes with the use of full surface enrichment. The second is the lack of skill on the part of the modern amateur designer. It is a sound policy to avoid the ornateness that frequently accompanies a large and unskillfully planned area. In place of this, we should limit the enrichment of large masses to a few salient areas which are well related to the structural lines.

It's true that the skilled craftsmen of the past beautifully decorated large surfaces, but two factors affect this approach today. The first factor is the practical nature of the issue. The function of modern industrial projects makes it difficult to use full surface decoration. The second factor is the lack of skill among today's amateur designers. It's wise to steer clear of the embellishments that often come with a large and poorly planned area. Instead, we should focus on enhancing large sections with a few key areas that are well connected to the structural lines.

Rule 11b. Conservative application should mark the use of surface enrichment of large masses. Its use should: (1) lighten or soften necessarily heavy construction; (2) support or apparently strengthen good structure; (3) add interest to large unbroken and uninteresting surfaces.

Rule 11b. The use of surface enrichment for large masses should be approached conservatively. Its application should: (1) reduce or soften overly heavy construction; (2) support or seem to reinforce solid structures; (3) introduce visual interest to large, plain, and unexciting surfaces.

Essentials of Good Surface Enrichment

These salient areas should determine the surface enrichment appropriate to the structure, so that the enrichment: (1) will lighten or soften necessarily heavy construction as in Figure 403; (2) support or apparently strengthen good structure, Figure 413; (3) add interest to large unbroken or otherwise uninteresting surfaces as illustrated in Figure 405. To aid in producing the desired results, we have the technical processes mentioned in Chapter XIII as follows: (1) Piercing;[180] (2) Etching; (3) Chasing; (4) Enameling; (5) Inlaying; (6) Stone setting; (7) Building; (8) Carving; (9) Planishing; (10) Frosting; (11) Oxidizing. On the plates for this chapter, the figure generally following the cut number refers to the process, as: Figure 446, 3.

These important areas should guide the surface enrichment suitable for the structure, so that the enrichment: (1) will lighten or soften the necessarily heavy construction like in Figure 403; (2) support or seemingly strengthen a good structure, Figure 413; (3) add interest to large, uninterrupted, or otherwise plain surfaces as shown in Figure 405. To help achieve the desired results, we have the technical processes mentioned in Chapter XIII as follows: (1) Piercing;[180] (2) Etching; (3) Chasing; (4) Enameling; (5) Inlaying; (6) Stone setting; (7) Building; (8) Carving; (9) Planishing; (10) Frosting; (11) Oxidizing. On the plates for this chapter, the number that typically follows the cut number refers to the process, as: Figure 446, 3.

Figure 406a.—Mainly Objects Designed to be Seen from Above

Figure 406a.—Mainly Objects Meant to be Viewed from Above

Surface Design Evolution

Rule 11a. The preliminary steps toward surface enrichment should be thought out before they are drawn.

Rule 11a. The initial steps for improving the surface should be carefully considered before they are taken.

A designer will be materially helped if he devotes a few moments of thought to his design problem before he applies the pencil to the paper. In the end the time given to thinking out his problem will gain for him both increased excellence of design and rapidity of execution, provided his thinking is systematic. A sequential order of points to be observed is given below. The object of systematic thought is to form a mental picture of the enrichment to be in full accord with the materials and construction and to be sympathetically related to the structural axes and to the contours. The unenriched mass has been designed and we are now ready for the consideration of surface enrichment in the following order.

A designer will benefit significantly if he takes a few moments to think about his design problem before picking up a pencil. In the end, the time spent thinking through the issue will lead to better design quality and faster execution, as long as his thought process is organized. Below is a sequential list of points to consider. The goal of systematic thinking is to create a mental image of how the enhancements will align with the materials and construction, and to relate harmoniously to the structural axes and contours. The basic structure has been designed, and we are now ready to look at surface enhancements in the following order.

Summary of Steps in Surface Enrichment

(a) Placing the Zone of Service.

Setting the Service Zone.

1. Where is the zone of service?

1. Where is the service area?

(b) Classification of Form.

Classification of Form

1. Is the object flat, shallow and circular, low and cylindrical, high and cylindrical?

1. Is the object flat, shallow and round, low and cylindrical, or tall and cylindrical?

(c) Placing the Zone of Enrichment.

Placing the Enrichment Zone.

1. Is the enrichment to be seen from above or from the side? See Figure 406a.

1. Can the enrichment be observed from above or from the side? Check Figure 406a.

2. What point of the structure suggested by the form needs surface enrichment? Is it the primary mass, appendages, terminals, links, or details? Let the area selected become the zone of enrichment.

2. Which part of the structure indicated by the form needs enhancement? Is it the main mass, appendages, terminals, links, or details? Let the chosen area become the focus for enhancement.

(d) Amount of Enrichment.

Amount of Enrichment.

1. Will the enrichment cover the full surface, part surface (center or margin), or accented outline?

1. Will the enrichment cover the entire surface, part of the surface (center or edge), or just the highlighted outline?

(e) Location of Inceptive Axis.

Location of Inceptive Axis.

1. Is the zone of enrichment associated with a square, rectangle, hexagon, or irregularly shaped flat plane, circular or cylindrical surface? Figure 470.

1. Is the area of enrichment linked to a square, rectangle, hexagon, or an oddly shaped flat surface, circular or cylindrical surface? Figure 470.

2. How should the inceptive axis be placed in the zone of enrichment to harmonize with the structural forms suggested by 1 (e) and the point from which it is viewed 1 (c)? See the violation of this latter point in Figure 439. Presumably this inceptive axis will be a vertical center line, horizontal center line, diagonal, diameter, radius, the element of a cylinder, or a dynamic curve for a free border.

2. How should the starting axis be positioned in the enrichment area to match the structural shapes indicated by 1 (e) and the viewpoint from which it's seen 1 (c)? Check the breach of this last point in Figure 439. It’s likely that this starting axis will be a vertical center line, horizontal center line, diagonal, diameter, radius, part of a cylinder, or a dynamic curve for a free border.

(f) Point of Concentration.

Focus Point.

Surface Enrichment

1. Where should the point of concentration be located upon the inceptive axis?

1. Where should the focus be placed on the starting axis?

(g) Unison of Enrichment and Materials.

Enrichment and Materials Unison.

1. What decorative process will be adaptable to service, the material, and the contemplated design?

1. What decorative process will work well with the service, the material, and the planned design?

[182] Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses in Base Metals. Treatment of Flat and Semi-flat Surfaces.

Courtesy of P. and F. Corbin

Courtesy of P. and F. Corbin

Plate 59

Plate 59

Summary of Steps in Surface Enrichment

(h) Type of Units.

Type of Units

1. What design units are suited to the process selected in (g), appropriate to the texture and structural lines of the form to be enriched and to its ultimate service? Choice may be made from nature, geometric pattern, or historic ornament.

1. What design elements are best suited for the process chosen in (g), considering the texture and structural lines of the form that needs enhancement and its final purpose? Options can be drawn from nature, geometric patterns, or historical decorations.

The above points may all be thought out. Now, with some assurance, the designer may take his pencil and begin to draw the units in their proper position upon or about the inceptive axis with the point of concentration correctly placed in position in the inceptive axis. Rules and suggestions for this execution have been previously given.

The points mentioned above can all be considered. Now, with some confidence, the designer can take their pencil and start to sketch the units in their correct positions along or around the starting axis, ensuring the focal point is correctly placed on the starting axis. Guidelines and tips for this process have already been provided.

(i) Designing of the Units.

Designing the Units

1. How should the units be drawn to be in harmony with the inceptive axis, the contours, and to each other?

1. How should the units be designed to align with the starting axis, the shapes, and with one another?

The above points of approach to surface enrichment represent a logical reasoning process which supplies a line of sequential and developmental pictures that will reduce to a minimum the element of doubt and fog through which the average designer approaches his problem. The steps will, in time, become practically automatic and may be thought out in a surprisingly short period of time.

The points mentioned above for improving surfaces represent a logical reasoning process that provides a clear sequence of ideas to minimize uncertainty and confusion that the average designer faces when tackling a problem. Over time, these steps will become almost automatic and can be worked through in a surprisingly short amount of time.

Rule 11c. The type of design unit for large masses should be bolder than similar designs for small primary masses.

Rule 11c. The design unit type for large masses should be bolder than similar designs for small primary masses.

Large Masses and Their Treatment

As may be expected from briefly considering the illustrations for this chapter as compared with those for small primary masses, Chapter XIII, it is seen that the units for base and precious metals are larger and bolder than those used for smaller masses. The more effective designs are those whose appropriateness, simplicity, and correct structural proportions and relations appeal to our sense of fitness and beauty.

As you might expect from looking at the illustrations for this chapter compared to those for small primary masses, Chapter XIII, it's clear that the units for base and precious metals are larger and more striking than those for smaller masses. The most effective designs are the ones that resonate with our sense of fitness and beauty through their appropriateness, simplicity, and correct structural proportions and relationships.

[184] Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses in Base Metal. Treatment of Flat Planes in Cast Bronze.

Door Plates, Courtesy of P. and F. Corbin

Door Plates, courtesy of P. and F. Corbin

Plate 60

Plate 60

Large Flat and Semi-flat Surfaces in Precious Metal, Plate 58

Figures 403, 404, and 406 are composed of projects designed mainly on vertical inceptive axes or center lines. The freely balanced natural units in Figure 403 have the zone of enrichment in the upper portion of the appendage (handles), and the point of concentration in the upper portion of the zone of enrichment. Formal symmetrical balance controls the placing of enrichment in Figure 404. Initial letters, through lack of consideration of design principles, are frequently [185] misplaced on masses with little or no consideration given to their mass relations with the structural contours. As a contrast to this, notice the carefully considered relations between the letter W on the tea strainer in Figure 404 and its adaptation to the contours of the appendage. The stone enrichment on the handle of the paper cutter in Figure 404 in no way interferes with its use as a cutter and is therefore appropriate as surface enrichment.

Figures 403, 404, and 406 are made up of projects primarily designed along vertical axes or center lines. The naturally balanced units in Figure 403 have an enrichment area at the top of the handles, with a concentration point also located at the upper part of that area. A formal symmetrical balance guides the placement of enrichment in Figure 404. Initial letters are often poorly placed on mass elements, with minimal consideration for their relationship to the structural shapes. In contrast, take a look at the thoughtfully designed relationship between the letter W on the tea strainer in Figure 404 and how it fits the contours of the handle. The stone decoration on the handle of the paper cutter in Figure 404 does not hinder its function as a cutter, making it a suitable surface decoration.

The pierced enrichment of the silver box in Figure 405 contains vertical and horizontal lines which bring the decorative human figures into harmonious relation with the structural contours. Figure 406 shows both formal and free balance with center and full surface zones of enrichment. C and D could have been improved by a more strongly marked point of concentration which would have added more character to the designs.

The detailed decoration of the silver box in Figure 405 features vertical and horizontal lines that connect the decorative human figures with the overall shape. Figure 406 displays both structured and relaxed balance with center and full surface areas of decoration. C and D could have been enhanced with a more defined focal point that would have given the designs more character.

Flat and Semi-flat Surfaces in Base Metal, Plate 59

In Chapter VIII, the contour terminal enrichment problem was described at some length. Many illustrations on Plates 58, 59, and 60 are, in a way, similar in their type of surface decoration, which is termed surface terminal enrichment. The "happy ending" mentioned in Chapter VIII as a suitable means of terminating the contour of a long primary mass or appendage may be similarly treated by suitable surface enrichment, particularly shown in Figures 403, 404, 407, 408, 409, and 410. The terminal is quite common as a zone of enrichment.

In Chapter VIII, the contour terminal enrichment issue was discussed in detail. Many examples on Plates 58, 59, and 60 are somewhat similar in their type of surface decoration, which is called surface terminal enrichment. The "happy ending" mentioned in Chapter VIII as a fitting way to finish the contour of a long main mass or limb can also be approached with appropriate surface enrichment, particularly highlighted in Figures 403, 404, 407, 408, 409, and 410. The terminal is quite common as an area of enrichment.

Contour Versus Surface Enrichment

It is readily seen that when surface enrichment is the prevailing decorative theme it becomes necessary to subordinate contour enrichment to it, Rule 10b, otherwise the strife for dominance arising between these two forms of enrichment will lead to poor and ornate design, Figure 417. Whatever contour enrichment is used must be chosen to accord with the surface enrichment, Rule 10d, as noted in the preceding figures and in Figure 411. Here we find the closest connection, as the chased forms of the surface at many points merge into the contour. Thus surface and contour are bound together in unity with the surface enrichment, which maintains its dominance throughout.

It’s clear that when surface enrichment is the main decorative theme, contour enrichment needs to take a backseat to it, Rule 10b. Otherwise, the struggle for dominance between these two types of enrichment will result in a poorly designed and overly ornate look, Figure 417. Any contour enrichment used must align with the surface enrichment, Rule 10d, as mentioned in the previous figures and in Figure 411. Here, we see a strong connection, as the shaped forms of the surface often blend into the contour. This way, surface and contour are united, with surface enrichment staying dominant throughout.

Surface Enrichment of Hardware, Plate 60

The simple and dignified treatment of the fire set in Figure 413 is synonymous with the finest type of enrichment for service and beauty, Rule 11b. The peacock motives of Figures 414 and 415[186] are applied to the desk set. The motives as used in this case are generally well adapted to their respective areas and inceptive axes.

The straightforward and elegant approach to the fire set in Figure 413 is equivalent to the best kind of enhancement for both function and aesthetics, Rule 11b. The peacock designs of Figures 414 and 415[186] are featured in the desk set. The designs used here are typically well-suited to their specific areas and starting points.

Rule 11f. Repulsive forms should not be introduced into surface enrichment.

Rule 11f. Unpleasant forms shouldn’t be included in surface enrichment.

Figure 417 is a typical example of over-ornamentation with the surface and contour enrichment struggling in deadly conflict for prominence. In the combat, the natural structural axis has been totally neglected for irrelevant and disconnected ornament. Figure 418 illustrates correctly related surface ornament, with a dominance of the latter form, Rule 10b. Figure 419 represents a type of decoration presumably roughened to meet the needs of service. It proves, however, to be unpleasant to the touch and unnecessary as the plain knob is preferable in every way. The naturalistic snake motive of Figure 421 is repulsive to many people; this and similar decorative motives should be avoided in preference to the more conventionalized pattern of Figure 422, Rule 11f.

Figure 417 is a typical example of excessive decoration, where the added details and the overall shape compete for attention in a harmful way. In this struggle, the natural structure has been completely overlooked in favor of unrelated and disjointed embellishments. Figure 418 shows appropriately related surface decoration, with the latter form being more dominant, Rule 10b. Figure 419 represents a type of decoration that seems to have been roughened for practical use. However, it turns out to be unpleasant to touch and unnecessary since a simple knob is better in every way. The lifelike snake design of Figure 421 is off-putting to many; such and similar decorative designs should be avoided in favor of the more conventional pattern of Figure 422, Rule 11f.

Rule 11e. Two periods of historic ornament should not be introduced into the same design.

Rule 11e. Don't mix two types of historic ornament in the same design.

Historic Ornament Applied to Period Hardware Design Door Plates

It is impossible to close these chapters without reference to the influence of the great schools of architectural history upon contemporary design. There is a growing tendency for manufacturers to use period patterns in house decorations which correspond to the design of the building. A Colonial building frequently calls for Colonial hardware, a Gothic church for corresponding surface enrichment of that period.

It is impossible to close these chapters without mentioning the impact of major schools of architectural history on modern design. There's an increasing trend for manufacturers to incorporate period patterns in home decor that match the design of the building. A Colonial-style building often requires Colonial hardware, while a Gothic church needs corresponding surface embellishments from that era.

As introductory illustrations, Figure 423 stands as a simple example of accented (beveled) contour while Figure 424 has been accented with reminiscent moulding appropriate to Colonial architecture. They might, however, be used with many simply designed articles of furniture. From this slight indication or portion of a style, we have a more pronounced beginning in Figure 425 with its clearly marked Greek egg and dart ornamental border. The acanthus leaf of the Byzantine school, Figure 426, changes to the geometric arabesques of the Moorish school in Figure 427. The Gothic arch, cusps, and quatrefoil of Figure 428 are changed to the classic acanthus foliage of the French Renaissance period. Figure 429. Figures 430 and 431 are later developments of the Renaissance. The heavily[187] enriched Flemish pattern completes our illustrations of the use of past forms of ornamentation applied to modern designs. Only a small number from a rapidly enlarging field of period design are shown.

As introductory examples, Figure 423 serves as a straightforward instance of accented (beveled) contour, while Figure 424 is enhanced with molding that reflects Colonial architecture. However, they can also be applied to many simply designed furniture pieces. From this brief glimpse of a style, we get a more defined example in Figure 425 with its distinct Greek egg and dart decorative border. The acanthus leaf of the Byzantine style, Figure 426, transitions to the geometric arabesques of the Moorish style in Figure 427. The Gothic arch, cusps, and quatrefoil of Figure 428 evolve into the classic acanthus foliage from the French Renaissance period. Figure 429. Figures 430 and 431 are later developments of the Renaissance. The richly ornate Flemish pattern wraps up our examples of how past ornamentation styles are integrated into modern designs. Only a handful from a swiftly expanding range of period designs are showcased.

Shallow Circular Forms, Plate 61

With circular plates and trays, the enrichment normally takes the form of a border (marginal enrichment), with the inceptive axes or center lines of the repeated units radiating from the center of the circle. Figures 433, 435, 436, 437, 438, and 439. An elliptical form frequently calls for handles and terminal enrichment as shown by Figure 434.

With round plates and trays, the enrichment usually appears as a border (marginal enrichment), with the starting axes or center lines of the repeated units radiating from the center of the circle. Figures 433, 435, 436, 437, 438, and 439. An oval shape often requires handles and end enrichments as demonstrated by Figure 434.

Both Figures 437 and 438 have divided points of concentration and would be materially improved by the omission of the center unit A. The small tree used as a connecting link in the border of Figure 437 should be reversed, as it now possesses a motion or growth contrary to the larger tree units. The contour enrichment in Figure 438 could well be omitted or moved around to support the surface enrichment. The pierced enrichment A, Figure 439, is incorrectly used as it is not designed to be seen from above, the normal viewpoint of the tray. The design should have been based upon the horizontal axis of the project similar to Figure 439 at B.

Both Figures 437 and 438 have focused areas that would be significantly better without the center unit A. The small tree that connects the border of Figure 437 should be flipped, as it currently grows in a direction opposite to the larger trees. The contour enhancement in Figure 438 could be removed or rearranged to better complement the surface enhancement. The pierced enhancement A, Figure 439, is being used incorrectly since it’s not meant to be viewed from above, which is the usual perspective of the tray. The design should have followed the horizontal axis of the project, similar to Figure 439 at B.

Low Cylindrical Forms, Plate 62

Differing from the shallow plate, with the increased height of the low cylindrical forms of Plate 62, there now develops the possibility of enriching the sides of this class of project: a zone of enrichment not readily accessible in the shallow plate form. In addition to the sides there remain the appendages, quite capable of carrying enrichment to advantage. One should control the zone of enrichment in such a manner that the attention will not be equally drawn to both appendage and primary mass. Two points of enrichment, both calling for equal attention, divide the interest in the problem, and cause a lack of unity or oneness.

Unlike the shallow plate, the taller cylindrical shapes of Plate 62 create opportunities to enhance the sides of this type of project—something that's not easily done with the shallow plate design. Besides the sides, there are also appendages that can effectively carry enhancements. It's important to manage the enhancement zone so that attention isn't drawn equally to both the appendage and the main structure. When there are two points of enrichment vying for equal attention, it splits the interest in the project and disrupts its unity or cohesiveness.

Rule 11d. The eye should be attracted to one principal zone of enrichment, whether located upon the primary mass, appendage, terminals, links, or details. All other zones should be subordinate to this area.

Rule 11d. Your focus should be drawn to one main area of interest, whether it's on the primary mass, appendage, terminals, links, or details. All other areas should play a supporting role to this focal point.

[188] Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses in Base and Precious Metal. Treatment of Shallow Circular Forms.

Plate 61

Plate 61

[189] Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses in Base and Precious Metal. Treatment of Low Circular Forms.

Plate 62

Plate 62

[190] Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses in Base and Precious Metals. Treatment of High Cylindrical Forms.

Plate 63

Plate 63

Enrichment upon the appendages may be found in Figures 440, 441, 442, 445, and on the upper portion of the straight sides of the primary mass in Figures 443 and 444. The decorative units composing [191] the border on these straight sides are designed upon the vertical element of the underlying cylindrical form as the inceptive axis. The enrichment for the appendage is well related to the contour of that member and is commonly based upon the center line of the appendage.

Enrichment on the appendages can be found in Figures 440, 441, 442, 445, and on the upper part of the straight sides of the main mass in Figures 443 and 444. The decorative units that make up the border on these straight sides are designed based on the vertical element of the underlying cylindrical shape as the starting axis. The embellishment for the appendage is closely related to its contour and is usually based on the center line of the appendage.

Cylindrical Forms, Plate 63

The principles of enriching these higher cylindrical forms in many ways closely parallel those which govern the lower cylindrical forms. The inceptive axes of the decoration on the two vases of Figures 446 and 447 may be readily analyzed as vertical elements of the cylinder. Figures 448 and 449 are quite rare exceptions of the accentuation of the vertical lines of the cylinder. Horizontal bands similar to Figures 444 and 447 are more common interpretations of cylinder enrichment. Figure 450 marks a successful combination of two dissimilar materials with the shade (appendage) as the dominating enriched member. Rule 10c.

The principles for enhancing these taller cylindrical shapes are very similar to those for the shorter ones. The main design elements of the two vases in Figures 446 and 447 can easily be understood as vertical features of the cylinder. Figures 448 and 449 are rare examples that emphasize the vertical lines of the cylinder. Horizontal bands like Figures 444 and 447 are more typical ways to enhance cylinders. Figure 450 shows a successful blend of two different materials, with the shade (appendage) being the main decorative element. Rule 10c.

The small chased bosses used as enrichment in Figure 452 are re-echoed on the several pieces of the set which binds them into collective unity. The top portion of the primary mass seems to need some form of enrichment, as the contour adds little to the beauty of that part. The symbol X could have been better located by being moved to that place. The point of concentration should be placed in the upper portion of a large mass whenever that arrangement is possible.

The small chased bosses used as decoration in Figure 452 are reflected in the various pieces of the set that connect them into a unified whole. The top part of the main piece seems to require some kind of embellishment, as its shape doesn't enhance the beauty of that section. The symbol X could have been better positioned if it were moved there. The focal point should be placed in the upper part of a large piece whenever that layout is achievable.

It is in every way desirable that all designs should be executed full size and in full accord with the requirements of a shop working drawing. In addition the technical rendering suggested in Chapter XIII should be carefully used in each drawing.

It is absolutely essential that all designs are created at full size and in complete accordance with the standards of a shop working drawing. Additionally, the technical rendering recommended in Chapter XIII should be meticulously applied in each drawing.

INSTRUCTION SHEET

Plates 68 and 72 show problems suitable for class presentation. The method of development is similar to that presented on Plate 52.

Plates __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ highlight issues suitable for class presentations. The development method resembles what’s illustrated on __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Draw a primary mass with reference to its proper grouping as follows:

(a) Start by drawing a main shape, keeping its proper grouping in mind as follows:

For flat areas draw square, rectangle, etc.

For flat areas, draw squares, rectangles, etc.

For shallow circular forms draw a circle.

For shallow circular shapes, draw a circle.

For low cylindrical forms draw a rectangle with horizontal proportions.

For low cylindrical shapes, draw a rectangle with horizontal dimensions.

For high cylindrical forms draw a rectangle with vertical proportions.

For tall cylindrical shapes, draw a rectangle with vertical dimensions.

(b) Locate zone of service.

(b) Identify the service zone.

(c) Locate zone of enrichment: appendages, terminals, margins, full surface, etc.

(c) Pinpoint the enriched areas: appendages, terminals, edges, entire surfaces, etc.

(d) Determine amount of enrichment.

(d) Determine the level of enrichment needed.

(e) Locate inceptive axes.

(e) Identify the initial axes.

(f) Place point of concentration in the inceptive axis where it traverses the zone of enrichment.

(f) Position the focal point along the starting axis where it intersects the enriched area.

(g) Select the decorative process suited to the material and contemplated motive.

(g) Select the decorative technique that suits the material and intended design.

(h) Draw leading lines toward the point of concentration.

(h) Draw guiding lines towards the focal point.

(i) Draw conventionalized design motives based upon the leading lines, converging toward the point of concentration. Vary the contours to be sympathetically related to these design motives, provided such variation of the original primary mass is necessary to complete unity.

(i) Create standardized design patterns based on the guiding lines converging at the focal point. Adjust the shapes to align well with these design patterns, making sure any changes to the original main shape are necessary for achieving overall unity.

(j) Add additional views, dimension, and otherwise prepare the drawing for shop use.

(j) Add additional views, dimensions, and prepare the drawing for shop use.

SUGGESTED PROBLEM

Design a copper nut bowl and spoon. Enrich with a chased border appropriate to the subject. Enrich spoon, using fitting method of enrichment. The bowl and spoon should have a harmonious relation.

Design a copper nut bowl and spoon. Include a decorative chased border that matches the theme. Enhance the spoon with an appropriate technique. The bowl and spoon should complement each other well.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses

Surface Enrichment of Large Primary Masses

Rule 11a. The preliminary steps toward surface enrichment should be thought out before they are drawn.

Rule 11a. Plan the initial steps for surface enrichment before carrying them out.

Rule 11b. Conservative application should mark the use of surface enrichment of large masses. Its use should: (1) lighten or soften necessarily heavy construction; (2) support or apparently strengthen good structure; (3) add interest to large unbroken and uninteresting surfaces.

Rule 11b. Apply surface enrichment on large masses carefully. Its use should: (1) reduce the weight or soften the appearance of inherently heavy construction; (2) provide support or give the impression of strengthening a solid structure; (3) create visual interest on large, flat, and plain surfaces.

Rule 11c. The type of design unit for large masses should be bolder than similar designs for small primary masses.

Rule 11c. The design for large masses should be more striking than for smaller primary masses.

Rule 11d. The eye should be attracted to one principal zone of enrichment, whether located upon the primary mass, appendage, terminal, links, or details. All other zones should be subordinate to this area.

Rule 11d. Focus on one main area of interest, whether it's the main body, an extension, the endpoint, connections, or specific details. All other areas should support this focal point.

Rule 11e. Two periods of historic ornament should not be introduced into the same design.

Rule 11e. Avoid mixing two periods of historic ornament in the same design.

Rule 11f. Repulsive forms should not be introduced into surface enrichment.

Rule 11f. Do not use unattractive forms in surface enrichment.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Contrast the method of enriching large and small areas of base and precious metals. Illustrate. What is the character of surface enrichment for large areas?

1. Compare the methods used to enrich large and small areas of base and precious metals. Provide examples. What is the nature of surface enrichment for larger areas?

2. Name three essentials to good surface design for base and precious metals. Illustrate each.

2. Identify three key elements for effective surface design for base and precious metals. Provide examples for each.

3. Give nine steps necessary for the complete evolution of surface enrichment.

3. List the nine steps required for the complete development of surface enrichment.

4. Name method of classifying the structural forms of metal into four groups. How does this compare with the classification of clay forms?

4. State the method of classifying the structural forms of metal into four groups. How does this compare to classifying clay forms?

5. Between which two groups does the transition from a horizontal to a vertical primary mass occur?

5. Which two groups mark the transition from a horizontal to a vertical primary mass?

6. Is there a perceptible change in the surface enrichment paralleling this change in proportions of the primary mass?

6. Is there a noticeable change in the surface enrichment that corresponds with this change in the proportions of the primary mass?

7. In which group or groups is the relation between surface and contour enrichment closest?

7. In which group or groups is the relationship between surface and contour enhancement the strongest?

8. Give the characteristics of surface enrichment designed for flat or semi-flat planes.

8. List the characteristics of surface enrichment designed for flat or semi-flat surfaces.

9. State the value of the terminal as an enrichment zone.

9. What is the value of the terminal as a resourceful area?

10. Discuss common errors in the surface enrichment of hardware and their correction.

10. Discuss common mistakes in the surface enhancement of hardware and how to correct them.

11. In what manner does historic ornament influence industrial design? Why?

11. How does historic ornament influence industrial design? Why?

12. Give characteristics of surface enrichment designed for, (a) large, shallow circular forms; (b) large, low cylindrical forms; (c) large, high cylindrical forms.

12. Describe features of surface enrichment meant for: (a) large, shallow circular shapes; (b) large, low cylindrical shapes; (c) large, tall cylindrical shapes.

13. How does the point from which the article is to be seen affect the character of the design?

13. How does the angle from which the item is viewed influence the design's character?


Chapter 15
COLOR: HUE, VALUE, AND CHROMA; STAINS

Need of Harmonious Color

In the previous chapters we have developed problems dealing with proportions, contours, and surface enrichment. The use of color, particularly in surface enrichment, is equally important inasmuch as its use is often necessary to bring the project, as for example a piece of furniture, into harmony with the surroundings which furnish its final color environment. The incorrect use of color may seriously mar a project otherwise correctly designed in line and form, and may also weaken its influence in a particular setting.

In the previous chapters, we explored issues related to proportions, shapes, and enhancing surfaces. The use of color, especially in surface enhancement, is just as important since it's often needed to make the project, like a piece of furniture, blend well with its surroundings that provide its final color scheme. Using color incorrectly can seriously detract from a project that is otherwise well-designed in terms of lines and shapes, and it can also diminish its impact in a specific setting.

Use of Color Systems

While there are a number of excellent systems of color notation, it is well to bear in mind that a color system, however excellent, is a good servant but a poor master. It is nevertheless considered as essential to have a definite knowledge of some systematically developed color system in order that we may methodically apply color to the structural form with some degree of certainty.

While there are several great color notation systems, it's important to remember that a color system, no matter how good, is a helpful tool but a poor guide. That said, having a clear understanding of a well-developed color system is essential so we can systematically apply color to the structural form with a reasonable level of confidence.

Color Pigments for Design Rendering

For rendering drawings of problems involving the use of color it is suggested that the beginner use the tempera, or opaque colors now on the market. These colors readily adapt themselves to the average problem, while their rich hues are more successful than those produced from the ordinary water colors. Tubes of cobalt blue, ultramarine, light chrome yellow, vermilion, emerald green, crimson madder, black, and white will serve to solve the problems demanded by this chapter.

For making drawings of problems that involve color, it's recommended that beginners use tempera or the opaque colors available today. These colors easily work for most projects, and their vibrant shades are better than those from regular watercolors. Tubes of cobalt blue, ultramarine, light chrome yellow, vermilion, emerald green, crimson madder, black, and white will be useful for the challenges discussed in this chapter.

Application of Pigment

Rendering of Wood Stains

White is used to lighten and black to darken the pigments, which should be mixed with water to the consistency of cream, and applied to cover well the surface of the paper. One should guard against a thin, transparent wash, as the desired effect is a velvety opaque and evenly tinted surface only possible with the thick application of color. The pigment will dry out about one-quarter lighter than when first applied. The usual school color box of three pigments is useful for rendering wood stains. These pigments may be used in [195] thin flat washes and will exhibit a transparent effect analogous to the effect of a wood stain. The natural color of wood may be first represented and, when dry, followed by a second thin wash of the hue of the wood stain.

White is used to lighten and black to darken the pigments, which should be mixed with water until it’s the consistency of cream and applied to thoroughly cover the surface of the paper. It's important to avoid a thin, transparent wash since the goal is to achieve a velvety opaque and evenly tinted surface, which can only be accomplished with a thick application of color. The pigment will dry about one-quarter lighter than when it’s first applied. The typical school color box with three pigments is helpful for creating wood stains. These pigments can be used in [195] thin flat washes and will produce a transparent effect similar to that of a wood stain. The natural color of wood can be represented first, and once dry, a second thin wash of the wood stain color can be applied.

Lacking as we are in a definite color nomenclature or standards, it now becomes necessary to describe the processes and define the terms necessary to the designer.

Lacking a clear color naming system or standards, it’s now essential to explain the processes and define the terms that a designer needs.

Hue and Hue Rectangles

Hue is the technical name for color; a change of color means a change of hue. For the designer's purposes we will select twelve equally graded colors or hues from the spectrum and term them standard hues. Each hue will have twenty-seven modifications or gradations, which is a sufficient number for our purpose. These gradations are to be graphically recorded by and contained in a diagram to be known as a hue rectangle. There are twelve of these rectangles, one for each of the selected hues, and they are found arranged in sequence in Figure 454.

Hue is the technical term for color; a change in color signifies a change in hue. For our design needs, we will choose twelve equally spaced colors or hues from the spectrum and call them standard hues. Each hue will have twenty-seven variations or gradations, which is enough for our needs. These gradations will be visually represented in a diagram known as a hue rectangle. There are twelve of these rectangles, one for each selected hue, and they are arranged in sequence in Figure 454.

Standard Hues

Full Chromatic Intensity

By referring to Figure 455, it is seen that the twelve selected standard hues are represented at what is termed full chromatic intensity, which, to the designer, means hues of the full strength of his color pigment. This is far short of the true color intensity of the spectrum, but for industrial arts purposes these hues are strong enough to serve as standards for comparison and classification. The hues should be evenly graded from red at the left to red violet at the right without noticeable unevenness in the gradations. Red violet is the link which connects the right end with the left, thus completing the circuit of the twelve hues. The following pigment table gives name and symbol of various hues.

By looking at Figure 455, you can see that the twelve chosen standard colors are shown at what is called full chromatic intensity. For the designer, this means colors at their full strength in pigment. While this falls short of the true intensity of the spectrum, these colors are vibrant enough to be used as standards for comparison and classification in industrial arts. The colors should be evenly graded from red on the left to red violet on the right without any noticeable gaps in the gradations. Red violet serves as the connection between the right and left ends, completing the circuit of the twelve colors. The following pigment table provides the name and symbol of various colors.

Approximate Related Standard Hues
HUESPIGMENTSVALUESSYMBOLS
RedPure crimson madderHigh darkR-HD
OrangeCrimson madder and vermilionMiddleOR-M
OrangeVermilion and light chrome yellowLow lightO-LL
Orange yellowVermilion and light chrome yellowLightOY-L
YellowPure light chrome yellowHigh lightY-HL
Yellow greenLight chrome yellow and emerald greenLightYG-L
GreenPure emerald greenLow lightG-LL
Green blueEmerald green and cobalt blueMiddleGB-M
BluePure cobalt blueHigh darkB-HD
Blue violetUltramarine and crimson madderDarkBV-D
VioletUltramarine and crimson madderLow darkV-LD
Red violetUltramarine and crimson madderDarkRV-D
Locating Standard Hues

It now becomes imperative to locate each standard hue at its definite place in each rectangle. This invariably occurs at a predetermined[196] point in the left vertical boundary of the rectangle of that hue. From inspection of Figure 455, it is quickly seen that violet seems to be the darkest hue; yellow the lightest, with the others between these hues. This variation of what is termed their value gives us a guide to their proper placing in the hue rectangle.

It’s now essential to find the exact location for each standard color in each rectangle. This always happens at a specific point on the left vertical edge of the rectangle for that color. By looking at Figure 455, it’s clear that violet appears to be the darkest color, while yellow is the lightest, with the others falling in between these two. This difference in what’s called their value helps us figure out their correct positions in the color rectangle.

Values and Horizontal Value Lines

Value is that quality by which we may distinguish a dark hue from a light one. For design purposes we will imagine the hue rectangle to grade from white at the top to black at the bottom. We will draw horizontal lines or steps across the rectangle, marking nine even value steps from white to black; the top one to be termed White (W), followed by High Light (HL); Light (L); Low Light (LL); Middle (M); High Dark (HD); Dark (D); Low Dark (LD); and Black (B). These value steps may be thought of as a scale of gray or neutral values descending the right boundary of the hue rectangle. They have been roughly indicated in the hue rectangle at the left of Figure 454.

Value is the characteristic that allows us to differentiate between a dark shade and a light one. For our design purposes, we'll visualize the hue rectangle as transitioning from white at the top to black at the bottom. We'll create horizontal lines or steps across the rectangle, marking nine equal value steps from white to black; the top one will be labeled White (W), followed by High Light (HL), Light (L), Low Light (LL), Middle (M), High Dark (HD), Dark (D), Low Dark (LD), and Black (B). These value steps can be seen as a scale of gray or neutral values descending the right boundary of the hue rectangle. They've been roughly indicated in the hue rectangle at the left of Figure 454.

Relation of the Standard Hue to the Hue Rectangle

Each standard hue may now be located in the left boundary of its hue rectangle and opposite its neutral gray equivalent in the right boundary. If the standard hue is accurately determined by the designer, it will be of exactly the same value as its gray equivalent given in the "value" column of the pigment table. The small arrows leading from Figure 455 to 454 show where four standard hues are located; the remaining hues are located in the left circle of each successive row in the remaining rectangles, and upon their respective value lines. Standard hues are expressed by the symbols in the right column of the pigment table.

Each standard color can now be found in the left boundary of its color rectangle, opposite its neutral gray equivalent on the right. If the designer accurately identifies the standard color, it will have the exact same value as its gray equivalent listed in the "value" column of the pigment table. The small arrows pointing from Figure 455 to 454 indicate where four standard colors are situated; the remaining colors are found in the left circle of each successive row in the other rectangles, along their respective value lines. Standard colors are represented by the symbols in the right column of the pigment table.

Tints

Each standard pigment or hue may be thinned with opaque white to lighten it, forming what is known as a tint of that hue. Red, in Figure 454, reaching its full chromatic intensity at the value High Dark, may be lightened four times before it ultimately arrives at white. Each step is to be considered as occurring in the left hand boundary of the rectangle above the standard hue, and is to be recorded by the symbols, R-M: R-LL: R-L: R-HL. Orange yellow has only one possible tint. Strawberry, light lavender, rose, etc., are merely nicknames for various tints.

Each standard pigment or color can be mixed with opaque white to make it lighter, which is called a tint of that color. Red, in Figure 454, reaches its full intensity at the value High Dark and can be lightened four times before it turns white. Each step is noted as happening along the left side of the rectangle above the standard color and is recorded with the symbols R-M: R-LL: R-L: R-HL. Orange yellow only has one possible tint. Names like strawberry, light lavender, and rose are just informal names for different tints.

Shades

Each standard hue may be darkened by the application of black, thus forming shades of that hue. Red is capable of producing two shades, R-D and R-LD, which are placed in the left boundary of the hue rectangle below the standard hue. Browns, russets, and dark tans are shades of different hues.

Each standard color can be darkened by adding black, creating different shades of that color. Red can produce two shades, R-D and R-LD, which are located at the left edge of the color rectangle below the standard color. Browns, russets, and dark tans are shades of various colors.

These modifications of the standard hues into tints and shades give to the designer simple variations of his too brilliant standards. But even these modifications are not sufficiently grayed for staining or painting large wood or wall surfaces. There is a brilliancy and glare about certain tints which require modification. The shades are safer for use on large areas. The remaining space in the interior of the hue rectangle is to be devoted to the last gradation of the standard hue.

These adjustments of the basic colors into lighter and darker variations provide the designer with simple alternatives to their overly bright colors. However, even these adjustments are not muted enough for staining or painting large wood or wall surfaces. Some tints have a brightness and glare that need to be toned down. The darker shades are a safer choice for large areas. The rest of the space in the color rectangle is meant for the final gradation of the standard color.

Chroma

Chroma is the strength of a color. It is the quality by which we distinguish a strong color from a weak one. The standard hue is approximately full chromatic intensity. Likewise each tint and shade is considered to be of its full chromatic intensity, making the left-hand boundary of the rectangle the area of full chroma.

Chroma is how intense a color is. It’s the quality that helps us tell apart a bold color from a faint one. The standard hue has about the maximum chromatic intensity. Similarly, each tint and shade is seen as having its full chromatic intensity, making the left side of the rectangle the area of full chroma.

From this boundary, each tint, standard, and shade fades out or loses chroma until the right boundary of the rectangle is reached. In this boundary each tint, standard, and shade has faded out of its gray equivalent, but without changing its original value; in other words it has traveled along its horizontal value line to a complete grayness. The right-hand boundary of the rectangle may then be represented by a gray value scale of nine steps, including white and black.

From this boundary, each color, standard, and shade fades out or loses color saturation until the right edge of the rectangle is reached. At this edge, each color, standard, and shade has faded to its gray equivalent but without changing its original value; in other words, it has moved along its horizontal value line to total grayness. The right edge of the rectangle can then be represented by a gray value scale of nine steps, including white and black.

Vertical Chroma Lines

It becomes necessary to record at regular intervals, this loss of chroma. For this purpose, we have cut the hue rectangle by three vertical lines. The first vertical line from the left boundary of the rectangle marks the position where the standard with its tints and shades have been grayed to the point where only three-fourths of the original of hue remains. Similarly, the center and right vertical lines mark the points where one-half and one-fourth, respectively, of the color have been retained. These losses of chroma are recorded by similar fractions. With possible modifications of value and chroma each hue now has twenty-seven possible changes.

It’s important to regularly note the loss of color intensity. To do this, we’ve divided the color rectangle with three vertical lines. The first line from the left edge of the rectangle indicates where the standard with its tints and shades has faded to the point that only three-fourths of the original color remains. Likewise, the center and right lines show where half and one-fourth, respectively, of the color is still present. These losses of color intensity are documented using similar fractions. With potential variations in value and intensity, each color now has twenty-seven possible changes.

Full Hue Symbols

The full hue title or symbol may now be written as follows: (1) hue name, (2) amount of chroma, (3) value. Examples: [198] GB¾D-V½HL. We are now in a position to write whatever color we may have in mind and another person will understand it, provided the other person adopts our standard. Through the teachings of Dr. D.W. Ross, Mr. A.H. Munsell, and others, the symbols and standards are now quite generally understood and have, in a slightly modified form been accepted in several standard color industries.

The complete hue title or symbol can now be written as follows: (1) hue name, (2) amount of chroma, (3) value. Examples: [198] GB¾D-V½HL. We can now express any color we have in mind, and another person will understand it, as long as they follow our standard. Thanks to the teachings of Dr. D.W. Ross, Mr. A.H. Munsell, and others, the symbols and standards are now widely understood and have, in a slightly modified form, been adopted in several standard color industries.

Technical Practice

Warm and Cold Colors

To familiarize oneself with the mixing of the various hues, it is excellent practice to form a vertical gray scale of the three-quarter-inch squares. There should be nine steps from white to black; an enlarged duplication of the right boundary of the hue rectangle. The warm standard hues at their full standard intensities; RV-R-OR-O-OY-Y, may be formed and placed opposite their gray equivalents on the left side of the gray scale, while the remaining or cold colors may be similarly placed with relation to the gray scale but upon the right of it.

To get used to mixing different colors, it's great practice to create a vertical gray scale using three-quarter-inch squares. There should be nine steps from white to black; this will be an enlarged version of the right edge of the color rectangle. The warm standard colors at their full intensity — RV-R-OR-O-OY-Y — can be created and placed opposite their gray equivalents on the left side of the gray scale, while the cooler colors can be arranged the same way in relation to the gray scale but on the right side.

Scales of Color

A vertical scale of tints and shades of one of the hues, duplicating the left side of the rectangle gives the character of the tints and shades. One shade and one tint should then be carried along a horizontal value line through three steps of loss of chroma to complete grayness, but without change of the original value. Yellow, by the addition of black becomes a false greenish shade which may be corrected by the addition of a small amount of vermilion.

A vertical scale of colors and variations of one of the hues, mirroring the left side of the rectangle, shows the characteristics of the colors and variations. One shade and one tint should then be taken along a horizontal value line through three steps of decreasing color intensity to reach full gray, but without altering the original value. Yellow, when mixed with black, turns into a misleading greenish shade that can be fixed by adding a tiny bit of vermilion.

Wood Stains

A large percentage of natural wood hues are to be found between the hue rectangles, Red-Orange, Yellow and Green, or in the warm portion of the spectrum. As a wood stain must blend harmoniously with the natural wood color, it is reasonable to expect the best results from stains with a predominance of warm hues or warm grays in their composition.

A significant number of natural wood colors can be found in the shades between Red-Orange, Yellow, and Green, or in the warmer part of the spectrum. Since a wood stain needs to blend well with the natural wood color, it makes sense to get the best results from stains that primarily include warm tones or warm grays in their formulation.

Basic Primary Hues

It is possible to duplicate nearly all the twelve standard hues of Figure 455 with mixtures of the three so-called primary hues of red, yellow, and blue. It makes a fairly approximate scale which is, however, not sufficiently accurate for standardizing purposes. The scale is formed by mixing red and yellow in varying proportions for the intermediate hues of orange, yellow, and blue for the greens, and blue and red for the violets. This practice of mixing three primary colors together serves as an important step, governing wood stain mixing for beginners.

It’s possible to recreate almost all of the twelve standard colors of Figure 455 by mixing the three primary colors: red, yellow, and blue. This method creates a rough scale, but it’s not precise enough for standardization. The scale is made by mixing red and yellow in different amounts for the orange and yellow hues, yellow and blue for the greens, and blue and red for the violets. This approach to mixing the three primary colors is a crucial step for beginners learning about wood stain mixing.

Three Basic Aniline Wood Dyes

Developing this idea further, we may select aniline brilliant scarlet as approximating red; metanil yellow, approximating yellow; and acid green as a substitute for blue. These stains are shown in the top portion of Figure 456. By comparison with Figure 455, scarlet is found to be orange red; metanil yellow, orange, and acid green to be true standard green. These basic stains have been located in their proper positions with regard to their hue, value, and chroma. Their positions are located by the large circles in the hue diagrams of Figure 456.

Developing this idea further, we can choose aniline brilliant scarlet to represent red, metanil yellow for yellow, and acid green as a stand-in for blue. These stains are shown in the top section of Figure 456. In comparison with Figure 455, scarlet appears to be orange-red, metanil yellow looks orange, and acid green is identified as true standard green. These basic stains have been placed in their correct positions based on their hue, value, and chroma. Their locations are indicated by the large circles in the hue diagrams of Figure 456.

Wood Stain Mixing

These stains are modified and reduced in chroma and value by mixing them with nigrosene black, an aniline dye of blue black appearance, which fills all the needs of an ivory black in water or oil color pigment. With these four stains, almost any commercial stain may be duplicated. Aniline dye for water stains readily dissolves in water while a special aniline for oil staining is first cut with naphtha.

These stains are adjusted in color intensity and brightness by mixing them with nigrosene black, a blue-black aniline dye that meets all the requirements of ivory black for water or oil color pigments. With these four stains, you can replicate almost any commercial stain. Aniline dye for water stains easily dissolves in water, while a specific aniline for oil stains is first thinned with naphtha.

Dark Mahogany Stain

Dark mahogany stain in Figure 456 is orange red, ¾HD, and is indicated by the circle A in the same figure. To duplicate this stain we have as the nearest base stain, brilliant scarlet, which corresponds to orange red. This is placed at its full intensity in the circle OR on the middle horizontal value line. To duplicate dark mahogany stain it will be necessary to reduce in value a strong solution of brilliant scarlet, slightly more than one horizontal value step, by the addition of nigrosene. We shall then add a small amount of some thinning medium, oil or water, to reduce slightly the stain in chroma.

Dark mahogany stain in Figure 456 is orange-red, ¾HD, and is marked by the circle A in the same figure. To replicate this stain, we use the closest base stain, brilliant scarlet, which matches orange-red. This is applied at its full intensity in the circle OR on the middle horizontal value line. To create the dark mahogany stain, we need to decrease a strong solution of brilliant scarlet by slightly more than one horizontal value step, using nigrosene. Then, we will add a small amount of a thinning medium, either oil or water, to slightly reduce the stain's chroma.

Flemish Oak Stain

Flemish oak stain is orange ¾D. This calls for a mixture of metanil yellow and brilliant scarlet aniline to form the orange hue. We must then add nigrosene to reduce the value to D, and add a small amount of thinner to produce the necessary reduction in chroma.

Flemish oak stain is orange ¾D. This requires a blend of metanil yellow and brilliant scarlet aniline to create the orange color. We then need to add nigrosene to lower the value to D, and include a little thinner to achieve the needed reduction in chroma.

Fumed Oak Stain

This is commonly produced by fuming the wood with ammonia. The hue may however be closely duplicated by a mixture of brilliant scarlet, metanil yellow, and nigrosene. It is practically the same as Flemish oak, but possesses one-quarter more color as can be seen on the orange hue rectangle.

This is usually achieved by treating the wood with ammonia fumes. However, the color can also be closely matched using a combination of bright scarlet, metanil yellow, and nigrosene. It's almost identical to Flemish oak but has about 25% more color, as illustrated in the orange hue rectangle.

Olive Green Stain

The circle D shows this stain to be slightly below yellow green, ¾M, in value and chroma. The hue rectangle containing it is nearer the green than the orange yellow rectangle; hence in mixing the stain we should keep the green hue dominant by adding more of it[200] than of metanil yellow. As in other stains, nigrosene is added to reduce the full chromatic intensities of the aniline to the proper value and chroma of olive green stain.

The circle D indicates that this stain is slightly below yellow-green, ¾M, in value and chroma. The hue rectangle that includes it is closer to green than to the orange-yellow rectangle; therefore, when mixing the stain, we should prioritize the green hue by adding more of it[200] than metanil yellow. As with other stains, nigrosene is added to lower the full chromatic intensities of the aniline to match the proper value and chroma of the olive green stain.

Light Weathered Oak Stain

Color Changes of the Stain

This stain is practically blue, 1/4M, and is formed by thinning nigrosene to the proper value.

This stain is almost blue, 1/4M, and is made by diluting nigrosene to the right concentration.

Aniline dyes are apt to fade if exposed to full sunlight. There are, however, certain preventives that are beyond the scope of this book to treat in detail. The natural color of the wood is inclined to make a stain warmer than when originally mixed. This should be allowed for. Wood filler, the wood grain, porosity, qualities, and hue of the wood, all influence the final value of the stain. It frequently becomes darker in value as may be seen by comparing Figure 456 and Figures 458 to 461. It is good policy to test the stain upon different woods to observe the final effect. The tests may be kept for future reference.

Aniline dyes tend to fade when exposed to direct sunlight. However, there are some preventive measures that this book won’t cover in detail. The natural color of the wood usually makes a stain appear warmer than when it was originally mixed, and this needs to be taken into account. Wood filler, the grain of the wood, its porosity, characteristics, and color all affect the final appearance of the stain. It often ends up darker, as you can see by comparing Figure 456 and Figures 458 to 461. It’s a good idea to test the stain on different types of wood to see the final result. You can keep the tests for future reference.

It is readily seen from the few examples in Figure 456 that, with the three basic stains, almost any other stains may be produced, thus affording a broad field for harmonious selection and adaptation to the environment. The next chapters will take up the question of color harmony and its application to wood, wall surfaces, clay, and metal.

It’s easy to see from the few examples in Figure 456 that, with the three basic stains, almost any other stains can be created, providing a wide range for harmonious selection and adaptation to the surroundings. The next chapters will discuss color harmony and how it applies to wood, wall surfaces, clay, and metal.

SUGGESTED PROBLEMS

See paragraph upon "Technical Practice" in this chapter, page 198.

Refer to the paragraph on "Technical Practice" in this chapter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What pigments are best adapted to rendering design problems? What pigments are particularly adapted to the rendering of wood stains? How should each be applied?

1. Which pigments work best for addressing design challenges? Which pigments are particularly effective for making wood stains? How should each one be used?

2. What are standard hues? Why do we need standards of hue?

2. What are standard colors? Why are color standards important?

3. Define the term values.

3. What does the term values mean?

4. What are tints and shades?

4. What are tints and shades?

5. Define fully the term chroma.

5. Fully define the term chroma.

6. Bound the hue rectangle and trace the value and chroma changes occurring on its vertical and horizontal lines.

6. Describe the color rectangle and illustrate the changes in value and saturation along its vertical and horizontal axes.

7. Locate in its proper hue rectangle (Figure 455) the following hues: OY ¾HD; YG ½LL; RV ¾M; YL.

7. Identify the correct color block (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__) for these colors: OY ¾HD; YG ½LL; RV ¾M; YL.

8. Name the three primary hues. How may an approximate scale of twelve hues be prepared from them?

8. What are the three primary colors? How can you create a scale of approximately twelve colors from them?

9. Name the three basic aniline wood dyes and give their relation to the three primary hues. What is the practical use of nigrosene in stain mixing?

9. What are the three basic aniline wood dyes, and how do they relate to the three primary colors? What is the practical use of nigrosene in mixing stains?

10. Give the symbol and explain the method of mixing Flemish oak wood stain. Name and explain the method of mixing two others.

10. Provide the symbol and explain how to mix Flemish oak wood stain. Additionally, name and describe the method for mixing two other stains.

11. How does its application to wood effect the color and value of aniline stain?

11. How does the use of aniline stain on wood influence its color and value?

Plate 64

Plate 64


Chapter 16
COLOR AND ITS RELATION TO INDUSTRIAL ARTS DESIGN

Large Surfaces of Wood; Wall and Ceiling Areas

Color Harmony

In the preceding chapter, the classification and standardization of color were emphasized as preliminary to the study of color harmony. Color harmony is obtained by the proper balancing of value, hue, and chroma upon a surface or surfaces to give a pleasing reaction to the eye, and through the eye to the intellect.

In the preceding chapter, the organization and standardization of color were highlighted as essential before exploring color harmony. Color harmony is achieved by effectively balancing value, hue, and chroma on a surface or surfaces to create a visually pleasing effect, which connects to the intellect through the eye.

We are now ready to familiarize ourselves with the specific applications of these factors to practical design problems. Too many pieces of furniture are stained with no thought as to the final adaptation in the school or home. This is not wise, either from the standpoint of a complete educative process or of good taste. Figures 458, 459, 460, 461, show stains of Plate 64 applied to wood. Two new stains have been added, sage green and silver gray. These six stains are representative ones and act as a typical data for study of color harmony.

We are now ready to get familiar with how these factors apply to real design issues. Too many furniture pieces are stained without considering how they will actually fit into a school or home environment. This isn't smart, whether you look at it from an educational perspective or just good taste. Figures 458, 459, 460, 461 show stains of Plate 64 applied to wood. Two new stains have been included: sage green and silver gray. These six stains are representative and serve as typical examples for studying color harmony.

Furniture—Trim—Side Walls—Ceilings

Backgrounds

The side walls of a room form the background for furniture; trim, wall brackets, and similarly related objects; therefore the closest relation and harmony should be maintained between them.

The side walls of a room create the backdrop for furniture; trim, wall brackets, and similar items; therefore, the closest relationship and harmony should be kept between them.

Value Range of Wood Stains

The wood stains 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, and 18, Plate 65, as they appear on various kinds of wood are, in part, duplicates of the unapplied stains of Plate 64, Figure 456. The effect of the wood has changed their values and in some instances their color as can be seen by comparing the two plates. Their new relations have been plotted on the hue rectangles of Figure 457, Plate 65, and the results joined by a dotted line. The circles in the diagrams contain cross reference figures in order that the stains may be traced without difficulty.[202] The highest value is near middle (18), and the lowest is low dark (6), showing a value range of four steps.

The wood stains 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, and 18, Plate 65, as they show up on different types of wood are, in part, copies of the unstained versions of Plate 64, Figure 456. The way the wood interacts with the stains has altered their values and, in some cases, their color, which can be observed by comparing the two plates. Their new relations have been mapped on the hue rectangles of Figure 457, Plate 65, and the results are connected by a dotted line. The circles in the diagrams include cross-reference numbers so that the stains can be traced easily.[202] The highest value is around the middle (18), and the lowest is dark (6), showing a value range of four steps.

Value Range of Side Walls

The side walls, taken from well-known wall tint catalogs have been similarly plotted in Figure 457, and the results joined together by a heavy black line. The lightest value is light (11), and the darkest is middle value (14), an average range of three steps slightly above middle value.

The side walls, taken from popular wall color catalogs, have been similarly plotted in Figure 457, and the results connected by a thick black line. The lightest value is light (11), and the darkest is middle value (14), which is an average range of three steps slightly above the middle value.

Value Range of Ceilings

Ceilings are the lightest of the surfaces considered. Their range is from slightly below white (10), to light (16), a range of two values. From the results, as plotted in Figure 457, it is seen that there is a tendency to keep the ceilings within a close range of values. The results have been joined together by means of a double black line. There are exceptions to these results, but it is quite safe to keep well within the suggested range for harmonious results. We may now draw the following rules as a result of an empirical method of deduction.

Ceilings are the lightest of the surfaces considered. Their range is from just below white (10) to light (16), totaling two values. From the results shown in Figure 457, it's clear that there’s a tendency to keep the ceilings within a close range of values. The results have been connected with a double black line. While there are exceptions to these results, it's generally safe to stay within the suggested range for a harmonious effect. We can now outline the following rules based on our empirical deduction method.

Rule 12a. An average wood stain is to be retained between the values middle and low dark.

Rule 12a. A typical wood stain should be kept between the medium and low dark values.

Rule 12b. An average wall hue is to be retained between the values light and middle.

Rule 12b. The wall color should be kept at an average between light and medium.

Rule 12c. An average ceiling hue is to be retained between the values white (minus) and light.

Rule 12c. An average ceiling color should be kept between the values of white (minus) and light.

Value Range of Side Walls and Wood Work

Averaging the value range between the wood work which includes the furniture, trim, and the side walls of Figures 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, and 463, we find that the range varies from five values in Figures 459 to slightly more than one in Figure 463. As the side walls and furniture are to be regarded as unobtrusive settings for pictures and people it is well to be very conservative with the use of values. A wide range of values will cause a lack of unity. In this respect Figure 459 may be regarded as approaching the extreme limit of contrasts of value compatible with good taste. Let us, therefore, limit the value range to four values, as, for example: low light for side walls and dark for stain.

Averaging the value range of the woodworking, which includes the furniture, trim, and the side walls of Figures 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, and 463, we find that the range varies from five values in Figures 459 to just over one in Figure 463. Since the side walls and furniture should be seen as subtle backgrounds for art and people, it's important to be very cautious with the value choices. A wide range of values can create a sense of disunity. In this regard, Figure 459 can be seen as reaching the extreme limit of value contrasts that are still in good taste. Therefore, let's limit the value range to four, such as: low light for the side walls and dark for the stain.

Rule 12d. The relation between the side walls and furniture, trim, etc., should be retained within the range of four values or less, as low light and dark.

Rule 12d. The connection between the side walls and furniture, trim, etc., should stay within a range of four values or less, such as light and dark.

Value Range of Side Walls and Ceilings

The ceiling and side walls in Figure 459 are four values apart and in Figure 463 this has been reduced to a one-value step. There seems to be a common average of three values as an acceptable and agreeable contrast. For dark rooms this would well be increased. For rooms with light side walls the contrast would be considerably lessened.

The ceiling and side walls in Figure 459 differ by four values, while in Figure 463 this has been simplified to a one-value difference. Generally, a common average of three values is seen as an acceptable and agreeable level of contrast. In darker rooms, this could be increased. In rooms with light side walls, the contrast would be significantly reduced.

Rule 12e. The relation between side walls and ceiling should be within the range of three values or less, as high light and low light.

Rule 12e. The relationship between the side walls and the ceiling should fall within three values or fewer, such as high light and low light.

Hue Groupings

Hue Range for Wood Work and Walls

A wood stain should be closely related to the natural color of the wood. As this is usually a warm color we naturally find most of the wood stains included between the red and the yellow hue rectangles, inclusive of red and yellow green. Walnut then may be stained a deep shade of orange or red, but would not be adapted to a blue green stain. This arbitrary but wide range of hues of stained wood naturally affects the hue of the side walls. The plotting of the hues for the side walls, Figure 457, shows a close relation to the hues of the stain to the wall. In no instance do we find the hue rectangle of the wood work more than three hues away from that of the walls. In four instances they are within two hue rectangles of each other and in one instance they are both within the same rectangle. This develops the fact that analogous or neighboring groupings of hues prevail in relating the hues of wood work and side walls.

A wood stain should closely match the natural color of the wood. Since this is typically a warm color, we generally find most wood stains falling between the red and yellow spectrum, including red and yellow-green. For example, walnut can be stained a deep shade of orange or red, but it wouldn’t work well with a blue-green stain. This broad range of stained wood colors naturally influences the color of the walls. The chart of the colors for the side walls, Figure 457, shows a close connection between the stain colors and the wall colors. In no case do we see the color range of the woodwork more than three shades away from that of the walls. In four cases, they are within two color shades of each other, and in one case, they share the same shade. This demonstrates that analogous or neighboring color groupings are common in relating the colors of woodwork and side walls.

Analogous Hues

An analogous group of hues is an arrangement based upon a selection of tints and shades within three rectangles of each other, as orange and yellow. These harmonize because yellow is mixed with and becomes a hue common to both. While the analogous arrangement of hues seems to be most commonly used, and with a result that seems to justify its adoption into general practice, there are other arrangements that are pleasing to the eye.

An analogous group of colors is a setup based on a choice of tints and shades within three adjacent rectangles, like orange and yellow. They work well together because yellow blends in and creates a color that both share. Although the analogous color arrangement is typically the most popular and seems to validate its use in everyday practice, there are other arrangements that are also visually appealing.

Contrasted Hues

Figure 458 illustrates what is commonly known as a contrasted grouping or arrangement of hues. It consists of the tints or shades of one or more hues and gray. It is the basis of color harmony between silver and semi-precious stones. If two hues are used, one of them should be reduced in chroma to nearly gray.

Figure 458 shows what is usually referred to as a contrasted grouping or arrangement of colors. It includes the tints or shades of one or more colors along with gray. This forms the foundation for color harmony between silver and semi-precious stones. When using two colors, one of them should be toned down to nearly gray.

Dominant Hue

Figure 463 is typical of still another form of positive hue grouping. By consulting the yellow hue rectangle of Figure 457 it is noted that the wood work, side walls, and ceiling of Figure 463 are all contained in one rectangle. This classes this color scheme as an example of dominant arrangement which may be simply defined as the tints and shades of one hue. The arrangement does not have the variety supplied by analogous grouping, introducing as it does, two hues from different rectangles, but for large surfaces dominant grouping is a conservative and safe arrangement. Its tendency toward monotony should be guarded against by the introduction of some object high in chroma in the room decorative scheme. A bright colored vase will accomplish this successfully. Rule 12o, Chapter XVII.

Figure 463 is typical of yet another type of positive color grouping. By looking at the yellow hue rectangle of Figure 457, it's clear that the woodwork, side walls, and ceiling of Figure 463 are all in one rectangle. This categorizes this color scheme as an example of a dominant arrangement, which can be simply defined as the tints and shades of one hue. The arrangement lacks the variety provided by analogous grouping, which incorporates two hues from different rectangles, but for large areas, dominant grouping is a conservative and safe choice. Its tendency toward monotony should be countered by adding an object with high chroma to the room’s decor. A brightly colored vase can achieve this successfully. Rule 12o, Chapter XVII.

Rule 12f. Color schemes for wood work and side walls should preferably be selected from one of the following groupings: analogous, contrasted, or dominant arrangements of hues. Analogous grouping is preferable where variety of hue is desirable.

Rule 12f. Color schemes for woodwork and side walls should ideally be chosen from one of the following categories: analogous, contrasting, or dominant color arrangements. An analogous grouping is recommended when a variety of hues is desired.

Special Arrangements

The above rule is not to be taken as arbitrary. In the hands of competent designers attractive color schemes are developed that differ materially from the above suggestions. But, for the usual home setting, the above arrangement may be regarded as satisfactory, and is given with the idea of bringing the school shop work and the home environment into closer color harmony. A specimen of special arrangement is given by the Circle 3A. This is delft blue, which harmonizes with dark mahogany in a satisfactory manner.

The rule mentioned above shouldn’t be seen as rigid. Skilled designers create appealing color schemes that can be quite different from these suggestions. However, for a typical home setting, the arrangement provided is acceptable and aims to create better color harmony between school shop work and the home environment. An example of a specific arrangement is provided by Circle 3A. This is delft blue, which pairs nicely with dark mahogany.

Hue Range for Side Walls and Ceilings

In adjusting the hues for side walls and ceilings, the relations should be of the closest. The plotting of ceiling hues in Figure 457 shows a strong tendency for the ceiling to be colored with a tint of the side walls (dominant arrangement), or by a tint selected from the next rectangle (analogous arrangement). Yellow or yellow-green, very light and much reduced in chroma, seems to be the almost universal custom. This is due to the strongly light reflecting qualities of yellow.

In adjusting the colors for side walls and ceilings, the relationships should be very close. The chart of ceiling colors in Figure 457 shows a strong tendency for the ceiling to be painted with a shade of the side walls (dominant arrangement) or with a shade taken from the next section (analogous arrangement). Light yellow or yellow-green, which is very pale and low in saturation, seems to be the almost universal choice. This is because yellow has strong light reflecting qualities.

Plate 65

Plate 65

Rule 12g. Ceilings should be colored by a lighter tint of the side walls or by a lighter tint of an analogous hue.

Rule 12g. Ceilings should be painted a lighter shade of the side walls or a lighter shade of a similar color.

Range of Chroma for Stains

Stains, as they occupy a comparatively limited area in the room color scheme, are of their full chroma value or reduced to three-fourths chroma. In only one instance (18), Figure 463, do we find a reduction to one-fourth chroma, demanded by the nearly gray color scheme of the walls. We find it to be an established fact that small areas are capable of enrichment by colors of greater purity and higher chroma than larger surfaces. A silver pin may be designed to contain a stone of high brilliancy, but a wall surface has to be materially reduced in chroma to possess color harmony.

Stains, occupying a relatively small area in the room's color scheme, are either full chroma or reduced to three-fourths chroma. In one case (18), Figure 463, we see a reduction to one-fourth chroma, needed because of the almost gray color scheme of the walls. It is a well-established fact that small areas can be enhanced with colors of greater purity and higher chroma than larger surfaces. A silver pin can hold a stone with high brilliance, while a wall surface must have significantly reduced chroma to achieve color harmony.

Rule 12h. Stains are usually not reduced to below three-fourths chromatic intensity. Nearly gray side walls, however, call for a reduction to one-fourth intensity.

Rule 12h. Stains are typically not diminished to less than three-fourths chromatic intensity. However, almost gray side walls require a reduction to one-fourth intensity.

Range of Chroma for Walls

As the walls occupy a large proportionate area of the color scheme of the room we find it necessary to reduce them in chroma in order to soften the glare of too brilliant colors. Figure 457 shows only one instance (14) of a hue unreduced in chroma. It is retained at the full chroma for that value on account of the brightness of the sage green wood stain. The other hues represented in the diagram are grayed or reduced in chroma from three-fourths to less than one-fourth, or to nearly neutral gray.

As the walls take up a significant part of the room's color scheme, we find it essential to tone them down in brightness to lessen the harshness of overly vibrant colors. Figure 457 shows only one case (14) of a hue kept at full brightness. It's maintained at that full saturation because of the brightness of the sage green wood stain. The other colors shown in the diagram are muted or reduced in brightness from three-fourths to less than one-fourth, or almost to a neutral gray.

Rule 12i. Wall colors are usually reduced to three-fourths chroma to a minimum reduction of slightly less than one-fourth chroma.

Rule 12i. Wall colors are typically lowered to three-fourths chroma with a minimum reduction of just under one-fourth chroma.

Range of Chroma for Ceilings

The same tendency toward chromatic reduction is to be seen in ceilings, although we have two examples in Figure 457 (10 and 13) of nearly white and high light ceilings that have not been reduced. To avoid crudity a reduction in chroma by the addition of gray is to be desired.

The same trend towards fewer colors can be seen in ceilings, although we have two examples in Figure 457 (10 and 13) of almost white and very bright ceilings that haven’t been simplified. To avoid harshness, it’s preferable to decrease the color intensity by adding gray.

Rule 12j. Ceilings should usually be reduced in chroma to three-fourths intensity with slightly less than one-fourth chroma as a minimum reduction.

Rule 12j. Ceilings should typically be adjusted to three-fourths intensity with a minimum reduction to slightly less than one-fourth chroma.

Summary

With a single exception (3A), the stains and wall tints have been selected between and including the red and green rectangles. This is customary and gives safe hue range as it insures the retention of wall and ceiling hues in unified conformity with the warm tints of the natural wood and its equally dark hued stains.

With one exception (3A), the stains and wall colors have been chosen from the red and green rectangles. This is standard practice and provides a reliable color range, ensuring that the wall and ceiling colors stay aligned with the warm tones of the natural wood and its similarly dark stains.

Wall and Ceiling Pigments

The following is a list of dry colors which may be purchased at a paint or hardware store for a few cents a pound. It is suggested for the designer or craftsman who desires to tint his own wall or ceiling. While oil paint is to be preferred, these colors are readily and quickly applied and form serviceable backgrounds.

The following is a list of dry colors that can be bought at a paint or hardware store for just a few cents per pound. This is recommended for designers or craftsmen who want to mix their own colors for walls or ceilings. While oil paint is preferable, these colors are easy to apply and create practical backgrounds.

Calcimine

The pigments are white, yellow ochre, chrome yellow light, chrome yellow medium, and chrome yellow dark, burnt and raw sienna, turkey and raw umber, ultramarine and ivory black. The greens are preferably mixed by adding ultramarine to one of the chromes. Shades are formed by the addition of the siennas, umbers, or black. Black and white, mixed to a gray, are useful in reducing the chroma of a hue. The stains should be mixed with hot water and a small amount of glue for a binder. White occasionally comes prepared with glue in its composition.

The pigments include white, yellow ochre, chrome yellow light, chrome yellow medium, and chrome yellow dark, along with burnt and raw sienna, turkey and raw umber, ultramarine, and ivory black. The greens work best when you mix ultramarine with one of the chrome colors. Shades can be created by adding siennas, umbers, or black. Mixing black and white to create gray is useful for toning down the intensity of a color. The stains should be blended with hot water and a small amount of glue as a binder. Sometimes, white comes ready-made with glue in its formula.

Opaque Wood Finishes

While this chapter has emphasized the transparent finish for wood treatment, as a method best fitted for woods with a distinct grain, it is realized that oil painting of wood surfaces has a distinct and important part to play in the interior decorative scheme of a room. This latter method is adapted to soft woods without a strongly marked grained surface. The warm hued rectangle of the spectrum: red, orange, and yellow with their associated hues, which are so intimately connected with the natural wood colors and their stains, no longer stand as a limiting factor in controlling the color of the wood or the side walls. The opaque nature of oil paints allows us to disregard the color of the wood, and thus select any hue of oil paint which harmonizes with the walls and decorative scheme of the room. The rules stated herein are equally applicable to opaque colors. It may be necessary to reduce oil paints in chroma beyond the point indicated in Rule 12h.

While this chapter has focused on clear finishes for wood treatment, which is best suited for woods with a distinct grain, it's important to recognize that oil painting wood surfaces also plays a significant role in a room's interior decor. This method works well on soft woods that don't have a strong grain pattern. The warm colors of the spectrum—red, orange, and yellow, along with their related shades—are closely tied to the natural colors and stains of wood, and they no longer limit our choices for the wood’s color or the side walls. The opaque quality of oil paints lets us overlook the wood’s color, allowing us to choose any oil paint hue that matches the walls and overall decor of the room. The guidelines mentioned here apply equally to opaque colors. You may need to lessen the chroma of oil paints more than suggested in Rule 12h.

While it is not within the scope of this chapter to enter into a complete discussion of the subject of interior decoration, the following suggestions are considered as applying to our subject: viz., the surface enrichment of large areas. Complete color harmony in interior decoration generally demands the presence of the three so-called primary hues: red, yellow, and blue, in some form in the wall color scheme. While this is not always possible, two may be introduced as follows.

While this chapter doesn't aim to provide a full discussion on interior decoration, the following suggestions relate to our topic: specifically, the enhancement of large areas. Achieving complete color harmony in interior decoration usually requires the inclusion of the three primary colors: red, yellow, and blue, in some form within the wall color scheme. Although this isn't always feasible, two of these colors can be incorporated as follows.

Northern Exposure

The light from the north, northeast, or northwest is cold blue, supplying blue in the decorative scheme of three primary colors: blue, red, and yellow. The wall tints should then be composed of combinations of red and yellow, the remaining primaries. These may be applied to the walls by means of tints of yellow and orange[207] reduced in chroma, or shades of orange and orange-red. No greens or blues should be used.

The light from the north, northeast, or northwest is a cool blue, adding blue to the color scheme of the three primary colors: blue, red, and yellow. The wall colors should be made up of combinations of red and yellow, the other primary colors. These can be applied to the walls using tints of yellow and orange[207] that are muted in color, or shades of orange and orange-red. No greens or blues should be included.

Southern Exposure

The light from the south, southeast, and southwest supplies plenty of yellow. It is, then, necessary to add the remaining primaries or at least one of them in the form of gray-blue, orange, or orange-yellow, reduced to one-fourth chroma and practically to neutrality or grayish-reds and greens, well reduced in chroma. Any hue strongly yellow should be avoided.

The light coming from the south, southeast, and southwest provides a lot of yellow. So, it’s important to add the other primary colors or at least one of them as gray-blue, orange, or orange-yellow, diluted to one-fourth chroma and nearly neutral or grayish-reds and greens, also significantly diluted in chroma. Any shade that is strongly yellow should be avoided.

Effects of Hue upon Apparent Size

Certain hues materially affect the apparent size of a room. If the room is small certain values and hues will make it appear much smaller. Dark values, as a rule, make the room look smaller by seemingly drawing the walls closer together. Red contracts the apparent size of a room, while yellow and blue expand it. Green and shades of yellow and red-orange, if not too dark, have little effect upon the apparent size of a room.

Certain colors can significantly influence how big a room looks. In a small room, certain shades and colors can make it seem even smaller. Generally, dark colors make a room feel smaller by giving the impression that the walls are closer together. Red makes a room appear smaller, while yellow and blue make it look larger. Green, along with lighter shades of yellow and red-orange, have little impact on how spacious a room feels, as long as they're not too dark.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

(a) Determine, by its exposure, the kind of light the room receives.

(a) Determine the amount of natural light the room receives based on its direction.

(b) Choose a hue for the walls embodying one or both of the primary hues not represented by this daylight.

(b) Pick a wall color that reflects one or both of the main colors not present in the sunlight.

(c) Select a value and chroma for this hue in accordance with Rules 12b and 12i.

(c) Select a value and chroma for this color using Rules 12b and 12i.

(d) Select a hue, value, and chroma for the ceiling in accordance with Rules 12g, 12e, and 12j.

(d) Choose a color, brightness, and saturation for the ceiling based on Rules 12g, 12e, and 12j.

(e) Select the correct hue, value, and chroma for paint or stain for the wood work in accordance with Rules 12f, 12a, and 12h.

(e) Select the appropriate color, shade, and intensity for paint or stain for the woodwork according to Rules 12f, 12a, and 12h.

SUGGESTED PROBLEMS

Develop the color scheme for the walls, ceiling, and wood work of a room with a northern exposure; southern exposure. Mix the stain for a piece of oak to harmonize with the wood work and walls of the living room of your home.

Design the color scheme for the walls, ceiling, and woodwork of a room with north-facing light; south-facing light. Blend the stain for an oak piece to match the woodwork and walls of your living room.

Determine the wall tints to harmonize with dark weathered oak. Mix them from dry colors.

Identify the wall colors that will complement dark, weathered oak. Create them using dry pigments.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 12a. An average wood stain is to be retained between the values middle and low dark.

Rule 12a. An average wood stain should remain between middle and low dark values.

Rule 12b. An average wall hue is to be retained between the values light and middle.

Rule 12b. A standard wall color should be kept between light and medium values.

Rule 12c. An average ceiling hue is to be retained between the values white (minus) and light.

Rule 12c. An average ceiling color should be between shades of white (minus) and light.

Rule 12d. The relation between the side walls and furniture, trim, etc., should be retained within the range of four values or less, as low light and dark.

Rule 12d. The relationship between the side walls and furniture, trim, etc., should be kept to four or fewer colors, like light and dark.

Rule 12e. The relation between the side walls and ceiling should be within the range of three values or less, as high light and low light.

Rule 12e. The relationship between the side walls and ceiling should be limited to three or fewer values, such as high light and low light.

Rule 12f. Color schemes for wood work and side walls should preferably be selected from one of the following groupings: analogous, contrasted, or dominant arrangements of hues. Analogous grouping is preferable where variety of hue is desirable.

Rule 12f. Color schemes for woodwork and side walls should ideally be selected from one of the following categories: analogous, contrasting, or dominant color arrangements. An analogous grouping is preferred when a variety of hues is desired.

Rule 12g. Ceilings should be colored by a lighter tint of the side walls or by a lighter tint of an analogous hue.

Rule 12g. Ceilings should be painted in a lighter shade of the adjacent walls or a lighter shade of a similar color.

Rule 12h. Stains are usually not reduced to below three-fourths chromatic intensity. Nearly gray side walls, however, call for a reduction to one-fourth intensity.

Rule 12h. Stains are typically not reduced to less than three-fourths of their color intensity. However, almost gray side walls should be reduced to one-fourth of their intensity.

Rule 12i. Wall colors are usually reduced to three-fourths chroma to a minimum reduction of slightly less than one-fourth chroma.

Rule 12i. Wall colors are usually toned down to three-fourths chroma, with a minimum reduction of just under one-fourth chroma.

Rule 12j. Ceilings should usually be reduced in chroma to three-fourths intensity, with slightly less than one-fourth chroma as a minimum reduction.

Rule 12j. Ceilings should generally be decreased in color intensity to three-fourths, with just under one-fourth color intensity as the minimum reduction.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What should we have in mind when staining furniture for the home?

1. What should we consider when staining furniture for our home?

2. Why are the side walls important when considering the color scheme of a room?

2. Why are side walls important when thinking about the color scheme of a room?

3. Give the value range for the average wood stains, side walls, and ceiling.

3. Provide the value range for average wood stains, side walls, and ceiling.

4. State the value range to include wood work, furniture, trim, and side walls.

4. Specify the value range for carpentry, furniture, trim, and side walls.

5. State the value range that includes side walls and ceilings.

5. Specify the value range that covers side walls and ceilings.

6. Give the hue range for wood work and side walls.

6. Provide the color options for woodwork and side walls.

7. Explain the analogous, contrasted, and dominant groupings of hues and name two examples of each.

7. Describe the similar, differing, and main groupings of colors and provide two examples for each.

8. Give the hue range for side walls and ceilings. Name several good combinations.

8. Specify the color range for side walls and ceilings. Suggest a few great combinations.

9. Give range of chroma for wood work, side walls, and ceiling. Explain the reasons for each change of chroma.

9. Provide the range of colors for woodwork, side walls, and ceiling. Explain the reasons for each color change.

10. What experience have you had in mixing calcimine for wall decoration?

10. What experience do you have with mixing calcimine for wall decoration?

11. Discuss opaque finishes for wood.

11. Discuss non-transparent finishes for wood.

12. Give the hues for rooms with northern and southern exposures. Why?

12. Suggest colors for rooms with north and south exposure. Why?

13. State the effect of hues upon the apparent size of a room.

13. Explain how colors affect the perceived size of a room.


Chapter 17
COLOR AND ITS RELATION TO INDUSTRIAL ARTS DESIGN

Small Surfaces in Clay and Metal

Before proceeding to the discussion of the application of color to clay it becomes necessary to determine what technical possibilities are presented.

Before moving on to the discussion of how color can be applied to clay, it's important to identify the technical possibilities that are available.

Color Applied to the Surface Enrichment of Clay

Plain glazing of the entire surface is a common form of pottery enrichment. A piece of ware, thus glazed, may become a point of concentration in the color arrangement of a room, and should be definitely located in that arrangement. The ware may harmonize with the background (side wall) by analogy, dominance, or contrast or through complementary coloring. Rule 12o. A glaze from the diagram in Figure 464 should be selected as forming a part in the selected arrangement. Side wall (11), Figure 457, would harmonize with glaze C9 by virtue of its dominant relation or with M7 through analogy. The glaze selected should be higher in chroma than the side wall and will be found to form a cheerful and brilliant element in the room color scheme. The definite linking of these different factors of interior decoration into unity has been earnestly advocated in these chapters. Figures 457 and 464 show the possibilities of cross references.

Plain glazing across the entire surface is a typical way to enhance pottery. A piece of pottery that is glazed this way can become a focal point in a room's color scheme and should be purposefully placed within that design. The pottery can complement the background wall in terms of similarity, dominance, contrast, or by using complementary colors. Rule 12o. A glaze from the diagram in Figure 464 should be chosen as part of the selected arrangement. The side wall (11), Figure 457, would match with glaze C9 due to its dominant relationship or with M7 through similarity. The chosen glaze should have a higher chroma than the side wall, creating a bright and cheerful element in the room's color palette. The clear connection of these various aspects of interior design into a cohesive idea has been strongly supported in these chapters. Figures 457 and 464 demonstrate the possibilities of cross-references.

Stains for Glazes

It soon becomes apparent because of the coloring of clay ware that the designer must know something of the color possibilities of glazed pottery forms. The decorative processes were explained at some length in Chapter XII, wherein we described the common types of surface enrichment. As we are now primarily considering the question of color, we first regard the ware as uniformly glazed with either clear or matt glaze. The former is brilliant, of high chroma, and has a highly polished surface, while the latter is dull surfaced glaze of lower chroma.

It quickly becomes clear, due to the coloring of clay products, that the designer needs to understand the color options for glazed pottery shapes. The decorative methods were discussed in detail in Chapter XII, where we outlined the typical types of surface enhancement. Since we are now focusing mainly on color, we first look at the pottery as uniformly glazed with either clear or matte glaze. The clear glaze is shiny, vibrant, and has a highly polished surface, while the matte glaze is dull and has a lower vibrancy.

Metallic Oxides

Metallic oxides are used to stain or color clear glazes, while underglaze colors are ordinarily used for matts. The percentage of stains to be added to the dry glazes is stated in Figure 464 where they can be readily traced to their approximate locations in the hue rectangles by the reference letters M1, C1, etc. Certain oxides are weak coloring agents and require larger amounts of oxide to color the glaze perceptibly.

Metallic oxides are used to tint or color clear glazes, while underglaze colors are typically used for matte finishes. The amount of stains to add to the dry glazes is mentioned in Figure 464, where they can be easily tracked to their approximate spots in the hue rectangles by the reference letters M1, C1, etc. Some oxides are weak coloring agents and need larger quantities of oxide to visibly change the color of the glaze.

Iron and copper oxide may be mixed to produce a large variety of yellow greens; other combinations will suggest themselves. It is possible to use oxides as well as underglaze colors for staining matt glazes.

Iron and copper oxide can be blended to create a wide range of yellow-greens; other combinations can be imagined. You can use both oxides and underglaze colors to stain matte glazes.

Harmony of Color

We have, to this point, considered the enrichment of large surfaces whose areas were arbitrarily determined by construction, as, for example, the extent of wall surface, ceiling, or wood trim and furniture. The essential element in this type of problem is the selection of a one, two, or three-hued color arrangement that would harmoniously link ceiling, wall, and wood together. If we had introduced stencilling or figured wall paper it would have immediately called for the solution of another problem, the factor of how much strong color to use. In other words, it would have introduced the question of proportionate distribution of color upon a given area. It was thought best to limit the subject of proportionate distribution to small areas, where the designer is often forced to make decisions and to divide surfaces into proportionate color parts for his surface enrichment.

We have, so far, looked at enhancing large surfaces with areas that were chosen at random during construction, like the wall surface, ceiling, or wood trim and furniture. The key factor in this type of situation is picking a one, two, or three-color scheme that would seamlessly connect the ceiling, walls, and wood. If we had included stenciling or patterned wallpaper, it would have immediately raised another issue: how much strong color to use. In other words, it would have brought up the question of the proportional distribution of color across a specific area. It was decided that it would be best to restrict the topic of proportional distribution to smaller areas, where the designer often has to make choices and divide surfaces into proportionate color sections for enhancing the space.

We may now repeat the definition of harmony with the accentuation placed upon a certain wording directly applicable to small surfaces. Harmony is obtained by the proper balancing and proportionate distribution of value, hue, and chroma upon a surface to give a unified and pleasing reaction to the eye and intellect.

We can now restate the definition of harmony, focusing on specific wording that applies to small surfaces. Harmony is achieved by properly balancing and distributing proportionately value, color, and chroma on a surface to create a cohesive and pleasing response for both the eye and the mind.

Proportionate Distribution of Color for Small Areas

Rule 12k. Proportionate distribution of hue, value, and chroma in surface enrichment calls for a small area, high in chroma, and contrasting in value to the rest of the surface but harmonizing with it. This is usually located in the area of concentration. The larger areas are to be sufficiently reduced in chroma and value to form a slight contrast with the background.

Rule 12k. The proportional distribution of color, brightness, and saturation in surface enhancement requires a small area that’s vibrant in color and contrasts with the rest of the surface in brightness but still blends well with it. This is typically found in the focal area. The larger areas should have a lower saturation and brightness to create a subtle contrast with the background.

Examples of Proportionate Distribution

Figure 465 illustrates some of the salient factors of distribution [211] of values and hues. Hues of or near standard chromatic intensity should be used in small quantities and should accentuate the point of concentration. These small areas are to be regarded as giving brilliancy and life to the surface and to hold the eye at the point of concentration. Very small surfaces are capable of sustaining spots of high chroma, as is shown in the silver pin of Figure 468. The remaining portions of the surface enrichment should be kept subordinated in hue and value to the point of concentration, but related to it. The bands of Figure 465 are well reduced in value and make little contrast with the background, thus forming true surface enrichment or that which neither rises above or apparently falls through the surface. The point of concentration is higher in chroma than the surrounding areas.

Figure 465 shows some important factors in distributing values and colors. Colors with standard brightness should be used in small amounts to highlight the focal point. These small areas are meant to add vibrance and liveliness to the surface and draw the viewer's eye to the focal point. Very small areas can handle bright spots, as demonstrated by the silver pin of Figure 468. The other parts of the surface should have colors and values that are less intense than the focal point, but still connected to it. The bands of Figure 465 are well balanced in value and create little contrast with the background, effectively enriching the surface without standing out or seeming to sink into it. The focal point has a higher intensity than the surrounding areas.

Rule 12l. One hue, or a group of analogous hues should dominate all color schemes. The point of concentration may be emphasized by one hue related to the other hues by (1) contrasted, (2) dominant, (3) analogous, (4) complementary relations. This hue should make slightly stronger value and chroma contrast than the remaining hues.

Rule 12l. One color, or a group of similar colors, should dominate all color schemes. The focal point can be highlighted by one color that relates to the other colors through (1) contrast, (2) dominance, (3) similarity, or (4) complementary relationships. This color should have a slightly stronger contrast in value and saturation compared to the other colors.

Rule 12m. An extreme range of five values is generally sufficient to supply contrast to a design but still retain its value unity. Restraint in the use of values is essential.

Rule 12m. A wide range of five values is usually enough to create contrast in a design while keeping its overall unity. It's important to be restrained in using values.

Rule 12n. The amount of chroma may be increased in proportion to the decrease in the decorated area. Exceptions may be made to this under Rule 12o.

Rule 12n. You can increase the amount of color as long as the decorated area decreases. Exceptions to this can be made under Rule 12o.

Value and Hue and Chroma Range for Small Areas

In the vase, Figure 464A, the designer selected hues from neighboring or analogous rectangles green and blue-green. The value range is restricted to four steps and the areas of concentration are placed at the top of the vase by the stronger value and hue contrasts of the foliage of the trees and dark blue rim. In both Figures, 464A and 465, the designer has used analogous hue arrangements. This is suggested to the beginner as serviceable for objects exceeding the dimensions of jewelry and includes such problems as vase forms, book stalls, and brackets. Contrasted and dominant arrangements are also good, safe, and sound arrangements, but fail to give the variety of color to small objects afforded by analogous grouping. At a later point in this chapter the subject of complementary coloring will suggest a new arrangement to the reader, but this scheme is to [212] be left until he has sufficiently mastered the possibilities of the arrangements just indicated.

In the vase, Figure 464A, the designer chose colors from nearby or similar shades like green and blue-green. The value range is limited to four steps, and the focal areas are positioned at the top of the vase due to the stronger contrast in value and hue from the tree foliage and the dark blue rim. In both Figures 464A and 465, the designer has utilized similar color arrangements. This method is recommended for beginners as suitable for items larger than jewelry, including vases, bookstands, and brackets. Contrasting and dominant arrangements are also effective and reliable, but they don't offer the color variety for smaller objects that analogous grouping does. Later in this chapter, the topic of complementary colors will introduce a new arrangement for the reader, but this will be discussed after they have fully grasped the possibilities of the arrangements just mentioned.

Five values form a safe value range for small objects. It is good practice to keep the larger areas, including the background, within three steps of each other and to allow the point of concentration to form the strongest value contrast.

Five values create a safe value range for small objects. It's good practice to keep the larger areas, including the background, within three steps of each other and to let the focal point create the strongest value contrast.

Over Reduction in Chroma

The chroma may range from full to three-quarters intensity. Reduction to one-half or one-fourth intensity is inclined to make a small object appear washed out or chalky. Shades, at their full intensity, are good colors to use for small surfaces in wood. Small enameled objects may be developed in full chroma, while pottery forms range from full chroma to one-half chroma in forms of slip and underglaze painting.

The color intensity can vary from full to three-quarters. Reducing it to half or a quarter can make a small object look faded or dull. At full intensity, shades are great colors for small wooden surfaces. Small enameled objects can be made in full color, while pottery can vary from full color to half color in techniques like slip and underglaze painting.

Color Applied to the Surface Enrichment of Metal

It is interesting to note the gradually increasing chroma percentage of the different coloring media in direct proportion to the reduction of the area of the surface to be enriched. By comparing the diagrams of Figures 464 and 457 it will be seen that there is a steady movement toward the left sides of the hue rectangles or toward stronger intensity. The wall areas are shown to be lowest in chroma, followed by the increasing intensity of wood stains, glazes, and enamels.

It’s noteworthy to see how the chroma percentage of various coloring media increases as the area of the surface to be enhanced gets smaller. By looking at the diagrams of Figures 464 and 457, you can observe a consistent shift towards the left side of the hue rectangles, indicating stronger intensity. The wall areas have the lowest chroma, which is then followed by the increasing intensity of wood stains, glazes, and enamels.

Enamels

Enamels, commonly used to enrich metal surfaces, are highest in chroma of the decorative materials under discussion and are to be treated with nearly as much restraint as one would use in enriching a surface with semi-precious stones, for strong hues are cheapened by excessive use. The plate in Figure 436 has small circles filled with enamel and a large field of chased or uncolored design.

Enamels, often used to enhance metal surfaces, have the highest color intensity among the decorative materials we’re talking about, and should be applied with almost as much caution as one would use when decorating a surface with semi-precious stones, as bold colors can lose their value when overused. The plate in Figure 436 features small circles filled with enamel and a large area of chased or uncolored design.

Transparent Enamels

Transparent enamels are comparable to clear glazes and the coloring medium is the same. Their preparation is difficult and therefore trade names have been given in the table of Figure 464. As will be seen by consulting the diagram of Figure 464, T1, T2, T3, etc., they are all at their full value intensity. Enamels, as supplied by the trade, are much too intense for use in enrichment and consequently are applied over a coating of colorless clear enamel, technically named flux or fondant. As the thickness of coating of enamel may vary, the hue classification is to be regarded as approximate.

Transparent enamels are similar to clear glazes, and the coloring medium is the same. Their preparation is challenging, which is why trade names are listed in the table of Figure 464. As shown in the diagram of Figure 464, T1, T2, T3, etc., they all have their full intensity. Enamels provided by the trade are much too intense for decorative use, so they are applied over a layer of colorless clear enamel, technically known as flux or fondant. Since the thickness of the enamel coating can vary, the hue classification should be considered approximate.

Glaze Stains. Enamels.

Plate 66

Plate 66

Opaque Enamels

Opaque enamels may be compared with matt glazes, for, while the texture of the surface has a distinct gloss, the enamels themselves [213] are not so strong in hue as the transparent enamels. By referring to the diagram of Figure 464, it may be seen that many of the opaque enamels are reduced in chroma, thus accounting for their softened hue.

Opaque enamels can be likened to matte glazes, as the surface texture has a noticeable gloss, but the enamels themselves aren’t as vibrant as the transparent enamels. By looking at the diagram of Figure 464, you can see that many of the opaque enamels have reduced color intensity, which explains their softer hue. [213]

Oxidation

Metals are capable of considerable change of color by the application of chemicals to the surface. Potassium sulphuret will lower the surface value of silver or copper to a rich velvety black associated with antiques. This may be removed in places naturally subjected to wear, thus varying the dead black appearance. Copper and brass may be coated with salt and vinegar or verdigris to give the surface a corroded and greenish appearance. Heating is a fugitive method of coloring and is, therefore, not considered.

Metals can change color significantly when chemicals are applied to their surface. Potassium sulfide will darken silver or copper to a deep, rich black that’s often seen in antiques. This can wear off in areas that are naturally used, creating variations in the black finish. Copper and brass can be treated with salt and vinegar or verdigris to achieve a corroded, greenish look. Heat is a temporary method of coloring and is not typically used.

Harmony through Oxidation

These surface changes may be utilized to harmonize metal and its environment, as, for example, copper trimmings and a shade for a pottery lamp; or it may be used to reduce the brightness of the natural copper surface.

These surface changes can be used to blend metal with its surroundings, like copper trimmings and a shade for a pottery lamp; or they can help tone down the brightness of the natural copper surface.

The surfaces of metals may be changed with actual manipulation of the surface by frosting or sanding and plating. Gold may be readily plated with gold to bring it into closer harmony with the stone. Plating, applied to base metals, merely to give the impression of a more expensive metal, is to be discouraged.

The surfaces of metals can be altered through actual manipulation of the surface, such as frosting, sanding, and plating. Gold can easily be plated with gold to better match the stone. Plating applied to base metals just to create the appearance of a more expensive metal should be avoided.

Metal Backgrounds

One has to consider metal as a background in much the same manner as we considered wall surfaces as a background for stained furniture. Whatever color is applied to the surface must harmonize in proportionate distribution as well as hue, value, and chroma. We have a small amount of leeway for varying the background by the different processes of oxidation and plating.

One has to think of metal as a backdrop just like we thought of wall surfaces as a backdrop for stained furniture. Any color added to the surface needs to work well in terms of balanced distribution, as well as hue, value, and chroma. We have a bit of flexibility to change the backdrop using different methods of oxidation and plating.

Enamel on a Copper Background

As one of the more common processes, let us consider the application of enamel to copper in the form of champleve enrichment. Our first thought would be the analysis of the natural copper color. It is found to be a shade of orange-red and will, therefore, readily harmonize with the analogous oranges and reds, as they both have the common hue of red. There should be a slight contrast of value between these enamels and the background. If this contrast is not present, it is well to oxidize slightly the copper to lower its value and thus produce the contrast.

As one of the more common processes, let's look at how enamel is applied to copper through champlevé enrichment. Our first thought would be to analyze the natural color of copper. It's a shade of orange-red, which means it will easily go well with similar oranges and reds since they all share the common color of red. There should be a bit of contrast in value between these enamels and the background. If that contrast isn't there, it's a good idea to slightly oxidize the copper to reduce its value and create the contrast.

Complementary Arrangement

The fourth harmonious hue combination, that of complementary arrangement or grouping, has been left to the last as its use is more [214] closely associated with small multi-colored projects and small areas. A hue approximately complementary to the initial hue is found by counting seven rectangles to the right or left of that hue; this will give the hue complementary to the initial hue. Thus, starting with red and moving through seven rectangles toward the right, we find the complement to be green. Any two hues so selected will be found to enhance the brilliancy of each other. The best results are secured when one hue dominates the color scheme by its increased area. Pottery may be adapted to a complementary color scheme by Rule 12i.

The fourth harmonious color combination, which involves complementary arrangements or groupings, is covered last because it's more relevant to small, colorful projects and areas. To find a hue that is roughly complementary to the original hue, count seven rectangles to the right or left of that hue; this will give you the complementary hue. For example, starting with red and moving seven rectangles to the right, we discover that the complement is green. Any two hues chosen this way will boost each other's brightness. The best outcomes are achieved when one hue dominates the color scheme with a larger area. Pottery can be adapted to a complementary color scheme using Rule 12i.

Rule 12o. Small one or two-hued projects in clay, designed to be used as a part of the decorative color scheme for a room should bear a contrasted, dominant, analogous, or complementary relation to the side walls of the room. The project may be much higher in chroma than the side walls.

Rule 12o. Small one or two-colored clay projects, meant to fit into the room's decorative color scheme, should have a contrasting, dominant, similar, or complementary relationship with the room's side walls. The project can be much more vibrant than the side walls.

The Relation of Colored Glazes to Interior Decoration of a Room

To find a glaze that will harmonize with the side walls of a room by complementary arrangement of hues, select the desired wall tint from the diagram in Figure 457. Find the similar hue rectangle in the diagram of Figure 464 and, starting with this rectangle as one, count seven hues from the side wall rectangle in either direction. In the seventh rectangle or in a neighboring one will usually be found a number of glazes answering the requirements and bearing a complementary relation to the side walls. Select a glaze from these that will make a contrast of chroma or value with the side wall. Example: background or side wall, Figure 457, No. 8, is in the orange yellow rectangle. Counting seven from this in Figure 464 we find the complement to be blue violet. As there is no glaze in this rectangle we will move to its neighbor on the left. This gives us clear glaze, C1, containing one and one-half per cent black oxide of cobalt, or a matt glaze containing seven per cent mazarine blue.

To find a glaze that matches the side walls of a room through complementary colors, start by choosing the wall color from the diagram in Figure 457. Locate the corresponding color rectangle in the diagram of Figure 464, and from this rectangle, count seven colors in either direction from the side wall rectangle. The seventh rectangle or one nearby will typically have several glazes that meet the requirements and are complementary to the side walls. Choose a glaze from these that will create a contrast in brightness or intensity with the side wall. For example: if the wall color is Figure 457, No. 8, which is in the orange-yellow rectangle, counting seven from this in Figure 464, we find the complement to be blue-violet. Since there’s no glaze in this rectangle, we'll check the neighbor on the left. This gives us clear glaze, C1, which contains one and a half percent black oxide of cobalt, or a matte glaze containing seven percent mazarine blue.

Glazes that will harmonize with side wall 8 through dominant arrangements are found in the same rectangle, O Y, and are numbered M5, M6, C7, C8. Glazes that will harmonize by analogy are C9 and M7, and are found in the left and right neighboring rectangles.

Glazes that will match with side wall 8 through dominant arrangements are located in the same rectangle, O Y, and are numbered M5, M6, C7, C8. Glazes that will match by analogy are C9 and M7, which are found in the left and right neighboring rectangles.

In Figure 466, the copper fob, R O, is combined with its complementary blue-green. Let us look at Figure 464. Counting seven intervals or hue rectangles to the right of the orange red rectangle we[215] find T4 which is transparent blue green enamel. We may associate with this an analogous enamel from the green rectangle; this proves to be T5 medium green transparent enamel.

In Figure 466, the copper fob, R O, is paired with its matching blue-green. Now, let's examine Figure 464. If we count seven steps or color rectangles to the right of the orange-red rectangle, we[215] find T4, which is a transparent blue-green enamel. We can connect this with an analogous enamel from the green rectangle; this turns out to be T5, a medium green transparent enamel.

Development of Design for Enamel on Metal

The point of concentration may now be emphasized by an enamel complementary to the blue green hue. Counting seven rectangles to the left we again encounter the red orange rectangle. Here there are no enamels but in the red hue rectangle we find T7 which is slightly orange-red. A small portion of this, Rule 12k, is applied and is found to center the design at the point of concentration in a satisfactory manner. Slight oxidation brings out the colors of the enamels.

The focus can now be highlighted with an enamel that complements the blue-green color. Counting seven rectangles to the left, we come across the red-orange rectangle again. There are no enamels here, but in the red hue rectangle, we find T7, which is a bit orange-red. A small amount of this, Rule 12k, is applied and effectively centers the design at the focal point. Light oxidation enhances the colors of the enamels.

Upon attempting to develop the same figure in opaque enamels it is soon seen that there are no pleasing complementary enamels of this type, but many analogous combinations. Autumn brown with the point of concentration developed in orange (O5) would be an excellent compromise.

Upon trying to create the same figure using opaque enamels, it's quickly apparent that there aren't any appealing complementary enamels of this type, but there are plenty of similar combinations. Autumn brown with the focal point developed in orange (O5) would be a great compromise.

Rule 12p. Correct color for surface enrichment should neither apparently rise above nor drop below the surface to which it is applied, but should stay upon the plane of that surface. Correct value and chroma range will accomplish this.

Rule 12p. The right color for surface enrichment shouldn’t seem to rise above or drop below the surface it’s applied to but should stay flush with that surface. The right value and chroma range will achieve this.

Color for Silver Enrichment

The gray-blue color of silver lends itself to a great number of gem stones, forming examples of contrasted arrangements. Care should be taken to form contrasts of value. Figure 467 is an example of a weak and insipid combination, lacking in value and hue contrast. The amethyst of Figure 468 corrects this error, while the oxidation of Figure 469 has partially corrected the lack of contrast shown in Figure 467. These illustrations tend to show that even stronger contrasts may be attempted with small gems and semi-precious stones than with enamels. This again proves the rule that the smaller areas are capable of sustaining stronger contrasts of hue, value, and chroma than are large ones.

The gray-blue color of silver can work well with many gemstones, creating striking combinations. It's important to create contrasts of value. Figure 467 is an example of a weak and boring combination, lacking in value and color contrast. The amethyst of Figure 468 fixes this mistake, while the oxidation of Figure 469 has somewhat improved the lack of contrast seen in Figure 467. These examples suggest that even bolder contrasts can be used with small gems and semi-precious stones compared to enamels. This again supports the idea that smaller areas can handle stronger contrasts of color, value, and saturation than larger ones.

SUMMARY OF DESIGN STEPS

The outline of the surface enrichment is considered as complete.

The outline for the surface enhancement is considered complete.

(a) Metal or Wood. Analyze the background into its hue, value, and chroma. Clay. Select a background that will harmonize with the controlling hue or hues of the proposed color scheme. Rule 12o. If this is a one hued[216] color scheme without gradation or surface enrichment the design steps may terminate at this point.

(a) Metal or Wood. Evaluate the background in terms of its color, value, and intensity. Clay. Select a background that complements the main color or colors of the proposed color scheme. Rule 12o. If this is a single-color[216] scheme without variations or additional textures, the design process can end here.

(b) Metal, Wood, and Clay. Select the extreme value range of the color scheme, considering, if possible, the background as a balancing or pivotal value point upon which the values may balance above and below. As the side walls formed a balancing point for the ceiling and furniture or wood work, so may the background of metal, wood, or colored clay become a similar balancing factor for small surfaces. Rule 12m.

(b) Metal, Wood, and Clay. Choose the extreme value range of the color scheme, considering the background as the central point from which the values can be balanced above and below. Just like the side walls serve as points of balance for the ceiling and furniture or woodwork, the background of metal, wood, or colored clay can also provide balance for smaller surfaces. Rule 12m.

(c) Metal, Wood, and Clay. Select a hue or hues which will harmonize with the background through dominant, contrasting, or analogous relations. Rule 12l. In selecting the hues consider the final placing of the object.

(c) Metal, Wood, and Clay. Select a color or colors that work well with the background using dominant, contrasting, or similar relationships. Rule 12l. When choosing colors, consider where the object will ultimately be placed.

(d) Metal, Wood, and Clay. Select a chroma range. Allow the point or area of concentration to have a slightly higher chromatic relation than the other hues. The point of concentration may be one of the hues already selected or it may bear a complementary relation to them. The hues may be averaged and a complementary to the average selected. Rule 12n.

(d) Metal, Wood, and Clay. Decide on a color range. Ensure the focal point or area stands out with a slightly more vibrant color than the other shades. This focal point can be one of the colors you’ve already chosen or one that complements them. You can average the colors and pick a complementary color to that average. Rule 12n.

(e) Metal, Wood, and Clay. Apply the rule of proportionate distribution, Rule 12k.

(e) Metal, Wood, and Clay. Apply the principle of balanced distribution, Rule 12k.

(f) Metal and Wood. Using the pigments suggested in Chapter XV, design the problem. Test the result by applying Rule 12p.

(f) Metal and Wood. Using the pigments mentioned in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, create the design for the project. Check the outcome using Rule 12p.

(g) Clay. If the design has been developed in slip or underglaze painting, select a glaze for an overglaze coating that will harmonize with the prevailing hues by dominance or analogy. Other arrangements may destroy the hues of the original color scheme.

(g) Clay. If the design is made using slip or underglaze painting, choose a glaze for the overglaze that complements the main colors through dominance or analogy. Other combinations might compromise the colors of the original scheme.

(h) Develop the problem in its material.

(h) Work through the problem in detail.

SUGGESTED PROBLEMS

Design a bowl for nasturtiums; make the color arrangement harmonize through analogy with the hues of the flowers.

Design a bowl for nasturtiums; ensure the color arrangement enhances the tones of the flowers.

Design a vase for chrysanthemums; make the surface enrichment and the color arrangement harmonize through dominance with the hues of the flowers.

Design a vase for chrysanthemums; ensure the surface decoration and color scheme work together to complement the dominant hues of the flowers.

Design a hat pin for a blue hat; materials, copper, and transparent enamels.

Design a hat pin for a blue hat using copper and clear enamels.

Design a brooch to be worn with a gray dress.

Design a brooch to wear with a gray dress.

Design a pottery and copper lamp with amber art glass in the shade. Through oxidation and glazing, bring the lamp into color unity.

Design a pottery and copper lamp with an amber art glass shade. Use oxidation and glazing to create a cohesive color scheme for the lamp.

SUMMARY OF RULES

Rule 12k. Proportionate distribution of hue, value, and chroma in surface enrichment calls for a small area high in chroma and contrasting in value to the rest of the surface, but harmonizing with it. This is usually located in the area of concentration. The larger areas are to be sufficiently reduced in chroma and value to form a slight contrast with the background.

Rule 12k. Balanced distribution of color, brightness, and saturation in surface enhancement requires a small spot that is vibrant in color and stands out brighter than the rest of the surface, yet still blends well with it. This is usually placed where the focus is. Larger areas should have lower intensity of color and brightness to create a subtle contrast with the background.

Hues for Small Objects

Rule 12l. One hue, or a group of analogous hues should dominate all color schemes. The point of concentration may be emphasized by one hue related to the[217] other hues by (1) contrasted, (2) dominant, (3) analogous, or (4) complementary relations. This hue should make slightly stronger value and chroma contrast than the remaining hues.

Rule 12l. One color, or a group of similar colors, should dominate all color schemes. The focal point can be emphasized by one color that relates to the[217]other colors through (1) contrast, (2) dominance, (3) similarity, or (4) complementarity. This color should have a slightly stronger value and chroma contrast than the other colors.

Values for Small Objects

Rule 12m. An extreme range of five values is generally sufficient to supply contrast to a design but still retain its value unity. Restraint in the use of values is essential.

Rule 12m. A wide range of five values is generally sufficient to provide contrast in a design while maintaining overall unity. It's important to use values judiciously.

Chroma for Small Objects

Rule 12n. The amount of chroma may be increased in proportion to the decrease in the decorated area. Exceptions may be made to this under Rule 12o.

Rule 12n. You can enhance the chroma based on the smaller size of the decorated area. Exceptions can be made under Rule 12o.

Rule 12o. Small one or two-hued projects in clay, designed to be used as a part of the decorative color scheme for a room should bear a contrasted, dominant, analogous, or complementary relation to the side walls of the room. The project may be much higher in chroma than the side walls.

Rule 12o. Small one or two-colored clay projects, intended to complement the room's decorative color scheme, should have a contrasting, dominant, analogous, or complementary relationship with the side walls. The project can have much more vibrant colors than the side walls.

Rule 12p. Correct color for surface enrichment should neither apparently rise above nor drop below the surface to which it is applied, but should stay upon the plane of that surface. Correct value and chroma range will accomplish this.

Rule 12p. The appropriate color for surface enhancement should not appear to rise above or fall below the surface it is applied to, but should stay on the same level as that surface. The right value and chroma range will achieve this.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. State the value of mono-hued pottery in the decorative scheme of a room.

1. Discuss the significance of single-colored pottery in the overall design of a room.

2. What are generally used as stains for clear glazes; matt glazes?

2. What are commonly used as stains for clear glazes and matte glazes?

3. What is highest in chroma—matt, or clear glaze?

3. Which type of glaze shows the most vibrant color—matte or glossy?

4. Make a table of metallic oxides and the hues produced by them.

4. Create a table of metallic oxides and their resulting colors.

5. Why will iron and copper oxides produce a yellow green stain? What stains will be produced by cobalt and copper oxides; cobalt and manganese oxides; cobalt and nickel oxides?

5. Why do iron and copper oxides produce a yellow-green stain? What stains are caused by cobalt and copper oxides; cobalt and manganese oxides; cobalt and nickel oxides?

6. Describe the type of room which you regard as best fitted for clear glazed pottery forms; matt glazed pottery forms.

6. Describe the kind of room that you think is best suited for clear-glazed pottery shapes and for matte-glazed pottery shapes.

7. Define harmony of color.

7. Define color harmony.

8. What is meant by proportionate distribution? Describe proportionate distribution.

8. What does proportionate distribution refer to? Explain proportionate distribution.

9. Give the value, hue, and chroma range for small areas. See Rules 12l, 12m, and 12n.

9. Provide the value, color, and saturation range for small areas. Refer to Rules 12l, 12m, and 12n.

10. How does the size of the area to be enriched by color affect the color medium, i.e., stains, glazes, enamels, etc.?

10. How does the size of the area being colored affect the coloring medium, i.e. stains, glazes, enamels, etc.?

11. Describe enamels, their types, characteristics, and range of hues. Consult catalogs for fuller possibilities.

11. Describe enamels, including their types, features, and color variety. Check catalogs for more options.

12. What is the effect of oxidation; what is its value?

12. What is the effect of oxidation, and why is it significant?

13. Describe fully complementary arrangements and give illustrations for enamel on silver or copper.

13. Describe complementary setups in detail and provide examples for enamel on silver or copper.

14. State the color scheme for a fob to be worn with a blue-green dress; with a gray suit for a man.

14. Specify the color scheme for a fob to wear with a blue-green dress and with a gray suit for a man.

15. Select a stone for a silver brooch that would harmonize with a light blue dress; for a dress of orange dark hue and value. See catalogs of dealers in semi-precious stones for color of stones.

15. Choose a stone for a silver brooch that matches a light blue dress; and for a dress in a dark orange shade and tone. Look at catalogs from semi-precious stone dealers for the colors of the stones.

16. What problems of hue, value, and chroma would arise in Question 15?

16. What issues with color, brightness, and intensity might arise in Question 15?


SUMMARY OF THE GENERAL AND SPECIAL RULES IN THE PRECEEDING CHAPTERS

Horizontal and Vertical Primary Masses

Rule 1a. A primary mass must be either vertical or horizontal according to the intended service, unless prohibited by technical requirements.

Rule 1a. A primary mass must be either vertical or horizontal based on the intended service, unless there are technical requirements that prevent this.

Proportions of the Primary Mass

Rule 1b. The primary mass should have the ratio of one to three, three to four, three to five, five to eight, seven to ten, or some similar proportion difficult for the eye to detect readily and analyze.

Rule 1b. The main mass should have a ratio of one to three, three to four, three to five, five to eight, seven to ten, or some similar proportion that's hard for the eye to easily notice and analyze.

Horizontal Space Divisions

Rule 2a. If the primary mass is divided into two horizontal divisions, the dominance should be either in the upper or the lower section.

Rule 2a. If the main mass is split into two horizontal sections, the dominance should be in either the top or the bottom section.

Rule 2b. If the primary mass is divided into three horizontal divisions or sections, the dominance should be placed in the center section with varying widths in the upper and lower thirds.

Rule 2b. If the main part is divided into three horizontal sections, the focus should be in the center section with different widths in the upper and lower thirds.

Sequential Progression of Minor Horizontal Space Divisions

Rule 2c. A primary mass may be divided into three or more smaller horizontal masses or sections by placing the larger mass or masses at the bottom and by sequentially reducing the height measure of each mass toward the smaller division or divisions to be located at the top of the mass.

Rule 2c. A main mass can be split into three or more smaller horizontal masses or sections by positioning the larger mass or masses at the bottom and gradually decreasing the height of each mass towards the smaller sections that will be placed at the top of the mass.

Vertical Space Divisions

Rule 3a. If the primary mass is divided into two vertical divisions, the divisions should be equal in area and similar in form.

Rule 3a. If the main mass is split into two vertical sections, those sections should be equal in area and similar in shape.

Rule 3b. If the primary mass is divided into three vertical divisions, the center division should be the larger, with the remaining divisions of equal size.

Rule 3b. If the main part is split into three vertical sections, the middle section should be the largest, with the other sections being the same size.

Rule 3c. In elementary problems, if more than three vertical divisions are required, they should be so grouped as to analyze into Rules 3a, and 3b, or be exactly similar.

Rule 3c. In basic problems, if more than three vertical divisions are needed, they should be organized in a way that can be broken down into Rules 3a and 3b, or be identical.

Appendages

Rule 4a. The appendage should be designed in unity with, and proportionately related to, the vertical or horizontal character of the primary mass, but subordinated to it.

Rule 4a. The addition should be designed to match and be proportionate to the vertical or horizontal nature of the main structure, but it should be subordinate to it.

Rule 4b. The appendage should have the appearance of flowing smoothly and, if possible, tangentially from the primary mass.

Rule 4b. The appendage should look like it flows smoothly and, if possible, extends tangentially from the main body.

Rule 4c. The appendage should, if possible, echo or repeat some lines similar in character and direction to those of the primary mass.

Rule 4c. The addition should, if possible, reflect or repeat some lines that are similar in character and direction to those of the main body.

Outline or Contour Enrichment

Rule 5a. Outline enrichment should be subordinated to and support the structure.

Rule 5a. Outline enrichment should be secondary to and enhance the structure.

Rule 5b. Outline enrichment should add grace, lightness, and variety to the design.

Rule 5b. Outline enrichment should enhance the design with elegance, brightness, and diversity.

Rule 5c. Outline enrichment, by its similarity, should give a sense of oneness or unity to the design, binding divergent members together.

Rule 5c. Outline enrichment, due to its similarity, should create a feeling of oneness or unity in the design, bringing together different elements.

Rule 5d. Parts of one design differing in function should differ in appearance but be co-ordinated with the entire design.

Rule 5d. Different functional parts of a design should look different but be coordinated with the overall design.

Rule 5e. In cylindrical forms outline curves with a vertical tendency should have their turning points or units of measurement in accordance with the horizontal divisions of Rules 2a and 2b.

Rule 5e. In cylindrical shapes, the curves that lean vertically should have their turning points or measurement units in line with the horizontal divisions of Rules 2a and 2b.

Rule 5f. Dependent outline enrichment should be related to essential parts of a design and influenced by their forms and functions; it must be consistent with the idea of the subject.

Rule 5f. Dependent outline enrichment should be connected to the key elements of a design and shaped by their forms and functions; it needs to align with the main idea of the subject.

Rule 5g. A curve should join a straight line with either a tangential or right angle junction.

Rule 5g. A curve should connect to a straight line either at a tangent or at a right angle.

Surface Enrichment

Postulate. The design should conform to the limitations and requirements of tools, processes, and materials, and should be durable and suitable for service.

Postulate. The design should meet the limitations and requirements of tools, processes, and materials, and should be durable and appropriate for use.

Rule 6a. Surfaces to be enriched must admit of enrichment.

Rule 6a. Surfaces that need enrichment must be suitable for it.

Rule 6b. Surface enrichment must be related to the structural contours but must not obscure the actual structure.

Rule 6b. Surface enrichment needs to connect with the structural shapes but should not hide the actual structure.

Rule 6c. The treatment must be appropriate to the material.

Rule 6c. The treatment should be suitable for the material.

Continuous Bands and Borders for Partly Enriched Surfaces

Rule 6d. Bands and borders should have a consistent lateral, that is, onward movement.

Rule 6d. Bands and borders should have consistent lateral, or forward, movement.

Rule 6e. Bands and borders should never have a prominent contrary motion, opposed to the main forward movement.

Rule 6e. Bands and borders shouldn’t have a noticeable backward movement that goes against the main forward direction.

Rule 6f. All component parts of a border should move in unison with the main movement of the border.

Rule 6f. All parts of a border should move together with the main movement of the border.

Rule 6g. Each component part of a border should be strongly dynamic and, if possible, partake of the main movements of the border.

Rule 6g. Each part of a border should be lively and, if possible, connect with the main movements of the border.

Rule 6h. Borders intended for vertical surfaces may have a strongly upward movement in addition to the lateral movement, provided the lateral movement dominates.

Rule 6h. Borders meant for vertical surfaces can have a noticeable upward movement along with the side-to-side movement, as long as the side-to-side movement is the main focus.

Rule 6i. Inlayed enrichment should never form strong or glaring contrasts with the parent surface.

Rule 6i. Inlaid enrichment should never create harsh or obvious contrasts with the base surface.

Rule 6j. Carved surface enrichment should have the appearance of belonging to the parent mass.

Rule 6j. Carved surface enhancement should look like it naturally belongs to the main material.

Enclosed Enrichment—Partly Enriched Panels for Surface Enrichment

Rule 7a. Marginal panel enrichment should parallel or be related to the outlines of the primary mass and to the panel it is to enrich.

Rule 7a. Marginal panel enrichment should align with or be connected to the outlines of the main mass and to the panel it is meant to enhance.

Rule 7b. Marginal points of concentration in panels should be placed (1) preferably at the corners or (2) in the center of each margin.

Rule 7b. Minor focus points in panels should be located (1) ideally at the corners or (2) in the center of each margin.

Rule 7c. To insure unity of design in panels, the elements composing the point of concentration and links connecting them must be related to the panel contour and to each other.

Rule 7c. To ensure a unified design in panels, the elements that create the focal point and the connections between them must relate to the panel's shape and to one another.

Enclosed Enrichment—Fully Enriched Panels for Surface Enrichment

Rule 7d. The contours of fully enriched panels should parallel the outlines of the primary mass and repeat its proportions.

Rule 7d. The shapes of fully enriched panels should match the outlines of the main mass and reflect its proportions.

Rule 7e. The points of concentration for a fully enriched square panel may be in its center or in its outer margin.

Rule 7e. The focus points for a fully enriched square panel can be at its center or along its outer edge.

Rule 7f. The points of concentration for a fully enriched vertical panel should be in the upper portion of the panel.

Rule 7f. The main focus for a fully enriched vertical panel should be in the upper part of the panel.

Rule 7g. The fully enriched panel and its contents should be designed in unified relation to the structural outlines, with the center line of the panel coinciding with the inceptive axis of the structure.

Rule 7g. The fully enriched panel and its contents should be designed to relate cohesively to the structural outlines, with the center line of the panel aligned with the initial axis of the structure.

Free Ornament for Partly Enriched Surfaces

Rule 8a. Free ornament for partly or fully enriched surfaces should be based and centered upon an inceptive axis of the structure.

Rule 8a. Free decoration for partially or fully enriched surfaces should be based and centered around the initial axis of the structure.

Rule 8b. Free ornament should be related and subordinated to the structural surfaces.

Rule 8b. Decorative elements should be connected to and support the structural surfaces.

Rule 8c. Points of concentration in free enrichment of vertically placed masses are usually located in and around the inceptive axis and above or below the geometric center of the design.

Rule 8c. Points of focus in the free arrangement of vertically positioned masses are typically found in and around the initial axis and above or below the geometric center of the design.

Surface Enrichment of Clay

Rule 9a. Surface enrichment of clay must be so designed as to be able to withstand the action of heat to which all ware must be submitted.

Rule 9a. The surface enrichment of clay must be designed to withstand the heat that all ware will be exposed to.

Rule 9b. Incised, pierced, and modeled decoration in clay should be simple and bold and thus adapted to the character of the material.

Rule 9b. Carved, pierced, and shaped designs in clay should be straightforward and striking, reflecting the nature of the material.

Rule 9c. A border should not be located at the point of greatest curvature in the contour of a cylindrical form. The contour curve is of sufficient interest in itself at that point.

Rule 9c. A border shouldn't be placed at the point of greatest curvature in the contour of a cylindrical shape. The contour curve is interesting enough on its own at that point.

Surface Enrichment of Base and Precious Metals For Small Masses

Rule 10a. Designs in precious metals should call for the minimum amount of metal necessary to express the idea of the designer for two reasons: (1) good taste; (2) economy of material.

Rule 10a. Designs in precious metals should use the least amount of metal needed to convey the designer's idea for two reasons: (1) good taste; (2) cost efficiency.

Rule 10b. Contour and surface enrichment should never appear to compete for attention in the same design.

Rule 10b. Contour and surface enhancement should never seem to compete for attention in the same design.

Rule 10c. Parts of a design differing in function should differ in appearance but be co-ordinated with the entire design.

Rule 10c. Different functional parts of a design should look different but still be coordinated with the overall design.

Rule 10d. Surface enrichment should at some point parallel the contours of both primary mass and point of concentration especially whenever the latter is a stone or enamel.

Rule 10d. Surface enrichment should eventually match the contours of both the main mass and the point of concentration, especially when the latter is a stone or enamel.

Rule 10e. In the presence of either stone or enamel as a point of concentration, surface enrichment should be regarded as an unobtrusive setting, or background.

Rule 10e. When either stone or enamel is used as a focal point, surface enrichment should be seen as a subtle setting or backdrop.

Rule 10f. Stone or enamel used as a point of concentration should form contrast with the metal, either in color, brilliancy, or value, or all three combined.

Rule 10f. Stone or enamel used as a focus should stand out against the metal, whether in color, brightness, value, or all three together.

Rule 10g. The inceptive axis should pass through and coincide with one axis of a stone and at the same time be sympathetically related to the structure.

Rule 10g. The starting axis should go through and align with one axis of a stone and also be harmoniously connected to the structure.

Rule 10h. The position of the inceptive axis should be determined by: (1) use of the project as ring, pendant, or bar pin, (2) character of the primary mass as either vertical or horizontal in proportion.

Rule 10h. The position of the inceptive axis should be determined by: (1) using the project as a ring, pendant, or bar pin, (2) the nature of the primary mass being either vertical or horizontal in proportion.

Rule 10i. Caution should be exercised with regard to the use of enamel. Over-decoration by this material tends to cheapen both process and design.

Rule 10i. Be careful when using enamel. Overusing this material can make both the process and the design look cheap.

Rule 10j. All surface enrichment should have an appearance of compactness or unity. Pierced spots or areas should be so used as to avoid the appearance of having been scattered on the surface without thought to their coherence.

Rule 10j. All surface enrichment should look compact or unified. Any punctured spots or areas should be arranged to prevent the impression that they were randomly scattered on the surface without considering their connection.

Rule 10k. Built, carved, and chased enrichment should have the higher planes near the point of concentration. It is well to have the stone as the highest point above the primary mass. When using this form of enrichment, the stone should never appear to rise abruptly from the primary mass, but should be approached by a series of rising planes.

Rule 10k. Built, carved, and chased embellishments should have the higher surfaces close to the focal point. It's best to have the stone as the highest element above the main mass. When using this type of embellishment, the stone should never seem to jut out suddenly from the main mass, but should be approached through a series of ascending surfaces.

Rule 10l. The lanes or margins between enameled spots should be narrower than the lane or margin between the enamel and the contour of the primary mass.

Rule 10l. The gaps or margins between enameled areas should be thinner than the gap or margin between the enamel and the outline of the main body.

Rule 10m. Transparent and opaque stones or enamel should not be used in the same design.

Rule 10m. Clear and dark stones or enamel shouldn't be used in the same design.

Surface Enrichment of Base and Precious Metals For Large Primary Masses

Rule 11a. The preliminary steps toward surface enrichment should be thought out before they are drawn.

Rule 11a. The initial steps for surface enrichment should be planned out before they are executed.

Rule 11b. Conservative application should mark the use of surface enrichment of large masses. Its use should: (1) lighten or soften necessarily heavy construction; (2) support or apparently strengthen good structure; (3) add interest to large unbroken and uninteresting surfaces.

Rule 11b. A careful approach should guide the use of surface enrichment for large masses. Its application should: (1) lessen or soften overly heavy construction; (2) support or seem to strengthen a solid structure; (3) add visual interest to large, plain, and uninviting surfaces.

Rule 11c. The type of design unit for large masses should be bolder than similar designs for small primary masses.

Rule 11c. The design for large masses should be more prominent than that for smaller primary masses.

Rule 11d. The eye should be attracted to one principal zone of enrichment, whether located upon the primary mass, appendage, terminal, links, or details. All other zones should be subordinate to this area.

Rule 11d. The focus should be on one main area of enhancement, whether it's on the main body, an appendage, the tip, connections, or details. All other areas should support this focal point.

Rule 11e. Two periods of historic ornament should not be introduced into the same design.

Rule 11e. Two types of historical ornament should not be used in the same design.

Rule 11f. Repulsive forms should not be introduced into surface enrichment.

Rule 11f. Unpleasant forms should not be included in surface enrichment.

Application of Color To Large Areas

VALUES

Rule 12a. An average wood stain is to be retained between the values middle and low dark.

Rule 12a. A standard wood stain should be kept within the middle and low dark values.

Rule 12b. An average wall hue is to be retained between the values light and middle.

Rule 12b. The wall color should stay between light and medium shades.

Rule 12c. An average ceiling hue is to be retained between the values white (minus) and light.

Rule 12c. An average ceiling color should be kept between the shades of white (minus) and light.

Rule 12d. The relation between the side walls and furniture, trim, etc., should be retained within the range of four values or less, as low light and dark.

Rule 12d. The relationship between the side walls and furniture, trim, etc., should be kept within a range of four values or less, such as light and dark.

Rule 12e. The relation between the side walls and ceiling should be within the range of three values or less, as high light and low light.

Rule 12e. The relationship between the side walls and the ceiling should be within three values or fewer, such as high light and low light.

HUES

Rule 12f. Color schemes for wood work and side walls should preferably be selected from one of the following groupings: analogous, contrasted, or dominant arrangements of hues. Analogous grouping is preferable where variety of hue is desirable.

Rule 12f. When choosing color schemes for woodwork and side walls, it’s best to select from one of the following options: analogous, contrasting, or dominant color arrangements. An analogous grouping is ideal when you want a variety of hues.

Rule 12g. Ceilings should be colored by a lighter tint of the side walls or by a lighter tint of an analogous hue.

Rule 12g. Ceilings should be painted a lighter shade of the side walls or a lighter shade of a similar color.

CHROMA

Rule 12h. Stains are usually not reduced to below three-fourths chromatic intensity. Nearly gray side walls, however, call for a reduction to one-fourth intensity.

Rule 12h. Stains are typically not lowered to below three-fourths chromatic intensity. However, almost gray side walls require a reduction to one-fourth intensity.

Rule 12i. Wall colors are usually reduced to three-fourths chroma to a minimum reduction of slightly less than one-fourth chroma.

Rule 12i. Wall colors are typically toned down to three-fourths chroma, with a minimum reduction of just under one-fourth chroma.

Rule 12j. Ceilings should usually be reduced in chroma to three-fourths intensity, with slightly less than one-fourth chroma as a minimum reduction.

Rule 12j. Ceilings should generally be reduced in color intensity to three-fourths, with a minimum reduction of slightly less than one-fourth of the color intensity.

DISTRIBUTION

Rule 12k. Proportionate distribution of hue, value, and chroma in surface enrichment calls for a small area, high in chroma, and contrasting in value to the rest of the surface, but harmonizing with it. This is usually located in the area of concentration. The larger areas are to be sufficiently reduced in chroma and value to form slight contrast with the background.

Rule 12k. To achieve a balanced distribution of color, brightness, and saturation in surface enhancement, you should include a small area that is vibrant in color and has a contrasting brightness compared to the rest of the surface, while still blending well with it. This is typically found in the focal point of the composition. The larger areas should be toned down in both saturation and brightness to create a subtle contrast with the background.

HUES FOR SMALL OBJECTS

Rule 12l. One hue, or a group of analogous hues should dominate all color schemes. The point of concentration may be emphasized by one hue related to the other hues by (1) contrasted, (2) dominant, (3) analogous, (4) complementary relations. This hue should make slightly stronger value and chroma contrast than the remaining hues.

Rule 12l. One color, or a group of similar colors, should dominate all color schemes. The focal point can be highlighted by one color that relates to the others through (1) contrast, (2) dominance, (3) similarity, or (4) complementary relationships. This color should create a slightly stronger contrast in value and saturation than the other colors.

VALUES FOR SMALL OBJECTS

Rule 12m. An extreme range of five values is generally sufficient to supply contrast to a design but still retain its value unity. Restraint in the use of values is essential.

Rule 12m. A wide range of five values is usually enough to create contrast in a design while keeping its overall unity. It's important to use values with restraint.

CHROMA FOR SMALL OBJECTS

Rule 12n. The amount of chroma may be increased in proportion to the decrease in the decorated area. Exceptions may be made to this under Rule 12o.

Rule 12n. The amount of chroma can be increased as the decorated area decreases. Exceptions to this can be made under Rule 12o.

Rule 12o. Small one or two-hued projects in clay, designed to be used as a part of the decorative color scheme for a room should bear a contrasted, dominant, analogous, or complementary relation to the side walls of the room. The project may be much higher in chroma than the side walls.

Rule 12o. Small one or two-colored clay projects intended to enhance the room's decorative color scheme should have a contrasting, dominant, analogous, or complementary relationship with the side walls of the room. The project can be much more vibrant than the side walls.

Rule 12p. Correct color for surface enrichment should neither apparently rise above nor drop below the surface to which it is applied, but should stay upon the plane of that surface. Correct value and chroma range will accomplish this.

Rule 12p. The right color for surface enrichment shouldn't noticeably rise above or drop below the surface it’s applied to, but should remain on the same plane as that surface. The right value and chroma range will achieve this.


APPENDIX

The following plates comprise complete courses for applied art problems in thin metal (copper and silver), and clay. The problems are based upon what is known as the "group system." The process forms the basis for each group in each course. The stated problem in each group is merely one of many that might be selected which involves the process of the group.

The following plates include complete courses for practical art projects in thin metal (copper and silver) and clay. The projects are based on what’s referred to as the "group system." The process serves as the foundation for each group in every course. The problem outlined in each group is just one of many that could be chosen, all involving the group's process.

The design rule that should be applied to each problem has been indicated by its proper figure and letter on each plate, as 10a, etc. The plates are sequentially arranged in order of the difficulty of the process and may be summarized as follows.

The design rule that should be used for each problem is shown by its corresponding figure and letter on each plate, like 10a, etc. The plates are organized in order of the difficulty of the process and can be summarized like this.

Thin Metal

Plate 67: Bending. Sawing. Riveting.
Plate 68: Bending. Soft Soldering.
Plate 69: Raising. Piercing. Etching.
Plate 70: Raising and Planishing.
Plate 71: Bending. Piercing. Etching. Hard Soldering.
Plate 72: Hinge Construction.
Plate 73: Raising. Planishing. Hard Soldering.
Plate 74: Raising. Planishing.
Plate 75: Champleve Enamelling.
Plate 76: Precious Stone Mounting; Pins.
Plate 77: Precious Stone Mounting; Rings.
Plate 78: Precious Stone Mounting; Pendants.

Plate 67: Bending. Sawing. Riveting.
Plate 68: Bending. Soft Soldering.
Plate 69: Raising. Piercing. Etching.
Plate 70: Raising and Planishing.
Plate 71: Bending. Piercing. Etching. Hard Soldering.
Plate 72: Hinge Construction.
Plate 73: Raising. Planishing. Hard Soldering.
Plate 74: Raising. Planishing.
Plate 75: Champleve Enameling.
Plate 76: Precious Stone Mounting; Pins.
Plate 77: Precious Stone Mounting; Rings.
Plate 78: Precious Stone Mounting; Pendants.

Pottery

Plate 79: Hand Built Tile.
Plate 80: Hand Built Bowl, Coil and Strip Method.
Plate 81: Same with Appendage Added.
Plate 82: Hand Building; Spouts, Lids, Handles.
Plate 83: Poured Forms and Mould Making.
Plate 84: Slip Painting.
Plate 85: Glaze Testing.

Plate 79: Handcrafted Tile.
Plate 80: Handcrafted Bowl, Coil and Strip Technique.
Plate 81: Same with Added Features.
Plate 82: Hand Building; Spouts, Lids, Handles.
Plate 83: Poured Forms and Mold Making.
Plate 84: Slip Painting.
Plate 85: Glaze Testing.

[224] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 1. Bending, Sawing, Riveting.

Plate 67

Plate 67

[225] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 2: Bending and Soft Soldering.

Plate 68

Plate 68

[226] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 3: Raising, Piercing, Etching.

Plate 69

Plate 69

[227] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 3: Raising, Planishing: Trays.

Plate 70

Plate 70

[228] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 4: Bending, Piercing, Etching, Hard Soldering.

Plate 71

Plate 71

[229] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 5: Hinge construction.

Plate 72

Plate 72

[230] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 6: Raising, Planishing, Soldering.

Plate 73

Plate 73

[231] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 7: Raising, Planishing.

Plate 74

Plate 74

[232] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 8: Champleve Enamelling.

Plate 75

Plate 75

[233] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 9: Semi-precious Stone Mounting.

Plate 76

Plate 76

[234] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 10: Soldering, Carving, Stone Mounting.

Plate 77

Plate 77

[235] Applied Arts: Thin Metal. Process 11: Pendant Construction, Chain Making.

Plate 78

Plate 78

[236]

Figure 470.—Inceptive Axes. Partial Illustration of the Metal Course.

Figure 470.—Beginning Axes. Partial Illustration of the Metal Path.

[237] Applied Arts: Clay Pottery. Process 1: Hand Built Tile, Cut from Flat Piece.

Plate 79

Plate 79

[238] Applied Arts: Clay Pottery. Process 2: Hand Building. Coil and Strip.

Plate 80

Plate 80

[239] Applied Arts: Clay Pottery. Process 3: Hand Building, Spout, Handle, Lid.

Plate 81

Plate 81

[240] Applied Arts: Clay Pottery. Process 3: Hand Building: Spout, Handle, Lid.

Plate 82

Plate 82

[241] Applied Arts: Clay Pottery. Process 4: Poured Forms. Two and Three Piece Moulds.

Plate 83

Plate 83

[242] Applied Arts: Clay Pottery. Process 5: Slip Painting (Under Glaze Decoration).

Plate 84

Plate 84

[243] Applied Arts: Clay Pottery. Process 6: Glaze Testing.

Plate 85

Plate 85

[244]

Figure 471.—Results of the Pottery Course

Figure 471.—Pottery Course Results

Figure 471 shows the actual results produced by the preceding course. The process to which the individual pieces belong is indicated by the small figure placed on the table and in front of the ware. The preceding sheets should be regarded in the light of suggestions for original thinking on the part of the student. They merely suggest technical guidance, in order that his progress may be sequential and fitted to his increasing skill.

Figure 471 shows the actual results produced by the previous course. The process that each piece belongs to is indicated by the small figure placed on the table and in front of the items. The earlier sheets should be seen as suggestions for original thinking on the part of the student. They simply offer technical guidance, so that his progress can be sequential and aligned with his growing skill.

The glazes are stated in the terms of the ceramist with the proportions of base, alumina, and acid content of each glaze clearly stated. By referring to the textbooks mentioned in the preface, these glazes may be developed into the potter's formulae.

The glazes are described using the ceramist's terminology, clearly outlining the proportions of base, alumina, and acid content for each glaze. By consulting the textbooks mentioned in the preface, these glazes can be turned into the potter's recipes.

In both metal and pottery courses, two or more types are frequently represented upon one plate. These types will allow the teacher to assign a more difficult problem to the student with some previous experience.

In both metal and pottery classes, two or more types are often displayed on one plate. These types will enable the teacher to give a more challenging task to the student who has some prior experience.


INDEX

  • Accenting bands in wood, 105
  • Accentuation of functional parts, 79
  • Adapting data to material, 127
  • Analogous hues, 203
  • Analysis, intelligent, 7
  • Andiron design, 53
  • Aniline wood dyes, 199
  • Appendage design, 43-49
  • Appendage, use of, 43
  • Appendages, 43
  • Appendages and primary mass, 45
  • Appendages, contour enrichment of, 88
  • Appendages, design violations, 43
  • Appendages in clay, 47
  • Appendages, industrial applications, 47
  • Appendages, influence of tools and materials, 53
  • Appendages in metal, 51
  • Appendages in wood, 45
  • Artificial objects, 129
  • Architectural, horizontal divisions for, 21
  • Bands, wood inlay, 105
  • Backgrounds, 113, 201
  • Base metals, enrichment of, 87
  • Base and precious metals, surface enrichment of, 160, 163, 165, 167
  • Borders for wood, 107
  • Building, 165
  • Candlesticks, 81
  • Carving, 103
  • Carving and piercing, 141
  • Carving, design steps for, 105
  • Ceilings, 202-205
  • Center zone enrichment, 121
  • Chasing, 163
  • Chip carving, 115
  • Chroma, 197
  • Chromatic intensity, full, 195
  • Clay, coloring for underglaze, 151
  • Clay, decorative processes, 145
  • Clay, incising, 147
  • Clay, inlay, 149
  • Clay, introduction of pigments, 149
  • Clay, modeling, 147
  • Clay, piercing, 147
  • Clay, slip painting, 149
  • Clay, surface enrichment for, 145
  • Clay, surface enrichment, structural classification for, 151
  • Clay, underglaze painting, 151
  • Color for clay enrichment, 209
  • Color for small areas, 210
  • Color harmony, 201
  • Color pigments, 194
  • Color pigments, application of, 194
  • Color symbols, 198
  • Color systems, 194
  • Commercial pottery, 158
  • Complementary hues, 214
  • Conservative use of ornament, 101
  • Contrasted hues, 203
  • Containers, 81
  • Continuity and contrast, 63
  • Contour enrichment, influence of materials, 65
  • Contour enrichment, methods of varying, 70
  • Contour enrichment of clay, need of, 77
  • Contour enrichment, evolution of, 65
  • Contour enrichment, purpose of, 59
  • Contour enrichment, requirements of, 59
  • Contour enrichment, systematic development of, 81
  • Contour versus surface enrichment, 185
  • Corners, contour enrichment of, 88
  • Correlation, ideal, 11
  • Covers, design for, 49
  • Criticism, clear, 7
  • Criticism, non-technical, 7
  • Curve of beauty, 91
  • Curve of force, 61
  • Curve of force, approximate, 61
  • Curves for contour enrichment, 59
  • Curves, grouping of, 63
  • Curves of extravagance, 73
  • Dependent surface enrichment, 167
  • Details, contour enrichment of, 93
  • Design evolution, major divisions, 9
  • Design evolution, steps in, 11
  • Design, preliminary thought, 17
  • Dominant hue, 204
  • Dynamic curves and areas, 111
  • Edges, contour enrichment of, 87
  • Elements, 157
  • Enameling, 163, 212, 213, 215
  • Enrichment for small metal areas, 179
  • Enrichment, need and value of, 57
  • Enrichment of large metal areas, 179, 183
  • Enrichment, types of, 57
  • Essentials of good surface enrichment, 179
  • Exposures, 206, 207
  • Flat surfaces in base and precious metal, 185
  • Fobs, design of, 169
  • Four vertical minor divisions, 139
  • Free balance, 129
  • Free enrichment, 121
  • Free minor division treatment, 141
  • Free ornament, 117
  • Freehand curves, 30, 51, 63
  • Full size drawing, value of, 23
  • Functional parts, enrichment of, 88
  • Glazes for pottery, 149
  • Glazes related to interior decoration, 214
  • Glazes, stains for, 209
  • Greek scroll, 93
  • Handles, design for, 49
  • Harmonious color, need of, 194
  • Harmony of color, 210
  • High cylindrical forms in clay, 157
  • High cylindrical forms in metal, 191
  • Historic ornament in hardware, 186
  • Horizontal and vertical minor divisions, 137
  • Horizontal divisions, architectural precedent, 25
  • Horizontal divisions, nature and need of, 19
  • Horizontal divisions, steps in designing, 21
  • Horizontal minor divisions, 139
  • Hue and hue rectangles, 195
  • Hue groupings, 203
  • Industrial problems, requirements of, 9
  • Inceptive axes, 107, 121, 161
  • Inceptive axes for marginal enrichment, 119
  • Inlaying, 101-103
  • Intermediate points, contour enrichment of, 89
  • Ionic volute, 91
  • Leading lines, curved, 108
  • Links, 45
  • Links, contour enrichment of, 93
  • Low cylindrical forms in clay, 157
  • Low cylindrical forms in metal, 187
  • Major design division, first, 9
  • Major design division, second, 9
  • Major design division, third, 11
  • Marginal zone enrichment, 118
  • Material, adapting data to, 127
  • Material, economy of, 161
  • Material, relation to surface enrichment, 101
  • Metallic oxides, 210
  • Methods, architectural design, 13
  • Methods, industrial design, 13
  • Minor details, 141
  • Minor subdivisions in wood, 133
  • Moorish ornament, 107
  • Mouldings, 61
  • One vertical division, 35
  • Outlines, free and dependent, 87, 91 (See Contours.)
  • Oxidation, 213
  • Panels, 117, 123, 125, 127, 129
  • Panel design, steps in, 125
  • Parts differing in function, 77
  • Pendants and chains, design of, 173
  • Pierced enrichment, 123
  • Pigment table, 195
  • Pigments, wall and ceiling, 205
  • Pins and brooches, design of, 167
  • Point of concentration, 115, 161
  • Point of concentration for marginal enrichment, 119
  • Porcelain painting, 151
  • Pourers, 81
  • Precious metals, processes of enrichment, 161, 163, 165, 169
  • Primary hues, 198
  • Primary masses, 13
  • Primary mass, drawing of, 15
  • Primary mass, divisions of, 19
  • Primary masses, vertical and horizontal, 15
  • Primary masses, proportions of, 15
  • Proportionate distribution, 210
  • Ratios, unsatisfactory, 17
  • Rectangular panels, 127
  • Rings, design of, 169
  • Sequential progression, 135
  • Service, influence of, 9, 13, 15
  • Sets, designing of, 83
  • Shades, 197
  • Shallow circular forms in clay, 155
  • Shallow circular forms in metal, 187
  • Side walls, 202-205
  • Silver, color for, 215
  • Silver, contour enrichment of, 93
  • Silver, free outline enrichment, 97
  • Silver, motives for contour enrichment, 97
  • Spouts, design of, 49
  • Square and rectangular areas in clay, 153
  • Square panels, 125
  • Standard hues, 195
  • Standard hues, locating, 196
  • Stones, cutting, 95
  • Stones, relation to contour, 95
  • Stones, relation to metal, 173
  • Structural forms, classification, 160
  • Structural forms, classification for clay surface enrichment, 151
  • Structural reinforcement, 118
  • Surface design evolution, 180
  • Surface enrichment, nature and need of, 99
  • Surfaces, when and where to enrich, 99
  • Tangential junctions, 51, 93
  • Technical processes for metal, 163
  • Technical rendering, 161
  • Terminals, contour enrichment of, 89-91
  • Three horizontal divisions, 29
  • Three horizontal divisions in clay, 30
  • Three horizontal divisions in metal, 30
  • Three horizontal divisions in wood, 29
  • Three vertical divisions, 37
  • Three vertical divisions in clay, 39
  • Three vertical divisions in metal, 41
  • Three vertical divisions in wood, 39
  • Tints, 196
  • Transitional types in furniture, 139
  • Two horizontal divisions, 25
  • Two horizontal divisions in clay, 27
  • Two horizontal divisions in metal, 27
  • Two horizontal divisions in wood, 25
  • Two vertical divisions, 35
  • Two vertical divisions in clay, 37
  • Two vertical divisions in metal, 37
  • Two vertical divisions in wood, 35
  • Unit of measurement for vertical curves, 79
  • Unity, 29
  • Unity in clay design curves, 77
  • Value lines, 196
  • Varied panels, 129
  • Vertical divisions, architectural precedent, 33
  • Vertical divisions, more than three, 41
  • Vertical divisions, nature and need, 33
  • Vertical and horizontal division evolution, 40
  • Vertical sections and their minor divisions, 133-135
  • Vocabulary, designer's, 105
  • Walls and ceilings, 203-204
  • Walls and wood work, 202-203
  • Warm and cold colors, 198
  • Wood finishes, opaque, 206
  • Wood, methods of surface enrichment, 101
  • Wood stains, 198
  • Wood stains, chroma range, 205
  • Wood stain mixing, 199, 200
  • Wood stain rendering, 195
  • Wood stains, value range, 201
  • Wrought iron enrichment, 91
  • Zones of enrichment, 118

Transcriber's Note

Inconsistent hyphenation and obvious punctuation and spelling errors have been corrected.

Inconsistent hyphenation and clear punctuation and spelling mistakes have been fixed.

Although referred to on page 75, no illustration is captioned as "Plate 23" in the original text.

Although mentioned on page 75, no illustration is labeled as "Plate 23" in the original text.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!